GE XR6000 X-Ray - Service Manual

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 1

Thursday, October 30, 2014

1:28 PM

GE Healthcare gehealthcare.com

Technical  Publication Direction 5275601-100 Revision 12

Copyright © 2007~2008 by General Electric Company, Inc. All Rights Reserved

[email protected]

GE Healthcare Medical Diagnostic Radiography XR 6000 Service Manual

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 2


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12

1:28 PM

 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL

[email protected]

Page 2

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 3


1:28 PM



Legal Notes TRADEMARKS All other products and their name brands are the trademarks of their respective holders.

COPYRIGHTS All Material, Copyright © 2007~2008 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved. The material presented and contained herein may not be reproduced in any form or manner, without the written permission of General Electric Company, Inc.

[email protected]

Legal Notes

Page 3

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 4


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 This page is intentionally left blank.

[email protected]

Page 4

Legal Notes

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 5


1:28 PM



Important Precautions LANGUAGE

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ (BG)

 ТОВА УПЪТВАНЕ ЗА РАБОТА Е НАЛИЧНО САМО НА АНГЛИЙСКИ ЕЗИК.  АКО ДОСТАВЧИКЪТ НА УСЛУГАТА НА КЛИЕНТА ИЗИСКА ЕЗИК, РАЗЛИЧЕН ОТ АНГЛИЙСКИ, ЗАДЪЛЖЕНИЕ НА КЛИЕНТА Е ДА ОСИГУРИ ПРЕВОД.  НЕ ИЗПОЛЗВАЙТЕ ОБОРУДВАНЕТО ПРЕДИ ДА СТЕ СЕ КОНСУЛТИРАЛИ И РАЗБРАЛИ УПЪТВАНЕТО ЗА РАБОТА.  НЕСПАЗВАНЕТО НА ТОВА ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ МОЖЕ ДА ДОВЕДЕ ДО НАРАНЯВАНЕ НА ДОСТАВЧИКА НА УСЛУГАТА, ОПЕРАТОРА ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ В РЕЗУЛТАТ НА ТОКОВ УДАР ИЛИ МЕХАНИЧНА ИЛИ ДРУГА ОПАСНОСТ.

(ZH-CN)

 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。  如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。  未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。  忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的伤害。

VÝSTRAHA (CS)

 TENTO PROVOZNÍ NÁVOD EXISTUJE POUZE V ANGLICKÉM JAZYCE.  V PŘÍPADĚ, ŽE EXTERNÍ SLUŽBA ZÁKAZNÍKŮM POTŘEBUJE NÁVOD V JINÉM JAZYCE, JE ZAJIŠTĚNÍ PŘEKLADU DO ODPOVÍDAJÍCÍHO JAZYKA ÚKOLEM ZÁKAZNÍKA.  NESNAŽTE SE O ÚDRŽBU TOHOTO ZAŘÍZENÍ, ANIŽ BYSTE SI PŘEČETLI TENTO PROVOZNÍ NÁVOD A POCHOPILI JEHO OBSAH.  V PŘÍPADĚ NEDODRŽOVÁNÍ TÉTO VÝSTRAHY MŮŽE DOJÍT K PORANĚNÍ PRACOVNÍKA PRODEJNÍHO SERVISU, OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP PROUDU, RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM MECHANICKÝCH ČI JINÝCH RIZIK.

ADVARSEL (DA)

 DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.  HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.  FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE DENNE SERVICEMANUAL HAR VÆRET KONSULTERET OG ER FORSTÅET.  MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.

Important Precautions

Page 5

[email protected]

警告

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 6


1:28 PM



WAARSCHUWING (NL)

 DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.  ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.  PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.  INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.

WARNING (EN)

• •

• •

(ET)

 KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.  KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.  ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.  KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.

VAROITUS (FI)

 TÄMÄ HUOLTO-OHJE ON SAATAVILLA VAIN ENGLANNIKSI.  JOS ASIAKKAAN HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖ VAATII MUUTA KUIN ENGLANNINKIELISTÄ MATERIAALIA, TARVITTAVAN KÄÄNNÖKSEN HANKKIMINEN ON ASIAKKAAN VASTUULLA.  ÄLÄ YRITÄ KORJATA LAITTEISTOA ENNEN KUIN OLET VARMASTI LUKENUT JA YMMÄRTÄNYT TÄMÄN HUOLTO-OHJEEN.  MIKÄLI TÄTÄ VAROITUSTA EI NOUDATETA, SEURAUKSENA VOI OLLA HUOLTOHENKILÖSTÖN, LAITTEISTON KÄYTTÄJÄN TAI POTILAAN VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN, MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI.

Page 6


[email protected]

HOIATUS

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 7


1:28 PM



ATTENTION (FR)

• •

• •

WARNUNG (DE)

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS. SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS. LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

 DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.  FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.  VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN, OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND VERSTANDEN ZU HABEN.

ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ (EL)

 ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ∆ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ.  ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ, ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ.  ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ∆ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ.  ΕΑΝ ∆Ε ΛΑΒΕΤΕ ΥΠΟΨΗ ΤΗΝ ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ ΑΥΤΗ, ΕΝ∆ΕΧΕΤΑΙ ΝΑ ΠΡΟΚΛΗΘΕΙ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟΣ ΣΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ, ΣΤΟ ΧΕΙΡΙΣΤΗ Ή ΣΤΟΝ ΑΣΘΕΝΗ ΑΠΟ ΗΛΕΚΤΡΟΠΛΗΞΙΑ, ΜΗΧΑΝΙΚΟΥΣ Ή ΑΛΛΟΥΣ ΚΙΝ∆ΥΝΟΥΣ.

FIGYELMEZTETÉS (HU)

 EZEN KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYV KIZÁRÓLAG ANGOL NYELVEN ÉRHETŐ EL.  HA A VEVŐ SZOLGÁLTATÓJA ANGOLTÓL ELTÉRŐ NYELVRE TART IGÉNYT, AKKOR A VEVŐ FELELŐSSÉGE A FORDÍTÁS ELKÉSZÍTTETÉSE.  NE PRÓBÁLJA ELKEZDENI HASZNÁLNI A BERENDEZÉST, AMÍG A KARBANTARTÁSI KÉZIKÖNYVBEN LEÍRTAKAT NEM ÉRTELMEZTÉK.  EZEN FIGYELMEZTETÉS FIGYELMEN KÍVÜL HAGYÁSA A SZOLGÁLTATÓ, MŰKÖDTETŐ VAGY A BETEG ÁRAMÜTÉS, MECHANIKAI VAGY EGYÉB VESZÉLYHELYZET MIATTI SÉRÜLÉSÉT EREDMÉNYEZHETI.


Page 7

[email protected]

 WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH STROMSCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 8


1:28 PM



AÐVÖRUN (IS)

 ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.  EF AÐ ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNAS TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ SKYLDA VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ SKAFFA TUNGUMÁLAÞJÓNUSTU.  REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ AFGREIÐA TÆKIÐ NEMA AÐ ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK HEFUR VERIÐ SKOÐUÐ OG SKILIN.  BROT Á SINNA ÞESSARI AÐVÖRUN GETUR LEITT TIL MEIÐSLA Á ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS FRÁ RAFLOSTI, VÉLRÆNU EÐA ÖÐRUM ÁHÆTTUM.

AVVERTENZA

•

(IT)

•

•

 このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。 (JA)

 サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。  このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。  この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。

Page 8


[email protected]

•

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. IL NON RISPETTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 9


1:28 PM



경고 (KO)

 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.  고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것

은 고객의 책임입니다.  본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지

마십시오.  이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비스 제공

자, 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다.

BRĪDINĀJUMS (LV)

 ŠĪ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATA IR PIEEJAMA TIKAI ANGĻU VALODĀ.  JA KLIENTA APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM NEPIECIEŠAMA INFORMĀCIJA CITĀ VALODĀ, NEVIS ANGĻU, KLIENTA PIENĀKUMS IR NODROŠINĀT TULKOŠANU.  NEVEICIET APRĪKOJUMA APKALPI BEZ APKALPES ROKASGRĀMATAS IZLASĪŠANAS UN SAPRAŠANAS.

ĮSPĖJIMAS (LT)

 ŠIS EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVAS YRA PRIEINAMAS TIK ANGLŲ KALBA.  JEI KLIENTO PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJAS REIKALAUJA VADOVO KITA KALBA – NE ANGLŲ, NUMATYTI VERTIMO PASLAUGAS YRA KLIENTO ATSAKOMYBĖ.  NEMĖGINKITE ATLIKTI ĮRANGOS TECHNINĖS PRIEŽIŪROS, NEBENT ATSIŽVELGĖTE Į ŠĮ EKSPLOATAVIMO VADOVĄ IR JĮ SUPRATOTE.  JEI NEATKREIPSITE DĖMESIO Į ŠĮ PERSPĖJIMĄ, GALIMI SUŽALOJIMAI DĖL ELEKTROS ŠOKO.  MECHANINIŲ AR KITŲ PAVOJŲ PASLAUGŲ TIEKĖJUI, OPERATORIUI AR PACIENTUI.

ADVARSEL (NO)

 DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.  HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.  IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.  MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.


Page 9

[email protected]

 ŠĪ BRĪDINĀJUMA NEIEVĒROŠANA VAR RADĪT ELEKTRISKĀS STRĀVAS TRIECIENA, MEHĀNISKU VAI CITU RISKU IZRAISĪTU TRAUMU APKALPES SNIEDZĒJAM, OPERATORAM VAI PACIENTAM.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 10

Thursday, October 30, 2014 1:28 PM



OSTRZEŻENIE (PL)

 NINIEJSZY PODRĘCZNIK SERWISOWY DOSTĘPNY JEST JEDYNIE W JĘZYKU ANGIELSKIM.  JEŚLI DOSTAWCA USŁUG KLIENTA WYMAGA JĘZYKA INNEGO NIŻ ANGIELSKI, ZAPEWNIENIE USŁUGI TŁUMACZENIA JEST OBOWIĄZKIEM KLIENTA.  NIE PRÓBOWAĆ SERWISOWAĆ WYPOSAŻENIA BEZ ZAPOZNANIA SIĘ I ZROZUMIENIA NINIEJSZEGO PODRĘCZNIKA SERWISOWEGO.  NIEZASTOSOWANIE SIĘ DO TEGO OSTRZEŻENIA MOŻE SPOWODOWAĆ URAZY DOSTAWCY USŁUG, OPERATORA LUB PACJENTA W WYNIKU PORAŻENIA ELEKTRYCZNEGO, ZAGROŻENIA MECHANICZNEGO BĄDŹ INNEGO.

ATENÇÃO (PT)

 ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.  SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.

 O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

ATENŢIE (RO)

 ACEST MANUAL DE SERVICE ESTE DISPONIBIL NUMAI ÎN LIMBA ENGLEZĂ.  DACĂ UN FURNIZOR DE SERVICII PENTRU CLIENŢI NECESITĂ O ALTĂ LIMBĂ DECÂT CEA ENGLEZĂ, ESTE DE DATORIA CLIENTULUI SĂ FURNIZEZE O TRADUCERE.  NU ÎNCERCAŢI SĂ REPARAŢI ECHIPAMENTUL DECÂT ULTERIOR CONSULTĂRII ŞI ÎNŢELEGERII ACESTUI MANUAL DE SERVICE.  IGNORAREA ACESTUI AVERTISMENT AR PUTEA DUCE LA RĂNIREA DEPANATORULUI, OPERATORULUI SAU PACIENTULUI ÎN URMA PERICOLELOR DE ELECTROCUTARE, MECANICE SAU DE ALTĂ NATURĂ.

Page 10


[email protected]

 NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÉNCIA TÉCNICA

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 11




ОСТОРОЖНО! (RU)

 ДАННОЕ РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ПРЕДЛАГАЕТСЯ ТОЛЬКО НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ ЯЗЫКЕ.  ЕСЛИ СЕРВИСНОМУ ПЕРСОНАЛУ КЛИЕНТА НЕОБХОДИМО РУКОВОДСТВО НЕ НА АНГЛИЙСКОМ, А НА КАКОМ-ТО ДРУГОМ ЯЗЫКЕ, КЛИЕНТУ СЛЕДУЕТ САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНО ОБЕСПЕЧИТЬ ПЕРЕВОД.  ПЕРЕД ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЕМ ОБОРУДОВАНИЯ ОБЯЗАТЕЛЬНО ОБРАТИТЕСЬ К ДАННОМУ РУКОВОДСТВУ И ПОЙМИТЕ ИЗЛОЖЕННЫЕ В НЕМ СВЕДЕНИЯ.  НЕСОБЛЮДЕНИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЙ ДАННОГО ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ МОЖЕТ ПРИВЕСТИ К ТОМУ, ЧТО СПЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ, ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ, МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ.

UPOZORNENIE (SK)

 TENTO NÁVOD NA OBSLUHU JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE.  AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO ANGLIČTINU, POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA.  NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA O OBSLUHU ZARIADENIA SKÔR, AKO SI NEPREČÍTATE NÁVOD NA OBLUHU A NEPOROZUMIETE MU.

ATENCION (ES)

 ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SOLO EXISTE EN INGLES.  SI ALGUN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLES, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCION.  NO SE DEBERA DAR SERVICIO TECNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.  LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.


Page 11

[email protected]

 ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO ZRANENIA POSKYTOVATEĽA SLUŽIEB, OBSLUHUJÚCEJ OSOBY ALEBO PACIENTA ELEKTRICKÝM PRÚDOM, DO MECHANICKÉHO ALEBO INÉHO NEBEZPEČENSTVA.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 12




VARNING (SV)

 DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.  OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.  FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.  OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.

DİKKAT (TR)

 BU SERVİS KILAVUZUNUN SADECE İNGİLİZCESİ MEVCUTTUR.  EĞER MÜŞTERİ TEKNİSYENİ BU KILAVUZU İNGİLİZCE DIŞINDA BİR BAŞKA LİSANDAN TALEP EDERSE, BUNU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİYE DÜŞER.  SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE ETMEYİNİZ.

Page 12


[email protected]

 BU UYARIYA UYULMAMASI, ELEKTRİK, MEKANİK VEYA DİĞER TEHLİKELERDEN DOLAYI TEKNİSYEN, OPERATÖR VEYA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 13




DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call GEHC Global Parts 1-800-548-3366 and select option 8, immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy And Procedures Bulletins. 14 July 1993

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

IMPORTANT...X-RAY PROTECTION X-ray equipment, if not properly used, may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Healthcare Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and of any other local authorities, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Healthcare Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.


Page 13

[email protected]

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 14




OMISSIONS & ERRORS Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives. GE personnel, please use the GEHC Complaint Record Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication. WARNINGS Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer. Upon request, MANUFACTURER will provide circuit diagrams, component part lists, descriptions, calibration instructions, or other information to assist service personnel to repair parts

[email protected]

Page 14


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 15



Preface Publication Conventions


Standardized conventions for representing information is a uniform way of communicating information to a reader in a consistent manner. Conventions are used so that the reader can easily recognize the actions or decisions that must be made. There are a number of character and paragraph styles used in this publication to accomplish this task. Please become familiar with them before proceeding forward. It’s important that you read and understand hazard statements, and not just ignore them.

Section 1.0 Safety & Hazard Information Proper product safety labeling allows a person to safely use or service a product. The format and style for safety communications reflected in this publication represents the harmonization of IEC/ ISO 3864 and ANSI Z535 standards.

1.1

Hazard Messages Any action that will, could or potentially cause personal injury will be preceded by the safety alert symbol and an appropriate signal word. The safety alert symbol is the triangle with an exclamation mark within it. It’s always used next to the signal word to indicate the severity of the hazard. Together, they are used to indicate a hazard exists. Signal words describe the severity of possible human injures that may be encountered. The alert symbol and signal word are placed immediately before any paragraph they affect. Safety information includes: 1.) Signal Word - The seriousness level of the hazard. 2.) Symbol or Pictorial - The consequence of interaction with the hazard. 3.) Word Message: a.) The nature of the hazard (i.e. the type of hazard) b.) How to avoid the hazard. The safety alert symbol is not used when an action can only cause equipment damage.

1.2

Text Format of Signal Words DANGER - INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. THIS SIGNAL WORD IS LIMITED TO THE MOST EXTREME SITUATIONS. WARNING - INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. Caution - Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. Preface - Publication Conventions

Page 15

[email protected]

Within this publication, different paragraph and character styles are used to indicated potential hazards. Paragraph prefixes, such as hazard, caution, danger and warning, are used to identify important safety information. Text (Hazard) styles are applied to the paragraph contents that are applicable to each specific safety statement.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 16




NOTICE - Indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the safety of personnel or protection of property. This signal word is associated directly with a hazard or hazardous situation and is used in place of 'DANGER,' 'WARNING,' or 'CAUTION.' It can include:

1.3

•

Destruction of a disk drive

•

Potential for internal mechanical damage, such as to a X-ray tube

Symbols and Pictorials Used The following Symbols and Pictorials are be used in this publication. These graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm.

Page 16

magnetic

biohazard

compressgas

ppe-hearing

fragile

impact

corrosive

heavyobject

ppe-2people

static_elec

heat

general

laser

ppe-respitory

keep_dry

pinch

radiation

poisongas

ppe-loto

general

explosive

electrical

flammable

ppe-eye

torque

crush/mechanical

tipping

Read Manual

ppe-gloves

ce

instuction

poisonmatl

entanglement

instuction

SPECIAL NOTICES

Section 1.0 - Safety & Hazard Information

[email protected]

1.3.1

keep_up

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 17




Dangerous Voltage. Indicates an avoidable dangerous high voltage hazard. This symbol on the equipment means that the operating instructions should be consulted to assure safe operation. This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment. Follow instructions for use.

1.3.2

X-ray Tube X-ray emission. X-ray tube head is emitting X-rays. Take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly, unwisely, or unknowingly exposing themselves or others to radiation. Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection of a small focal spot or the connection for the corresponding filament.

1.3.3

Power ON and OFF Power ON switch or switch position that applies mains voltage. Indicated connection to the mains for all mains switches or their positions. This symbol is used in all cases where safety is involved. Power OFF switch or switch positions that removes mains voltage. Indicated disconnection from the mains for all mains switches or their positions. This symbol is used in all cases where safety is involved.

1.3.4

Electrical Type Type B Equipment. Equipment providing a particular degree of protection again electrical shock regarding leakage current and protective grounding per IEC 60601-1.

1.3.5

Electrical Current Alternating Current. Indicates equipment that is suitable for alternating current only. Direct Current. Indicates equipment that is suitable for direct current only.

1.3.6

Collimator Control for indicating radiation field by using light. Preface - Publication Conventions

Page 17

[email protected]

Identifies controls or indicators associated with the selection of a large focal spot or the connection for the corresponding filament.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 18




1.3.7

Ground Functional Earth (ground) Terminal. Terminal directly connected to a point of a measuring supply or control circuit or to a screening part which is intended to be earthen for functional purposes. Protective Earth (ground). Identifies any terminal that is intended for connection of an external protective conductor to protect against electrical shock in case of a fault.

Section 2.0 Publication Conventions 2.1

General Paragraph and Character Styles Prefixes are used to highlight important non-safety related information. Paragraph prefixes (such as Purpose, Example, Comment or Note) are used to identify important but non-safety related information. Text styles are also applied to text within each paragraph modified by the specific prefix.

EXAMPLES OF PREFIXES USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION:

Note: Example: Comment:

Page 18

Conveys information that should be considered important to the reader. Used to make the reader aware that the paragraph(s) that follow are examples of information possibly stated previously. Represents “additional” information that may or may not be relevant to your situation.

Section 2.0 - Publication Conventions

[email protected]

Purpose: Introduces and provides meaning as to the information contained within the chapter, section or subsection (such as used at the beginning this chapter, for example).

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 19




2.2

Page Layout Publication Part Number & Revision Number

The current section and its title are always shown in the footer of the left (even) page.

Paragraphs preceeded by Alphanumeric characters (e.g. numbers) contain information that must be followed in a specific order.

The current chapter and its title are always shown in the footer of the right (odd) page. Paragraphs preceeded by a symbol (e.g. bullets) contain information that has no specific order.

Headers and footers in this publication are designed to allow you to quickly identify your location. The document part number and revision number appears in every header on every page. Odd numbered page footers indicate the current chapter, its title and current page number. Even page footers show the current section and its title, as well as the current page number.

2.3

Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles Within this publication, mono-spaced character styles (fonts) are used to indicate computer text that’s either screen input and output. Mono-spaced fonts, such courier, are used to indicated text direction. When you type at your keyboard, you are generating computer input. Occasionally you will see the math operator “greater-than” and “less-than” symbols used to indicate the start and finish of variable output. When reading text generated by the computer, you are reading it as computer generated output. In addition to direction, characters are italicized (e.g. italics) to indicate information specific to your system or site.

Example: Fixed Output

This paragraph’s font represents computer generated screen “fixed” output. Its output is fixed from the sense that it does not vary from application to application. It’s the most commonly used style used to indicate filenames, paths and text that do not change from system to system. The character style used is a fixed width such as courier.

Example: Variable Output

This paragraph’s font represents computer screen output that is “variable”. It’s used to represent output that varies from application to application or system to system. Variable output is sometimes found placed between greater-than and less-than operators for clarification. For example: or <3.45.120.3>. In both cases, the < and > operators are not part of the actual input. Preface - Publication Conventions

Page 19

[email protected]

An exclamation point in a triangle is used to indicate important information to the user.

Publication Title

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 20



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Example: Fixed Input

This paragraph’s font represents fixed input. It’s computer input that is typed-in via the keyboard. Typed input that does not vary from application to application or system to system. Fixed text the user is required to supply as input. For example: cd /usr/3p

Example: Variable Input

This paragraph’s font represents computer input that can vary from application to application or system to system. With variable text, the user is required to supply system dependent input or information. Variable input sometimes is placed between greater-than and less-than operators. For example: . In these cases, the (<>) operators would be dropped prior to input. For example: ypcat hosts | grep <3.45.120.3> would be typed into the computer as: ypcat hosts | grep 3.45.120.3 without the greater-than and less-than operators.

2.4

Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys) Different character styles are used to indicate actions requiring the reader to press either a hard or soft button, switch or key. Physical hardware, such as buttons and switches, are called hard keys because they are hard wired or mechanical in nature. A keyboard or on/off switch would be a hard key. Software or computer generated buttons are called soft keys because they are software generated. Software driven menu buttons are an example of such keys. Soft and hard keys are represented differently in this publication. A power switch ON/OFF or a keyboard key like ENTER is indicated by applying a character style that uses both over and under-lined bold text that is bold. This is a hard key.

Example: Soft Keys

Whereas the computer MENU button that you would click with your mouse or touch with your hand uses over and under-lined regular text. This is a soft key.

Page 20

Section 2.0 - Publication Conventions

[email protected]

Example: Hard Keys

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 21




Table of Contents 3 5 Preface Publication Conventions ...................................................................................... 15 Section 1.0 Safety & Hazard Information ........................................................................... 15 1.1 1.2 1.3

15 15 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18

Section 2.0 Publication Conventions ................................................................................. 18 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

General Paragraph and Character Styles........................................................................ Page Layout..................................................................................................................... Computer Screen Output/Input Text Character Styles .................................................... Buttons, Switches and Keyboard Inputs (Hard & Soft Keys) ...........................................

18 19 19 20

Chapter 1 - Before You Begin............................................................................... 37 Section 1.0 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 37 Section 2.0 Objective and Scope of this Manual............................................................... 37 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

Pre-Installation Check...................................................................................................... Installation Plan ............................................................................................................... Interconnection ................................................................................................................ Presentation.....................................................................................................................

37 37 37 38

Section 3.0 On-Site Requirements...................................................................................... 38 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

EMC Requirements ......................................................................................................... Tools and Test Equipment............................................................................................... Documentation................................................................................................................. Audio and Visual..............................................................................................................

38 38 38 39

Section 4.0 Description of System ..................................................................................... 39 Table of Contents

Page 21

[email protected]

Hazard Messages............................................................................................................ Text Format of Signal Words ........................................................................................... Symbols and Pictorials Used ........................................................................................... 1.3.1 SPECIAL NOTICES............................................................................................ 1.3.2 X-ray Tube .......................................................................................................... 1.3.3 Power ON and OFF ............................................................................................ 1.3.4 Electrical Type .................................................................................................... 1.3.5 Electrical Current ................................................................................................ 1.3.6 Collimator............................................................................................................ 1.3.7 Ground................................................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 22




Chapter 2 - Physical Installation .......................................................................... 41 Section 1.0 System Installation Guide................................................................................ 41 Section 2.0 Installation Checklist........................................................................................ 44 Section 3.0 Before You Begin.............................................................................................. 48 Section 4.0 Integrated Table ................................................................................................ 49 4.1

4.2

4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7

49 49 57 62 62 64 69 72 82 83 84 85 88 89 94 97 98

Section 5.0 System Console................................................................................................ 99 5.1 5.2

Without Console Stand ................................................................................................... 99 With Console Stand ........................................................................................................ 99

Section 6.0 Collimator Alignment ..................................................................................... 101 Section 7.0DAP Meter Installation................................................................. 102 Section 8.0 Standard Wall Stand....................................................................................... 105 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4

8.5

Unpacking ..................................................................................................................... Installation ..................................................................................................................... Cassette Tray................................................................................................................ Ion Chamber and Grid (Optional).................................................................................. 8.4.1 Install both Ion Chamber and Grid for standard wall stand .............................. 8.4.2 Install the Grid Only for standard wall stand .................................................... 8.4.3 Install both Ion chamber and grid..................................................................... Counterweight ...............................................................................................................

105 108 111 111 112 115 116 120

Section 9.0 Final Cover Installation .................................................................................. 121 9.1 Page 22

Install Standard Tube Stand Covers ............................................................................. 121 Table of Contents

[email protected]

4.8 4.9 4.10

Radiography Table.......................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Unpacking and Positioning................................................................................. 4.1.2 Installation .......................................................................................................... Tube Stand...................................................................................................................... 4.2.1 Unpacking .......................................................................................................... 4.2.2 Installation .......................................................................................................... X-Ray Tube ..................................................................................................................... Control Box and Collimator ............................................................................................. Counterweight ................................................................................................................. Cassette Tray.................................................................................................................. Ion Chamber and Grid (Optional).................................................................................... 4.7.1 Install both Ion Chamber and Grid for system with standard Integrated table ... 4.7.2 Install the Grid Only for system with standard Integrated table.......................... 4.7.3 Install the Ion Chamber and Grid for system with advanced Integrated table.... Electrical Connections..................................................................................................... Install Cabinet Tray ......................................................................................................... Table Top Installation and Leveling ................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 23



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 9.2 9.3

Install Table Front Cover ............................................................................................... 124 Install Standard Wall Stand Covers ............................................................................... 124

Section 10.0 Labels and Rating Plates............................................................................... 125 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

System Console............................................................................................................. Integrated Table............................................................................................................. Cabinet .......................................................................................................................... Wall Stand .....................................................................................................................

125 125 126 126

Section 11.0 Installation Checklist ..................................................................................... 128 Section 12.0 Regulatory Tests and Final Steps................................................................. 130 12.1

130 130 130 130 130 130 130 131 131 131 132 132

Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration ............................................................. 135 Section 1.0 Configuration & Calibration List ................................................................... 135 Section 2.0 Configuration & Calibration Contents.......................................................... 135 2.1 2.2

2.3

2.4

System Configuration .................................................................................................... X-Ray Tube Seasoning.................................................................................................. 2.2.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 2.2.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Service Software User Guide ........................................................................................ 2.3.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.3.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.3.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.3.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.3.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.3.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.3.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2.3.7.1 Loading service software on service laptop .................................. 2.3.7.2 Using service software .................................................................. 2.3.7.3 Typical screen description............................................................. Tube Configuration ........................................................................................................ 2.4.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.4.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. Table of Contents

135 136 136 136 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 141 145 145 146

Page 23

[email protected]

12.2

AEC Tests...................................................................................................................... 12.1.1 AEC Maximum MAS ......................................................................................... 12.1.1.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 12.1.1.2 Procedure (50kV) .......................................................................... 12.1.2 AEC Minimum Exposure Time.......................................................................... 12.1.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 12.1.2.2 Procedure...................................................................................... 12.1.3 Reproducibility Of Exposure ............................................................................. 12.1.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................... 12.1.3.2 Procedure...................................................................................... > Calculation for Coefficient of Variation (C.V.):............................... Final Installation and Admin Tasks ................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 24



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7

2.5

2.6

2.8

2.9 Page 24

Table of Contents

146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 147 147 147 147 147 147 147 149 149 151 151 151 151 151 151 151 151 151 152 152 153 158 158 158 159 159 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 161 161 161 162

[email protected]

2.7

Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... Prerequisites .................................................................................................... Personnel ......................................................................................................... Time ................................................................................................................. Procedure......................................................................................................... 2.4.7.1 Load software according to tube present in the installation.......... 2.4.7.2 Verify............................................................................................. Receptor Programming ................................................................................................. 2.5.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.5.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.5.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.5.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.5.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.5.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.5.7 Procedure......................................................................................................... 2.5.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................... 2.5.7.2 Calling the subroutine ................................................................... 2.5.7.3 Parameter selection...................................................................... 2.5.7.4 Renard or normal scale for kv selection ....................................... 2.5.7.5 Date & Time.................................................................................. Automatic AEC Calibration............................................................................................ 2.6.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.6.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.6.3 Safety precautions ........................................................................................... 2.6.4 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.6.5 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.6.6 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.6.7 PROCEDURE .................................................................................................. 2.6.7.1 Development equipment............................................................... 2.6.7.2 Preliminary Remarks .................................................................... 2.6.7.3 Principle ........................................................................................ 2.6.7.4 KVEF Adjustment ......................................................................... CR AEC Calibration ...................................................................................................... 2.7.1 Systems with CR Filming Only ......................................................................... 2.7.1.1 Program Generator with Default CR Parameters ......................... 2.7.1.2 CR Dose Adjustment .................................................................... 2.7.2 System with Film and CR Filming Combined ................................................... 2.7.3 Final Adjustment .............................................................................................. 2.7.3.1 Disable Unused Film-Screen ........................................................ 2.7.3.2 Perform Checksum ....................................................................... 2.7.3.3 Save Memory................................................................................ Checksum Validation .................................................................................................... 2.8.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.8.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.8.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.8.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.8.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.8.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.8.7 PROCEDURE .................................................................................................. 2.8.7.1 Preliminary Remarks .................................................................... 2.8.7.2 Checksum Validation .................................................................... Backup and Restore Database Parameters..................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 25



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 2.9.6 2.9.7 2.9.8

2.10

Supplies ............................................................................................................ Tools ................................................................................................................. Safety Precautions............................................................................................ Prerequisites..................................................................................................... Personnel.......................................................................................................... Time.................................................................................................................. Applicability....................................................................................................... Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2.9.8.1 CPU memory backup .................................................................... 2.9.8.2 CPU memory restore..................................................................... 2.9.8.3 Error messages ............................................................................. Dosimetric Calibration.................................................................................................... 2.10.1 Dose/DAP accuracy check procedure .............................................................. 2.10.2 Dose/DAP accuracy maintenance ....................................................................

162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 163 163 163 163 164

Chapter 4 - Functional Checks........................................................................... 165 Section 1.0 Introduction .................................................................................................... 165 Section 2.0 Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................ 166

3.1 3.2

System Power Up .......................................................................................................... Tube Assembly Operation ............................................................................................. 3.2.1 Tube Stand Longitudinal Movement ................................................................. 3.2.2 Tube Stand Rotation......................................................................................... 3.2.3 Tube Arm Vertical Movement ........................................................................... 3.2.4 X-Ray Tube Angulation..................................................................................... 3.2.5 X-Ray Tube Tilting ............................................................................................ 3.2.6 Table Top Movement Checks........................................................................... 3.2.7 Cassette Tray Movement.................................................................................. 3.2.8 Collimator Rotation ........................................................................................... 3.2.9 Collimator Light Timer....................................................................................... 3.2.10 Wall Stand Carriage Vertical Movement...........................................................

167 167 168 168 168 168 169 169 169 169 169 169

Section 4.0 Performance Checks...................................................................................... 169 4.1 4.2

4.3

4.4 4.5

Console.......................................................................................................................... Accuracy of X-Ray Field and Light Field Alignment....................................................... 4.2.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.2.2 Test Method...................................................................................................... Alignment of Centers of X-Ray Field and Image Receptor............................................ 4.3.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.3.2 Test Method...................................................................................................... Image Quality................................................................................................................. 4.4.1 Test Method...................................................................................................... Tube Voltage Accuracy.................................................................................................. 4.5.1 Tools ................................................................................................................. 4.5.2 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.5.3 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Table of Contents

169 170 170 170 173 173 173 174 174 175 175 175 175

Page 25

[email protected]

Section 3.0 Operational Checks........................................................................................ 167

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 26



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 4.6

4.7

4.8

4.9

4.10

Tube Current ................................................................................................................. 4.6.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.6.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... Exposure Time .............................................................................................................. 4.7.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.7.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... Exposure mAs............................................................................................................... 4.8.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 4.8.2 Procedure......................................................................................................... Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) - Optional .............................................................. 4.9.1 Table AEC........................................................................................................ 4.9.2 Wall Stand AEC ............................................................................................... Collimator Light Timer ...................................................................................................

175 175 175 176 176 176 176 176 176 177 177 177 177

Section 5.0 HHS Test.......................................................................................................... 178

Chapter 5 - JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 179 Section 1.0 Theory.............................................................................................................. 179 1.1 1.2

Glossary ........................................................................................................................ 179 JEDI HIGH LEVEL BLOCK DIAGRAM ......................................................................... 180

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

2.5

Introduction ................................................................................................................... Standard Features ........................................................................................................ Applications................................................................................................................... Architecture ................................................................................................................... 2.4.1 A Kernel ........................................................................................................... 2.4.2 Options Depending on the Application............................................................. A Packaging Architecture.............................................................................................. 2.5.1 Auxiliaries Box.................................................................................................. 2.5.2 Power Box........................................................................................................ 2.5.3 AC/DC Box ....................................................................................................... 2.5.4 System Interface Box ....................................................................................... 2.5.5 Optional Boxes .................................................................................................

181 181 181 182 182 182 184 184 184 184 184 184

Section 3.0 Technique Factors Measurement Criteria .................................................... 186 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

kV Accuracies ............................................................................................................... mA Accuracies .............................................................................................................. mAs Accuracies ............................................................................................................ Exposure Time Accuracies ...........................................................................................

186 186 186 186

Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes ........................................... 187 Section 1.0 Exception Handling ........................................................................................ 187 1.1 1.2 Page 26

Diagnostics.................................................................................................................... 187 Power-On Diagnostic .................................................................................................... 187 Table of Contents

[email protected]

Section 2.0 Theory Presentation ....................................................................................... 181

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 27



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11

Live Diagnostics............................................................................................................. Error Code Structure...................................................................................................... Simplified Error Code Definition..................................................................................... Generator Phase Definition ........................................................................................... Error Class Definition..................................................................................................... Error Code Definition ..................................................................................................... Data Associated With The Error Code........................................................................... Number Of Occurrences................................................................................................ Date & Time...................................................................................................................

187 187 188 188 188 189 190 190 190

Section 2.0 Error Codes, Diagnostics & Troubleshooting ............................................. 190 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

190 190 191 195 195 195 197 197 197 199 201 203 203 205 205 205 206 206 207 209 210 210 213 213 214

Section 3.0 Console Troubleshooting & Error Codes .................................................... 216 3.1 3.2

Error Codes ................................................................ Console Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 3.2.1 System Error (C01-0001).................................................................................. 3.2.2 Memory Error on Console Control Board (C02-0001) ...................................... 3.2.3 Membrane Button Error (C02-1000) ................................................................. 3.2.4 JEDI Communication Error (C03-0001)............................................................ 3.2.5 APR Random or All (C04-0001) ....................................................................... 3.2.6 No AEC Config (C04-0002) .............................................................................. 3.2.7 Overlimit (C04-0003) ........................................................................................ 3.2.8 Phase Missing (C04-0004) ............................................................................... 3.2.9 Generator Error (C05-0001) ............................................................................. 3.2.10 Other Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... Table of Contents

216 216 216 217 218 219 219 219 219 220 220 220

Page 27

[email protected]

2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14

Introduction .................................................................................................................... Power On Diagnostics ................................................................................................... Error Code List............................................................................................................... Error Reporting .............................................................................................................. Diagnostics .................................................................................................................... Detailed Error Description & Troubleshooting Guide..................................................... 2.6.1 Errors ................................................................................................................ 2.6.1.1 Tube spits detection Errors (Code 30) .......................................... 2.6.1.2 Anode Rotation errors (Code 40) .................................................. 2.6.1.3 Filament Heater errors (Code 50) ................................................. 2.6.1.4 Exposure errors (Code 60) ................................. 2.6.1.5 Power supply (Code 70) ................................... 2.6.1.6 Hardware errors (Code 80) ................................. 2.6.1.7 Application errors (Code 90) ......................................................... 2.6.1.8 Communication errors (code 100)................................................. 2.6.1.9 Thermal errors (code 110) ................................. 2.6.1.10 Manipulation errors (code 120) ............................. Warning Errors............................................................................................................... Other Failures ................................................................................................................ Heating Function diagnostics......................................................................................... Rotation Function diagnostics........................................................................................ Inverter in Short Circuit Function diagnostics ................................................................ AEC diagnostics ............................................................................................................ No Load HV diagnostics ................................................................................................ Inverter Gate Command diagnostics .............................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 28



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 3.2.10.1 3.2.10.2 3.2.10.3 3.2.10.4 3.2.10.5

LED Unlit Failure........................................................................... Buzzer Failure............................................................................... LCD Display Failure...................................................................... LCD Display Faintness ................................................................. Power Un failure ...........................................................................

220 220 220 220 221

Section 4.0 PDU Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 221 4.1

PDU Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 4.1.1 No Console Power ........................................................................................... 4.1.2 No EM Lock Power or No Collimator Power .................................................... 4.1.3 No Generator Power ........................................................................................

221 221 222 223

Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance...................................................................... 225 Section 1.0 Preventive Maintenance Action List ............................................................. 225 Section 2.0 Preventive Maintenance................................................................................. 227 2.1

2.3

2.4

Page 28

Table of Contents

227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 227 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 228 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229 229

[email protected]

2.2

General Cleaning and Painting ..................................................................................... 2.1.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.1.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.1.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.1.4 prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.1.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.1.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.1.7 Procedure......................................................................................................... Visual Inspection ........................................................................................................... 2.2.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.2.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.2.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.2.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.2.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.2.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.2.7 Procedure......................................................................................................... Functional Checks......................................................................................................... 2.3.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.3.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.3.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.3.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.3.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.3.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.3.7 Procedure......................................................................................................... Table Base Maintenance .............................................................................................. 2.4.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 2.4.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 2.4.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 2.4.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 2.4.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 2.4.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 2.4.7 Procedure.........................................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 29




2.6

2.7

2.9

2.10

Table of Contents

230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 232 232 232 232 232 232 232 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 236 236

Page 29

[email protected]

2.8

Patient Support Maintenance ........................................................................................ 2.5.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.5.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.5.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.5.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.5.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.5.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.5.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Cassette Tray Carriage Maintenance ............................................................................ 2.6.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.6.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.6.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.6.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.6.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.6.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.6.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Tube Stand and Wall Stand Maintenance ..................................................................... 2.7.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.7.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.7.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.7.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.7.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.7.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.7.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Generator Functional Checks ........................................................................................ 2.8.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.8.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.8.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.8.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.8.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.8.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.8.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2.8.7.1 Test exposure................................................................................ > Post display initialization: .............................................................. > mA accuracy.................................................................................. > AEC functionality check (if existing) .............................................. 2.8.7.2 Record last error codes ................................................................. 2.8.7.3 Record results on counters ........................................................... 2.8.7.4 Check technique factors................................................................ 2.8.7.5 Tighten terminals and remove dust ............................................... HV Cable and Sockets Regreasing ............................................................................... 2.9.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.9.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.9.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 2.9.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 2.9.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 2.9.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 2.9.7 Procedure ......................................................................................................... Replace Generator NonVolatile Parameters RAM ........................................................ 2.10.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 2.10.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 2.10.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 30



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.10.4 2.10.5 2.10.6 2.10.7

Prerequisites .................................................................................................... Personnel ......................................................................................................... Time ................................................................................................................. Procedure......................................................................................................... 2.10.7.1 Remove and Replace the RAM .................................................... 2.10.7.2 Download Database .....................................................................

236 236 236 236 236 236

Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts .................................................................................. 237 Section 1.0 Renewal Parts List.......................................................................................... 237 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10

Bearing kit 5196543, 5196544 ...................................................................................... X-Ray Tube (5192454) / Collimator (5189248) Replacement....................................... Collimator Lamp (5136302) Replacement .................................................................... Rotundity Electricity Brake Assembly (5184986) Replacement .................................... Wall Stand Cassette Tray Spring Kit (5196542) Replacement ..................................... Console Replacement................................................................................................... Console Main Board Replacement ............................................................................... Hand Switch Replacement............................................................................................ TAV Board Replacement .............................................................................................. Table Top IF Board (5335073) Replacement................................................................

247 248 248 250 252 253 254 255 255 257

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

Introduction ................................................................................................................... JEDI Generator Renewal Parts List .............................................................................. FRU Information............................................................................................................ Jedi 50 R 1T Structure .................................................................................................. Renewal Parts............................................................................................................... Cables ...........................................................................................................................

257 257 258 259 260 263

Section 3.0 JEDI Generator Disassembly/Reassembly................................................... 264 3.1 3.2 3.3

3.4

Page 30

Introduction ................................................................................................................... Tools ............................................................................................................................. HV Tank, 1 Tube, 1-3 Phase......................................................................................... 3.3.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.3.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.3.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.3.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.3.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.3.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 3.3.7 Disassembly..................................................................................................... 3.3.8 Reassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.3.9 Verify ................................................................................................................ Inverter Mid-Power Assembly ....................................................................................... 3.4.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.4.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.4.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.4.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.4.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.4.6 Time ................................................................................................................. Table of Contents

264 264 265 265 265 265 265 266 266 266 268 269 269 269 270 270 270 270 270

[email protected]

Section 2.0 JEDI Generator Renewal Parts ...................................................................... 257

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 31



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 3.4.7

3.5

3.6

3.8

Table of Contents

271 272 272 273 274 276 278 278 278 279 279 279 279 279 279 279 280 280 280 280 280 280 281 282 282 282 282 282 282 282 283 283 283 283 283 283 283 284 284 285 285 285 285 285 285 286 286 286 286 287 287 287

Page 31

[email protected]

3.7

Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.4.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................. 3.4.7.2 Remove the Interface Unit............................................................. 3.4.7.3 Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate............................. 3.4.7.4 Remove the Inverter Mid Power Assembly ................................... 3.4.8 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... 3.4.9 Verify................................................................................................................. I/F Board RAD ............................................................................................................... 3.5.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.5.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 3.5.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.5.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.5.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 3.5.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 3.5.7 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.5.7.1 Remove the I/F Board Rad............................................................ 3.5.8 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... KV Board RAD............................................................................................................... 3.6.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.6.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 3.6.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.6.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.6.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 3.6.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 3.6.7 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.6.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................. 3.6.7.2 Remove the Interface Unit............................................................. 3.6.7.3 Remove the kV Control Board....................................................... 3.6.8 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... 3.6.9 Verify................................................................................................................. EMC Board 3 Phases .................................................................................................... 3.7.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.7.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 3.7.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.7.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.7.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 3.7.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 3.7.7 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.7.7.1 Remove the AC/DC Unit ............................................................... 3.7.7.2 Remove the EMC Board ............................................................... 3.7.8 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... 3.7.9 Verify................................................................................................................. AC/DC 3 PH Mid Power Assembly ................................................................................ 3.8.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.8.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 3.8.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.8.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.8.5 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.8.5.1 Remove the AC/DC Unit ............................................................... 3.8.5.2 Remove the AC/DC Board ............................................................ 3.8.5.3 Remove the Rectifier Block ........................................................... 3.8.6 Reassembly ......................................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 32




3.10

3.12

3.13 Page 32

Table of Contents

288 288 288 288 288 288 288 289 289 289 289 289 290 292 292 292 292 292 292 292 292 292 292 292 293 294 297 297 297 297 297 297 297 297 298 298 299 299 299 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 301 301 302 302 302 302

[email protected]

3.11

3.8.7 Verify ................................................................................................................ Inverter Coil Mid Power Assembly ................................................................................ 3.9.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.9.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.9.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.9.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.9.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.9.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 3.9.7 Disassembly..................................................................................................... 3.9.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit and the Interface Unit ......................... 3.9.7.2 Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate ............................ 3.9.7.3 Remove the Inverter Coil Mid Power Assembly ........................... 3.9.8 Reassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.9.9 Verify ................................................................................................................ Capacitor Inverter Assembly ......................................................................................... 3.10.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.10.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.10.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.10.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.10.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.10.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 3.10.7 Disassembly..................................................................................................... 3.10.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit and the Interface Unit ......................... 3.10.7.2 Remove the AC/DC Unit and the Support Plate ........................... 3.10.7.3 Remove the Capacitor Inverter Assembly .................................... 3.10.8 Reassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.10.9 Verify ................................................................................................................ LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board.................................................................................. 3.11.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.11.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.11.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.11.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.11.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.11.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 3.11.7 Disassembly..................................................................................................... 3.11.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................ 3.11.7.2 Remove the LV Power Supply Board ........................................... 3.11.8 Reassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.11.9 Verify ................................................................................................................ Filament Board 1 INV.................................................................................................... 3.12.1 Supplies ........................................................................................................... 3.12.2 Tools ................................................................................................................ 3.12.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... 3.12.4 Prerequisites .................................................................................................... 3.12.5 Personnel ......................................................................................................... 3.12.6 Time ................................................................................................................. 3.12.7 Disassembly..................................................................................................... 3.12.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................ 3.12.7.2 Remove the Filament Board ......................................................... 3.12.8 Reassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.12.9 Verify ................................................................................................................ Rotor Board High Speed ...............................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 33




3.14

302 303 303 303 303 303 303 303 304 304 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 306 306 306 307 307

Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards................................................................... 309 Section 1.0 Software Download / Upgrade ...................................................................... 309 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7

Supplies ......................................................................................................................... Tools .............................................................................................................................. Safety Precautions......................................................................................................... Prerequisites.................................................................................................................. Personnel....................................................................................................................... Time............................................................................................................................... Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 1.7.1 Load Software File on Service Laptop.............................................................. 1.7.2 Unzip software file ............................................................................................ 1.7.3 Software download ...........................................................................................

309 309 309 309 309 309 309 309 309 310

Section 2.0 Tube Replacement Software Procedure ...................................................... 311 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

Supplies ......................................................................................................................... Tools .............................................................................................................................. Safety Precautions......................................................................................................... Prerequisites.................................................................................................................. Personnel....................................................................................................................... Time............................................................................................................................... Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 2.7.1 Perform a Database backup ............................................................................. 2.7.2 Reset Tube Data tracking counter and error log............................................... 2.7.3 Verify new tube operation, clear error log......................................................... 2.7.4 Generator Counter Reading Record................................................................. Table of Contents

311 311 311 311 311 312 312 312 312 314 314

Page 33

[email protected]

3.13.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.13.1.1 Tools.............................................................................................. 3.13.2 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.13.3 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.13.4 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 3.13.5 Time.................................................................................................................. 3.13.6 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.13.6.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................. 3.13.6.2 Remove the Rotor Board............................................................... 3.13.7 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... 3.13.8 Verify................................................................................................................. AEC Board..................................................................................................................... 3.14.1 Supplies ............................................................................................................ 3.14.2 Tools ................................................................................................................. 3.14.3 Safety Precautions............................................................................................ 3.14.4 Prerequisites..................................................................................................... 3.14.5 Personnel.......................................................................................................... 3.14.6 Time.................................................................................................................. 3.14.7 Disassembly ..................................................................................................... 3.14.7.1 Remove the Auxiliary Unit ............................................................. 3.14.7.2 Remove the AEC Board ................................................................ 3.14.8 Reassembly ...................................................................................................... 3.14.9 Verify.................................................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 34



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.7.5

Tube Database Download................................................................................ 315

Chapter 10 - Schematics .................................................................................... 317 Section 1.0 MIS Map ........................................................................................................... 317 1.1

Jedi 50 R 1T Cabling..................................................................................................... 321

Section 2.0 Central Listings............................................................................................... 323 2.1 2.2 2.3

2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7

2.12 2.13

323 324 325 326 326 327 328 329 330 331 331 331 332 333 334 335 335 336 336

Section 3.0 Schematics...................................................................................................... 337 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15

PDU Connection Diagram............................................................................................. Table Electrical Schematics .......................................................................................... A61001C Console Control Board Circuit Diagram ........................................................ Jedi Generator TAV Interface Board............................................................................. I/F Board RAD Electrical ............................................................................................... I/F Board RAD V2 Electrical.......................................................................................... Rotor board ................................................................................................................... Heater board ................................................................................................................. LVPS board................................................................................................................... Inverter .......................................................................................................................... Gate cmd....................................................................................................................... Dual snub ...................................................................................................................... AC/DC board................................................................................................................. AEC board..................................................................................................................... Rad IF ...........................................................................................................................

337 338 341 355 359 363 367 378 385 387 388 391 392 393 397

Chapter 11 - MIS Chart........................................................................................ 401 Section 1.0 Scope ............................................................................................................... 401 Page 34

Table of Contents

[email protected]

2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11

kV Measure Board ........................................................................................................ Filament Board 1 Inv. .................................................................................................... Rotation Board High Speed .......................................................................................... 2.3.1 Indicators.......................................................................................................... 2.3.2 J2 Wiring .......................................................................................................... LV Power Supply 3 PH Board ....................................................................................... Gate Command Board .................................................................................................. Dual Snub Board........................................................................................................... kV Control Board........................................................................................................... 2.7.1 Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................................... 2.7.2 Indicators.......................................................................................................... 2.7.3 Non Volatile RAM............................................................................................. AC/DC 3 Phase board................................................................................................... I/F Board RAD V1 ......................................................................................................... I/F Board RAD V2 ......................................................................................................... AEC Board .................................................................................................................... 2.11.1 Test Points ....................................................................................................... AEC Board V2............................................................................................................... Test Points ....................................................................................................................

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 35




Section 2.0 How to Use...................................................................................................... 401 Section 3.0 MIS Charts....................................................................................................... 402 3.1

3.2

3.3

System Console............................................................................................................. 3.1.1 J1 Handswitch Interface, 5184620 ................................................................... 3.1.2 J2 FW Download Serial Port, 5194292............................................................. 3.1.3 J3 Power and RTL Interface, 5183903 ............................................................. 3.1.4 J4 Generator Interface, 5182354...................................................................... Generator....................................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Generator Power Cable, 5196454 .................................................................... 3.2.2 Generator Grounding Cable, 5196643 ............................................................. Table.............................................................................................................................. 3.3.1 TM1-XS105 Cable, 5193103 ............................................................................ 3.3.2 Table Grounding Cable 1, 5193105.................................................................. 3.3.3 Table Grounding Cable 2, 5193106.................................................................. 3.3.4 Table Grounding Cable 3, 5193107.................................................................. 3.3.5 Table Grounding Cable 5, 5193109.................................................................. 3.3.6 Table Power Cable, 5193607 ........................................................................... 3.3.6.1 Table MC7 Cable, 5197242 .......................................................... 3.3.7 Table Cable No1, 5197244...............................................................................

402 402 402 403 404 406 406 406 406 406 407 407 407 407 408 408 409

Section 1.0 Compliance Statement................................................................................... 411 Section 2.0 Compatibility Tables ...................................................................................... 412 2.1 2.2

Electromagnetic Emission ............................................................................................. 412 Electromagnetic Immunity ............................................................................................. 413

Section 3.0 Use Recommendations.................................................................................. 416 Section 4.0 Installation Recommendations ..................................................................... 416 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

Cable Shielding & Grounding ........................................................................................ Subsystem & Accessories Power Supply Distribution .................................................. Stacked Components & Equipment............................................................................... Low Frequency Magnetic Field...................................................................................... Electrostatic Discharge Environment & Recommendations ..........................................

416 416 416 417 417

Chapter B - Revision History.............................................................................. 419

Table of Contents

Page 35

[email protected]

Chapter A - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ........................................... 411

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 36




[email protected]

Page 36

Table of Contents

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 37




Chapter 1 - Before You Begin Section 1.0 Introduction The goal of this document is to guide the service representative through an entire X-ray room installation and to provide Diagnostic and Calibration information for troubleshooting and repair. The following On-site Requirements must be accounted for prior to beginning installation of the system.

Section 2.0 Objective and Scope of this Manual This direction will lead you in a correct sequence through the manuals needed to install the equipment. Following the suggested sequence will result in an orderly installation. However, extenuating circumstances may dictate a deviation from the recommended sequence. Feel free to deviate, but keep track of your progress by checking off the tasks in the flowchart as you complete them.

2.1

Pre-Installation Check Pre-installation planning should be complete. Inspect the pre-installation “checklist”, found in GEHC document 5275600-100 (XR 6000 System Pre-Installation Manual), and verify that the tasks specified have been completed. Immediately arrange for completion of any tasks still not completed.

2.2

Installation Plan The main steps in the installation plan are easily seen by referring to the Table of Contents of this document. The plan objectives are to: Give a logical installation order which recognizes mechanical and electrical interface areas. Test and adjust each subsystem independently. To obtain a good overall view of how these objectives are to be achieved review the Table of Contents for this document before beginning the installation work. Then, if it is necessary to deviate from the stated plan, you will be aware of the essential interface area. This document will give you the information required to make another effective plan that applies to particular situations.

2.3

Interconnection Interconnection of products by furnished cables or contractor supplied wiring is indicated by numbered MIS runs in the installation sections. Run interconnect charts are available, which describe the connection and function of each wire. For XR 6000 System, refer to the following: •

XR 6000 System Schematics (Chapter 10)

•

XR 6000 System MIS Chart (Chapter 11) Chapter 1 - Before You Begin

Page 37

[email protected]

Check equipment according to the packing list for your system against the main catalog numbers in the FDO (Field Delivery Order). Also, verify that all the manuals are present in the binders according to the Table of Contents.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 38




2.4

Presentation The procedures in this steering manual are presented in jobcard forms.

Section 3.0 On-Site Requirements 3.1

EMC Requirements If electromagnetic compliance is mandatory for the local country where this system is installed, this equipment is allowed to be installed only in X-ray protected rooms, which provide an attenuation of at least 12 dB for radio disturbances from 30 MHz to 1 GHz.

3.2

Tools and Test Equipment There are no additional tools and test equipment besides the standard service representative tool kit which must be available before installing the XR 6000 System as below.

[email protected]

3.3

•

Electric hammer drill with bits

•

Digital multimeter

•

4 Ft. Level (or two standard levels)

•

Torque wrench

•

HV cable removal spanner

•

Push-pull Gauge

•

Common service tools

•

Resolution Pattern

•

Dose Meter

•

Loctite 242

Documentation Directions are necessary for correct installation of the XR 6000 System. Procedures from each document will be used and reflect the latest information available at this time. Not all procedures in this manual apply to all sites. Before you begin installation, cross out the procedures that do not apply to your site.

Page 38

Section 3.0 - On-Site Requirements

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 39




3.4

Audio and Visual It is the User’s responsibility to provide the means for audio and visual communication between the Operator and the patient.

Section 4.0 Description of System

5 6

2 Standard / Advanced [email protected]

3

1

Cabinet

4 WLS Standard / Advanced

Operator Console

The XR 6000 is divided into basic components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Operator Console (Console Stand - Optional) Integrated Table Standard / Advanced Cabinet Wall Stand Standard / Advanced (Optional) 50kW X-ray Tube - Toshiba E7843X Collimator

Figure 1-1 XR 6000 System Component Identification

Chapter 1 - Before You Begin

Page 39

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 40



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item

Component

Model Number

1a

Console

5194507

1b

Console Pedestal

5192392

2

Standard Integrated Table

5180891

2

Advanced Integrated Table

5316772

2a

Standard Integrated Tube Stand

5183392

2a

Advanced Integrated Tube Stand

5183392-2

3a

Generator (VR Jedi 50 R1T)

2212259-2

3b

PDU

5220653

4

Standard Wall Stand

5194508

4

Advanced Wall Stand

5316773

5

50kW X-ray Tube - Toshiba E7843X

5192454

6

Manual Collimator

5189248

Table 1-1 XR 6000 System Component Identification

[email protected]

Page 40

Section 4.0 - Description of System

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 41




Chapter 2 - Physical Installation Installation is broken into two primary tasks: mechanical and electrical. Mechanical tasks focus on the physical aspects of hardware assembly, equipment positioning, and cabling. Electrical tasks are performed when system power is applied. The primary tasks are designed to be performed in sequence. Follow the sequence of tasks describe for each primary task in Section 1.0 that follow.

Section 1.0 System Installation Guide 1

Complete Pre-Installation Checklist People Required: 1 Minutes to Complete: 10 Fill out the Pre-Installation Checklist to confirm completion of pre-install activities before beginning the installation process.

2

Receive and Inventory System

People Required: 1

Minutes to Complete: 10

Inventory equipment & report discrepancies immediately. Plan route and transport equipment to room. 3

Install Table

People Required: 2


Remove table from shipping container. Position and install table according to site plans & drawings, and secure. Remove tube stand from shipping container. Install tube stand. Install X-ray tube. Install control box and collimator. Counterweight balance. Install cassette tray(Not needed for advanced Integrate table). Install ion chamber and grid (optional). Electrical connections. Install cabinet tray. Table top installation and leveling. 4

Install System Console

People Required: 1


Position and install system console according to site plans & drawings, and secure. 5

Collimator Alignment

People Required: 1


Power up system. Collimator alignment.

Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 41

[email protected]

Collect Product Locator Cards and store in a secure location.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 42



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 (Continued)

6

Install Wall Stand

People Required: 2


Remove wall stand from shipping container. Position and install wall stand according to site plans & drawings, and secure. Install cassette tray. Install ion chamber and grid (optional). Counterweight balance. 7

Equipment and Personnel Readiness

People Required: 1


Verify equipment is configured per the site plans and drawings. Verify that the resistance between subsystems grounds is less than 0.1 ohms. Fix and/or report any discrepancies. 8

Configure and Calibrate System

People Required: 1


People Required: 1


Tube seasoning. Software installation. Tube configuration. Receptor parameter. Checksum validation. Backup database. 9

Install Subsystem Protective Covers Tube stand covers. Table cover. Wall stand covers.

10

System Checks

People Required: 1


11

Attach Warning Labels and Rating Plates

People Required: 1


Attach all the warning labels and detent marks. If your country requires the product rating plate to be in the language of that country, follow the instructions on document #45474336. Paste the appropriate language label over the English rating plate.

12

Cleanup Site

People Required: 1


Remove and dispose of shipping materials and tools properly. 13

Customer Turnover

People Required: 1

Complete & Return Product (i.e; Locator) Cards. Perform general house keeping tasks and turn system over to user.

Page 42

Section 1.0 - System Installation Guide


[email protected]

AEC calibration.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 43



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 14

Complete Installation Checklist

(Continued) People Required: 1


Field Engineer to fill out installation checklist at completion of installation.

Lead is used in this system to provide required radiation shielding, such as in tube, collimator, please pay attention and do not touch it directly.

[email protected]


Page 43

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 44




Section 2.0 Installation Checklist Pre-Installation Checklist Delivery Date:

Sales Person:

Customer:

FDO No.:

Room #

Equipment: Physical Requirements of Site

Completed

1.) Room size adequate for intended equipment configuration? 2.) Floor is strong enough for intended equipment and mounting methods approved? 3.) Delivery route accommodates all intended equipment? 4.) Radiation physicist consulted? 5.) Necessary alterations made to circumvent obstructions? 6.) Modifications to room finished? [email protected]

7.) Supports, platforms materials been provided? 8.) Support structures installed for floor and wall mounted equipment? 9.) Has floor been modified for cable ducts? 10.) Electrical service in place – at the ratings specified in pre-installation documentation? 11.) Power available to operate power tools? 12.) All non-electrical lines (air, water, oxygen, vacuum) installed? Interconnections

Completed

1.) Signal cable, power and grounding plans produced? 2.) Necessary interconnection hardware, such as junction boxes, conduit or raceways, and fittings provided? 3.) Interconnection hardware installed? 4.) Flexible, stranded wire provided for System input power connection? 5.) System “feeder” power cables pulled and sufficient length available at disconnect box for connections? 6.) Interconnecting cables continuity checked, and labeled? 7.) All high voltage cable lengths verified? 8.) Interface information available for equipment?

Page 44

Section 2.0 - Installation Checklist

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 45



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 General

Completed

1.) Walls and floor clear of all obstructions? 2.) Walls finished? 3.) Finished floor installed? 4.) Room lights installed? 5.) Dust-creating work completed? 6.) Old equipment within room removed? 7.) Component positions clearly marked on floor? 8.) Space available to store equipment? 9.) Lock on door, or locked room available? 10.) Have all fire/safety inspections for occupancy been completed? 11.) Send completed checklist to the GE Healthcare installation team.

[email protected]

Comments:

Inspection Date(s):

Installation Project Manager Signature


Page 45

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 46




Installation Checklist Purpose:

Installation checklist to confirm that all critical installation steps have been completed.

Item # 1.)

Item

Sign Off

Power and ground cables connected and tightened: Power cables (how many?, where?) Ground cables (how many?, where?) All signal cables connected and tightened.

3.)

Cable shield clamps installed and tightened (how many?, where?).

4.)

All mounting bolts installed and tightened (floor and wall).

5.)

Control room cables properly dressed.

6.)

All covers installed.

7.)

Room cleaned.

8.)

Product locator cards collected.

9.)

Missing components and/or options:

10.)

List of any installation drawing deviations (all deviations should be signed by customer and reviewed by the installation specialist).

11.)

Packing materials disposed of.

12.)

Dollies and crates returned: Positioner table / Standard Wall Stand dolly

13.)

Have all calibrations been completed?

14.)

Have purchased options been installed/enabled/configured?

15.)

All appropriate regulatory labels installed: X-ray tube focal spot Warning labels Rating plates

16.)

InSite checkout completed?

17.)

Have functional checks been completed?

18.)

Are all covers installed?

19.)

Have all protective tape/coverings been removed?

Page 46

Section 2.0 - Installation Checklist

[email protected]

2.)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 47



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item #

Item

20.)

Are there any cosmetic issues?

21.)

Are there any system issues?

22.)

Are there any functional limitations?

23.)

Has system documentation (paper and CDROM) been given to the customer?

24.)

Has local physics inspection been completed. Some states/sites may not allow use of system for patients until this is done.

25.)

Has backup of pristine system been performed? (Patient Data Base as well as total system backup)

26.)

Has Field Engineer completed all checklists:

Sign Off

Pre-Installation Installation checklist

Field Engineer Signature:

____________________________________ [email protected]


Page 47

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 48




Section 3.0 Before You Begin Check all the crates appearances, preventive collision labels and preventive tilting labels. If the center of the preventive collision label is GREEN, it means the system is OK without any collision during shippment. If the center of the preventive collision label is RED, it means the system is not OK with collision during shippment. Please open the crates to check system carefully.

Green

Red

Figure 2-1 Preventive Collision Label

If the center of the preventive tilting label is RED, it means the system is not OK with tilting during shippment. Please open the crates to check system carefully.

Green

Red

Figure 2-2 Preventive Tilting Label

Page 48

Section 3.0 - Before You Begin

[email protected]

If the center of the preventive tilting label is GREEN, it means the system is OK without any tilting during shippment.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 49




Section 4.0 Integrated Table 4.1

Radiography Table

4.1.1

Unpacking and Positioning Be careful of injured by the nails.

Note:

•

Do not discard any packing materials such as envelopes, boxes, bags until all parts are accounted for against the packing list.

•

Check the mechanical conditions and external appearances of all parts for possible damages or missing items.

•

The distribution center or factory must be notified immediately of any damage or shortage of parts.

Unpacking OPEN ME FIRST box (Pink Box) in Crate #1 at first. Take out the Documents: Pre-Installation Manual (5275600-100), Service Manual (5275601-100), Operator Manual (5275602-100), and Quick Start (5275603-100). Read Pre-Installation Manual and Service Manual carefully before system installation and calibration. [email protected]

Figure 2-3 OPEN ME FIRST 1.) Loosen the 12 fibulaes on the side of shipping container.

Figure 2-4 Loosen Fibulaes Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 49

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 50



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Note:

To remove the side shipping container successfully, fix the fibulaes after loosen them.

2.) Remove the side shipping container, and table top is bound on it. See Figure 2-5. Side Shipping Container with Table Top

[email protected]

Figure 2-5 Table Crate with Side Removed 3.) Loosen the remaining fibulaes, and remove the top and other sides of shipping containers together. See Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-6 Loosen Remaining Fibulaes

Page 50

Section 4.0 - Integrated Table

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 51




Figure 2-7 Remove Crate Top and Sides 4.) Remove the protective covering.

[email protected]

Figure 2-8 Remove the Protective Covering 5.) Take out all the boxes from the crate.


Page 51

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 52




Figure 2-9 Take Out All the Boxes 6.) Unpack the ramps and dolly.

[email protected]

Figure 2-10 Unpack Ramps and Dolly 7.) Place the ramps.

Page 52


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 53




Ramps

Figure 2-11 Place Ramps 8.) Install the dolly to the table. [email protected]

Figure 2-12 Install Dolly to Table 9.) Demount the two fixed screws, and remove the table front cover. Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 53

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 54




Figure 2-13 Remove Table Front Cover 10.) Demount the four bolts which fixed the table to the crate base.

[email protected]

Figure 2-14 Demount Table Fixed Bolts_Front

Page 54


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 55




Figure 2-15 Demount Table Fixed Bolts_Rear 11.) Adjust caster bolts to lower the casters down the table base level. See Figure 2-16.

[email protected]

Figure 2-16 Lower Casters 12.) Pull the table down the ramp and to the field. DO NOT put your feet under the table base. Be careful of being injured by integrated table because of the heavy weight.


Page 55

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 56




Figure 2-17 Pull Table Down the Ramps

[email protected]

Figure 2-18 Pull Table to Field 13.) Unpack the table top, and take it into the field.

Page 56


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 57




Figure 2-19 Cut Belts

[email protected]

Figure 2-20 Remove Protective Covering

Figure 2-21 Take to Field

4.1.2

Installation 1.) Refer to the room layout in Pre-Installation Manual (5275600-100), confirm the location of the table with the operator, make marks and move the table away. 2.) Drill four holes at the marks, and then clean the holes of all dust and chips. Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 57

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 58




Please use  10 drill.

Figure 2-22 Drill Holes 3.) Move the table, let the mounting holes on the table align the holes in the floor, and adjust caster bolts to upper the casters above the table base level.

[email protected]

Figure 2-23 Upper Casters 4.) Demount the casters. 5.) Insert the supplied four M10 anchors and washers, and hammer the anchors into the holes. 6.) Level the table base as necessary with shims, and place the shims close to the anchors.

Figure 2-24 Table Base Level Page 58


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 59



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 7.) Tighten the anchors to fix the table to the floor.

8.) Demount the three table stop plates (RED color) in the table frame.

Figure 2-25 Demount Table Stop Plates 9.) Take out all the cables inside the tube stand rail, and route the cables. Note:

Suggest to route the cables from the table food end.

Table Head End

Figure 2-26 Route Cables 10.) Demount the cabinet tray with two screws each side and pull it out. Be careful! DO NOT damage the cables.


Page 59

[email protected]

Table Foot End

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 60




Figure 2-27 Demount Cabinet Tray Note:

Pull the center of the foot pedal. [email protected]

Pull Here Figure 2-28 Pull Out Cabinet Tray 11.) Demount generator cover with four screws and PDU cover with two screws, and put them aside.

Page 60


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 61




Figure 2-29 Demount Covers

[email protected]


Page 61

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 62




4.2 4.2.1

Tube Stand Unpacking Be careful of injured by the nails. •


•


•


1.) Loosen all the 6 fibulaes, and remove the top and sides of shipping containers together. See Figure 2-30.

[email protected]

Figure 2-30 Loosen Fibulaes and Remove Crate

Page 62


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 63



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.) Take out the covers. 3.) Remove the two fixed plates with two bolts each.

[email protected]

Figure 2-31 Remove Fixed Plates 4.) Remove the protective covering.


Page 63

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 64




Figure 2-32 Remove Protective Covering

4.2.2

Installation 1.) Demount the rubber bumper and leveling bolt on one side of the tube stand rail. Suggest to install the tube stand from the table head end (if the cables are routed from the table food end).

Table Head End

2.) Raise the tube stand.

Page 64


[email protected]

Note:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 65




[email protected]

Figure 2-33 Raise the Tube Stand 3.) Slide the tube stand into the rail.

Figure 2-34 Install the Tube Stand 4.) Install the rubber bumper and screw back. 5.) Demount the RED counterweight lock screw on the back of tube stand.


Page 65

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 66




Figure 2-35 Demount Lock Screw 6.) Demount tube stand back cover, connect the tube stand cables (TM1-XS105 cable 5193103, No1 cable 5197244, and Grouding cables 5193106 / 5193107), and remount the back cover. Part No.

Part Name

5193103

TM1-XS105 Cable

END1 Label XP105

From

END2 label

5197244’s XS105

To Table TM1 1

TM1-2

Table TM1 2

TM1-3

Table TM1 3

TM1-4

Table TM1 4

XS106

5220569’s XP106

5139106

Table Grounding Cable 2

PE1

PE1

PE2

PE2

5193107


PE2

PE2

PE3

PE3

5139106/5139107

5139103 - XP105

5139103 - XS106

Figure 2-36 Connect Tube Stand Cables

Page 66


[email protected]

TM1-1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 67




Figure 2-37 Mount Back Cover 7.) Mount the cable routing plate to the tube stand.

[email protected]

Figure 2-38 Cable Routing in Plate Note:

DO NOT twist the cables when mounting the plate.


Page 67

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 68




Figure 2-39 Mount Cable Routing Plate 8.) Press the tube arm to the appropriate position that are easy to install the tube and collimator, and insert the carriage fixed bolt again to fix the carriage.

[email protected]

Figure 2-40 Fix the Carriage

Page 68


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 69




4.3

X-Ray Tube Note:

For tube instruction, refer to related contents contained in the related specifications. Check calibration due date of Torque wrench and shelf-life of Loctite before usage. In order to ensure to meet the security needs, apply Loctite 242(or 243) to the three screws and tighten these 3 screws to 24 N-m (17.7 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench is the step must be performed, while installation and FRU replace. 1.) Loosen the three bolts on the tube arm, put the tube forks into the tube stand arm. 2.) Apply Loctite 242(or 243) to the three screws assembling the tube fork with tube stand arm 3.) Tighten these three bolts to 24 N-m (17.7 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench 4.) Mount the cable supporting plate

[email protected]

Figure 2-41 Install Tube Fork and Supporting Plate Note:

Insert the tube fork by referring to the mark.

Figure 2-42 Mark 5.) Loosen the four screws of the upper clamp of tube fork, and remove the upper clamp of tube fork. To prevent the clamps from any impact. In case impact occurred, it should be verified that the clamp has enough strength before installation.


Page 69

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 70




Upper Clamps

Lower Clamps

6.) Take out X-ray tube from the box. 7.) Put the X-ray tube on the lower support of tube fork. Notice the tube installation direction. If the direction is wrong, the tube focal spot will be inaccurate, and the tube may be falling down if the clamps are loose. Hold the tube to prevent it falling down. Check calibration due date of Torque wrench and shelf-life of Loctite before usage. In order to ensure to meet the security needs, apply Loctite 242(or 243) to the screws and tighten screws to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench is the step must be performed, while installation and FRU replace. 8.) Reinstall the upper clamp of the tube fork. a.) Apply Loctite 242(or 243) to the four screws assembling the upper clamp with lower support before mounting. b.) Tighten these four screws to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench. Note:

Page 70

After installation of the tube, balance the tube arm again.


[email protected]

Figure 2-43 Remove Upper Clamps

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 71




Figure 2-44 Install X-ray Tube 9.) Adjust the tube to align the RED indication label with 0 degree, and lock the tube.

[email protected]

Locks Figure 2-45 Tighten the Tube 10.) Rotate the tube 180 degrees.

Figure 2-46 Rotate Tube 180 Degrees


Page 71

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 72




4.4

Control Box and Collimator Control Box Handle

Control Box Cover

Spacer Collimator 1.) Demount the two stop plates and take out the collimator flange.

Stop Plates [email protected]

Collimator Flange

Figure 2-47 Demount Stop Plates and Take Out Flange

Suggest to demount the two stop plates totally, but NOT only loosen them. Or the stop plates will crash the glass window during collimator installation.

Page 72


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 73



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Glass Window

Figure 2-48 Wrong Way

[email protected]

Figure 2-49 Correct Way 2.) Demount the four mounting screws on the tube.

Figure 2-50 Demount Mounting Screws


Page 73

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 74




Check calibration due date of Torque wrench and shelf-life of Loctite before usage. In order to ensure to meet the security needs, apply Loctite 242(or 243) to the screws and tighten bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench is the step must be performed, while installation and FRU replace. 3.) Put the spacer and control box handle between the collimator flange and the tube, apply Loctite 242 (or 243) to the four screws, tighten to 9.9 N-m (7.3lbs-ft) with the torque wrench. Note:

Please install the collimator flange according to the marks on the x-ray tube.

Figure 2-51 Mark

Drop into the hole

Collimator Flange

Spacer

Control Handle

Figure 2-52 Mount Control Box Handle

Page 74


[email protected]

Daub to the screw thread

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 75




Check calibration due date of Torque wrench and shelf-life of Loctite before usage. In order to ensure to meet the security needs, The Loctite 242(or 243) to the bolts and tighten bolts to 9.9 N-m (7.3 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench is the step must be performed, while installation and FRU replace. 4.) Mount collimator onto the collimator adapter using the two stop plates, apply Loctite 242 (or 243) to the four screws, tighten to 9.9 N-m (7.3lbs-ft) with the torque wrench.

[email protected]

Figure 2-53 Mount Collimator 5.) Rotate tube back.

Figure 2-54 Rotate Tube Back 6.) Route the cable through cable supporting bracket to the tube side. Note:

DO NOT fix the cables on supporting bracket or plate before the cable connections on tube side. 7.) Prior to the connection of the high-voltage cables, remove the old silicone compound on the plug surfaces with clean dry cloth and check to verify there are as cracks, flaws, or traces of creeping discharge on the surfaces.


Page 75

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 76




When the traces of creeping discharge are found, be sure to replace the defective parts. Grinding off the traces only will not be effective. 8.) Coat the tip of the cable plugs with the silicone compound about five to seven grams, that is, to the extent the tip is hidden under the heaped up compound. At this time, the side of the cable plug should be greased.

Figure 2-55 Coating with Silicone Compound

10.) Connect the anode and cathode HV cables (2269002-5) to the X-ray tube. HV Cable Socket

HV Cable

+ (ANODE)

+

- (CATHODE)

-

Check the polarity of HV cables carefully, and DO NOT connect the two HV cables reversely. Connect the HV cables in the correct polarity with sufficient care not to produce clearance between the cable plug flange and the cable socket at the insertion of the plugs. Presence of such clearance or incomplete silicone compound coating will cause creeping discharge and normal operation of tube will be disturbed.

Page 76


[email protected]

9.) Remove the cap covered the socket of the tube housing and wipe the inside softly with a clean dry cloth. DO NOT use any chlorinated solvents to clean any parts.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 77




Figure 2-56 Inserting Cable Plug 11.) Tighten the high-voltage cables solidly to the sockets of the tube housing by the threaded cable flange. 12.) Demount the tube cover on Anode side. [email protected]

Figure 2-57 Demount Tube Cover 13.) Connect the anode rotation cable (5195936). Note:

Fix the cable with clamp.


Page 77

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 78




Figure 2-58 Anode Rotation Cable Conections HV Tank

Color

1

C

White

2

M

Black

3

A

Red

SW

SW

Brown

SW

SW

Yellow

E

E

Green

[email protected]

Tube

14.) Remount the tube cover.

Figure 2-59 Remount Tube Cover 15.) Connect the control box cables to the connecting plate, fix the plate onto control box, ty-rap the cables and fix with a cupule, and mount the control box cover. Part No. 5197242

Page 78

Part Name MC7 Cable

END1 Label XP102

From Tube Fork 5197245's XS102


END2 Label

To

MC7+

MC7+

MC7-

MC7-

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 79



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Part No. 5197244

5193107

Part Name

END1 Label

No1 Cable


From

END2 Label

To

XS105

5197103's XP105

XP104

Collimator 5135895-1's XS104

XS101

5193101's XP101

XP103

Control Box 5197245's XS103

PE2

PE2

PE3

PE3

5193107 5197244-E

XS103 <---> XP103 5197244

5135895-1 XS104 <---> XP104 5197244 5197242

XP102 <---> XS102 5197245

Figure 2-60 Connect Control Box Cables


Page 79

[email protected]

5197245

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 80



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 a. Loosen the handles.

b. Install the control box cover.

[email protected]

c. Tighten the handles. Figure 2-61 Install Control Box Cover 16.) Install the cable supporting plate, route and ty-rap the cables, and fix them onto the plate. Be careful of the cable moving range, and make sure the cable will not be damaged during tube movement.

Page 80


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 81




Fix

Supporting Plate Figure 2-62 Fix Cables onto Supporting Plate 17.) Mount the cable supporting bracket onto the back of the tube stand, put the cables onto the supporting bracket, but DO NOT fix the cables.

[email protected]

Figure 2-63 Mount Cable Supporting Bracket 18.) Connect the No1 cable (5197244). Part No. 5197244

5193101

Part Name No1 Cable

MC6 Cable

END1 Label

From

END2 Label

To

XS105

5197103's XP105

XP104

Collimator 5135895-1's XS104

XS101

5193101's XP101

XP103

Control Box 5197245's XS103

MC6

MC6

XP101

5197244’s XS101


Page 81

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 82




5193101 XP101 <---> XS101 5197244

DO NOT FIX

19.) Fix the cables.

4.5

Counterweight Adjust the counterweight by adding or removing couterweight blocks until the up/down operation force is balanced.

Page 82


[email protected]

Figure 2-64 Connect No1 Cable

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 83




Figure 2-65 Adjust Counterweight

4.6

Cassette Tray For the systems which used advanced Integrated Table, the Cassette was installed before and you can jump to the next step directly. Unpack and take out the cassette tray, slide it into the table, and connect the cassette tray grounding cable.

Figure 2-66 Insert Cassette Tray


Page 83

[email protected]

Note:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 84




Figure 2-67 Connect Cassette Tray Grounding Cable

4.7

Ion Chamber and Grid (Optional) DO NOT put anything onto the ion chamber or grid. And pay attention to the Ion Chamber and Grid's orientation. Note:

The fixers installation method is different with different options.

[email protected]

Page 84


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 85




4.7.1

Install both Ion Chamber and Grid for system with standard Integrated table 1.) Demount the cassette tray side cover and two of the four fixers, and loosen the other two.

[email protected]

Limit Position

Fixer

Cassette Tray Side Cover

Figure 2-68 Demount the Cover and Fixers 2.) Install the ion chamber and grid, connect table ion chamber (5167409) and 4 m cable (5166493), and install the cassette tray side cover back.


Page 85

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 86




Block is in the lower place

Note: Cassette Tray handle direction.

Grid

Note: Ion Chamber direction. Ion Chamber

Cassette Tray Side Cover

Connect to JEDI

Cable Routing 5166493

Figure 2-69 Install Ion Chamber and Grid

Page 86


[email protected]

Cable Routing 5167409

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 87




AEC1

[email protected]

Figure 2-70 Table Ion Chamber to JEDI


Page 87

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 88




4.7.2

Install the Grid Only for system with standard Integrated table 1.) Demount the four fixers.

Fixer

Figure 2-71 Demount the Fixers 2.) Install the grid.

Page 88


[email protected]

Limit Position

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 89




Block is in the upper place

[email protected]

Figure 2-72 Install Grid

4.7.3

Install the Ion Chamber and Grid for system with advanced Integrated table For the system with advanced integrated table, the grid was oscillate grid. The installatation should be done as steps below:


Page 89

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 90



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 1.) Remove the cover A by remove the five screws as fig 2-73 shown.

screw used to Cover A mount the cover

2.) Loosen the four screws marked with circle in Fig 2-74 which were used to tighten the ion chamber.

the four screws used to tighten the ion chamber. The ion chamber was used to help to show the screw’s position.

Figure 2-74 Loosen the four screws 3.) Insert the ionion chamber to the holder as Fig 2-75 shown. Please be care for the orientation

Page 90


[email protected]

Figure 2-73 Remove the cover A

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 91



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 of the grid.

[email protected]

Figure 2-75 Insert the ion Chamber to the holder 4.) Adjust the position of the ion chamber as these steps: 1.) Make the rod perpendicular.

Make the rod perpendicular

Figure 2-76 Make the rod perpendicular 2.) Use the cover A dismounted before as ruler to mark the center of the rectangle used to hold the grid, then adjust the position of ion chamber to make the center of the ion


Page 91

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 92




chamber superpose with the center line marked by the cover A. See fig 2-77.

Superpose the center of ion chamber and the center of the rectangle.

Figure 2-77 Superpose the center of ion chamber and the center of the rectangle

5.) Route the ion chamber cable as Fig 2-78 shown.

Figure 2-78 Route the ion chamber cable as Fig 2-78 arrow shown

Page 92


[email protected]

3.) Tighten the four screws removed in step 2 as Fig 2-74 shown.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 93



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 6.) Connect the ion chamber cable as Fig 2-79 circle shown.

Figure 2-79 Connect the ion chamber cable 7.) Insert the cable connections into the holder and mount the cover A.

Figure 2-80 Install the grid


Page 93

[email protected]

8.) Put the grid on the ion chamber surface with their center superposed as Fig 2-80 shown. Note the orientation of the grid.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 94



GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 9.) Fix the grid with four fixers.

Fixer

Figure 2-81 Fix the grid with four fixers

4.8

Electrical Connections

1.) Connect and route System Power Cable (hospital provide).

Figure 2-82 Connect and Route System Power Cable 2.) Connect and Xray-on Light (pin 4, 6) and Room Door interlock (pin 1, 2) Cables (hospital Page 94


[email protected]

For details, please refer to Chapter 10 - Schematics, Chapter 11 - MIS Chart, and Pre-Installation Manual (5275600-100).

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 95




provide). For details, please refer to Room Power Supply in Chapter 4 of Pre-Installation Manual (5275600-100).

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3.) If wall stand ion chamber is ordered, connect and route the ion chamber 24 m cable (5166654) and grounding cable (5193110) to JEDI.


Page 95

[email protected]

Figure 2-83 Connect Xray-on light and Room Door interlock Cables

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 96




Service Laptop

System Console

AEC1 - Table AEC2 - Standard Wall Stand

[email protected]

Figure 2-84 Wall Stand Ion Chamber Cables

Cable Routing 5166654/5193110

Connect to Wall Stand Ion chamber Figure 2-85 Cable Routing

Page 96


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 97




4.9

Install Cabinet Tray 1.) Install generator and PDU covers, and push cabinet tray to under the table.

Push Here

Figure 2-86 Install Generator and PDU Covers [email protected]

2.) Fix the cabinet tray to the table base with two screws.

Figure 2-87 Install Cabinet Tray


Page 97

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 98




4.10

Table Top Installation and Leveling 1.) Demount the stopper on one side of the table top, slide the table top onto the table base, and remount the stopper.

2.) Check the table top leveling. If it is not level, loosen the mounting anchors, and adjust the leveling bolts, then fix them with washers.

Figure 2-89 Adjust Leveling Bolts

Page 98


[email protected]

Figure 2-88 Install the Table Top

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 99




Section 5.0 System Console Route the console cables to the control room.

5.1

Without Console Stand Connect and ty-rap the console cables. Position the system console to the location where the operator can observe the patients conveniently.

Figure 2-90 Console Cable Connections Part Name

System Console

The Other End

5184620

Handswitch

J1

Handswitch

J2

Service Laptop

5194292/5241079 RS232 Service Cable / ISP Download Cable

5.2

5183903

Console Power Cable

J3

PDU - TM3

5182354

JEDI Generator Communication Cable

J4

PDU - J1

With Console Stand 1.) Assemble the console onto the console stand, and demount the rear cover.

Figure 2-91 Console Installation Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 99

[email protected]

Part No.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 100


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.) Connect and ty-rap the console cables.

Figure 2-92 Console Cable Connections Part No.

Part Name

System Console

The Other End

5184620

Handswitch

J1

Handswitch

J2

Service Laptop

5194292/5241079 RS232 Service Cable / ISP Download Cable Console Power Cable

J3

PDU - TM3

5182354

JEDI Generator Communication Cable

J4

PDU - J1

3.) Demount console stand bottom cover with two screws. Confirm the location of the console with the operator, make marks and move the console away.

Figure 2-93 Demount Bottom Cover 4.) Drill two holes at the marks, and then clean the holes of all dust and chips. Note:

Please use  7 drill. 5.) Move the console, and let the mounting holes on the console foot panel align the holes in the floor. 6.) Insert the supplied two M6 anchors and washers, and hammer the anchors into the holes. 7.) Tighten the anchors. 8.) Mount the bottom cover back.

Page 100

Section 5.0 - System Console

[email protected]

5183903

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 101


1:28 PM



Section 6.0 Collimator Alignment 1.) Power up the system. Check LEDs status. Refer to Chapter 4 - Functional Checks - 3.1 System Power Up. 2.) Move the tube to the lowest position above the table top, open collimator light, confirm the center of the light field projected by the collimator with an article, such as a screw.

[email protected]

Figure 2-94 Lowest SID 3.) Move the tube up to the highest position.

Figure 2-95 Highest SID 4.) Make sure the bias of the center is less than 3 mm, and make sure the collimator beam can align the center point of the cassette tray handle.


Page 101

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 102


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Bias in less than 3 mm

Collimator beam

Handle Center Figure 2-96 Collimator Beam Align Cassette Tray Handle Center Point 5.) If the requirements above cannot be met, adjust the three screws on the tube fork to align the collimator.

[email protected]

Figure 2-97 Align Collimator

Section 7.0DAP Meter Installation Note:

Do not touch the active area of the ionization chamber (1) with bared finger. It may degrade the light transparency of the DAP meter.

Figure 2-98 DAP Meter Procedures: Page 102

Section 7.0 - DAP Meter Installation

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 103


1:28 PM



Fix the cable inside the tube cover for the system which does not include the DAP meter. 1.) Installing the Chamber in the X-ray Unit Slide the chamber into the middle level of accessory rails of the collimator till the detent is reached.

Figure 2-99 Insert DAP Meter into the middle level of the collimator rail 2.) Connect the Chamber with system The back side of the DAP meter includes a short cable with a round plastic plug connector (ODU: MediSnap, 4-pin). This includes the connections for the power supply. Note:

Please be aware that the connector cable from tube stand side is only for the use of connecting the DAP meter. [email protected]

Figure 2-100 Connect the DAP Meter to the 24V Power Supply 3.) Connect the other end of the connector to the 24V power supply of the PDU. Connection diagram as below:

TURN OFF THE POWER BEFORE CONNECT/DISCONNECT THE CHAMBERDo not connect/disconnect the chamber to/from the system when the power is turned on. It may damage the electronics. Chapter 2 - Physical Installation

Page 103

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 104


1:28 PM



DO NOT PUT THE ADDITIONAL FILTER ABOVE THE CHAMBER Do not put any filtration between chamber and the patient in the exam. It may cause the wrong indication of DAP value. 4.) Switching the device on/ DAP meter ready for using After DAP meter is well mounted to collimator and connected to system power supply, the meter is switched on when system is powered on. The display unit responds with a brief signal tone and the following labels: VACUDAP Vx.xx 11111111 22222222 : WAITING 0.00 The firmware version (Vx.xx) of the display unit is output first. The Power-On test in the measuring chamber is then started and a display test is executed simultaneously. The display unit waits for the result of the TEST function when the WAITING label is displayed. After the successful conclusion of the power-on test, the meter is either in the Measuring function or an error message is output. The measuring readiness is displayed by the measured value zero (display: 0.00 or 0.0). [email protected]

Page 104

Section 7.0 - DAP Meter Installation

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 105


1:28 PM



Section 8.0 Standard Wall Stand 8.1

Unpacking Be careful of injured by the nails. •


•


•


1.) Loosen all the 6 fibulaes, and remove the top and sides of shipping containers together. See Figure 2-101.

[email protected]

Figure 2-101 Loosen Fibulaes and Remove Crate


Page 105

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 106


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 2.) Take out the covers. 3.) Remove the two fixed plates with two bolts each.

[email protected]

Figure 2-102 Remove Fixed Plates 4.) Remove the protective covering.

Page 106

Section 8.0 - Standard Wall Stand

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 107


1:28 PM



Figure 2-103 Remove Protective Covering 5.) Raise the wall stand. [email protected]

Be careful of being injured by wall stand because of the heavy weight.

Figure 2-104 Raise Wall Stand


Page 107

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 108


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 6.) Install dolly (5241044).

Rear

Front

Figure 2-105 Dolly 7.) Adjust caster bolts to lower the casters down the wall stand base level. See Figure 2-106. Pull wall stand into the field.

Rear

Figure 2-106 Lower Casters

8.2

Installation 1.) Refer to the room layout in Pre-Installation Manual (5275600-100), and confirm the location of the wall stand with the operator. Move wall stand and its template to the location, adjust caster

Page 108


[email protected]

Front

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 109


1:28 PM



bolts to upper the casters above the wall stand base level, and let wall stand stand on the template. 2.) Demount the casters. 3.) Adjust the four leveling bolts to level the wall stand top frame and front panel in longitudinal level and vertical level.

Figure 2-107 Wall Stand Leveling 4.) Rotate the tube facing to the wall stand front panel. [email protected]

Figure 2-108 Rotate Tube 5.) Open the collimator light, move the tube from SID 1.5 m to 1.8 m, and make sure that the bias between the cross hair projected by the collimator and the cross hair in the wall stand front panel is less than 3 mm in two orthogonal directions. Note:

When the collimator blades are closed to one line, it should be overlapped with the wall stand cross hair. Measure the rectangle’s length and width at 1.5 SID and 1.8 SID to make sure the bias is less than 3 mm.


Page 109

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 110


1:28 PM



Figure 2-109 SID 1.5 m ~ 1.8 m

[email protected]

Figure 2-110 Alignment 6.) If the requirements above cannot be met, adjust wall stand location or the four leveling bolts. 7.) Drill two holes through the two holes on wall stand base, and clean holes of all dust and chips. Note:

Please use  10 drill. 8.) Insert the supplied two M10 anchors and washers, and hammer the anchors into the holes. 9.) Tighten the anchors to fix the wall stand to the floor.

Page 110


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 111


1:28 PM



Figure 2-111 Fix the Wall Stand

8.3

Cassette Tray Unpack and take out the cassette tray, and slide it into the wall stand.

[email protected]

Figure 2-112 Insert Cassette Tray

8.4

Ion Chamber and Grid (Optional) Note:

The fixers installation method is different with different options. For details, please refer to section 4.7 Ion Chamber and Grid (Optional) in table installation.


Page 111

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 112


1:28 PM



8.4.1

Install both Ion Chamber and Grid for standard wall stand 1.) Demount the wall stand front panel.

Figure 2-113 Demount Front Panel 2.) Install ion chamber and grid. Note: Note:

The side of grid marked as "tube side" should be on the tube side. During the installation of grid, be careful not colliding the Ion chamber cable connection. If 40 line grid is ordered, use the wide edge of the fixers. [email protected]

Page 112


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 113


1:28 PM



If 60 line or 78 line grid is ordered, use the wide edge of the fixers to the bottom and narrow edge to the top.

[email protected]


Page 113

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 114


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 3.) Connect and route the wall stand ion chamber cable.

Cable Routing

From JEDI Figure 2-114 Routing Ion Chamber Cables Note:

Ion Chamber direction.

[email protected]

Cable Routing

From back of Wall Stand

Ion Chamber Cable Connection (5167409/5166654) Ion Chamber Grounding Cable (5193110) Figure 2-115 Connect Ion Chamber Cables 4.) Remount the front panel.

Page 114


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 115


1:28 PM



8.4.2

Install the Grid Only for standard wall stand 1.) Demount the wall stand front panel. 2.) Install the grid.

Note:

The side marked as "tube side" should be on the tube side. If 40 line grid is ordered, use the wide edge of the fixers.

Note:

If 60 line or 78 line grid is ordered, use the wide edge of the fixers to the bottom and narrow edge to the top.

3.) Remount the front panel.


Page 115

[email protected]

Note:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 116


1:28 PM



8.4.3

Install both Ion chamber and grid 1.) Demount the wall stand front panel 2.) Demount the cassette holder with the four screws marked with circle as the Fig below shown.

four screws fix the cassette holder

3.) Pull the the cassette holder out carefully and put it standing on ground. 4.) Demount the top cover of the cassette holder.

Figure 2-117 Remove the top cover of cassette holder

Page 116


[email protected]

Figure 2-116 Demount the cassette holder

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 117


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 5.) Loosen the four screws used to fix the ion chamber.

Loosen the four screws used to fix the ion chamber.

Figure 2-118 Loosen the four screws used to fix the ion chamber 6.) Demount the cover at the bottom of the front surface of the cassette holder. 7.) Insert the ion chamber in from the right side of the cassette hold at the orientation as the fig shown below and route the cable according to the path the arrown shown.

[email protected]

Figure 2-119 Insert the ion chamber into the cassette holder and route the ion chamber cable according to the path the arrow shown 8.) Lie down the cassette holder. 9.) Adjust the position of ion chamber to make sure that its center can superpose the center of FOV as these steps:


Page 117

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 118


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 1.) Make the rod perpendicular.

Make the rod perpendicular

Figure 2-120 Make the rod perpendicular 2.) There is a screw hole on the center of the top side and bottom side of the rectangle used to hold grid. Suppose the line across the two hole point was the FOV center and we can use the cover dismounted at step 6 as a ruler to mark the line. Adjust the position of ion chamber to make its center superpose the FOV’s center. [email protected]

the two screw holes can used to mark the FOV’s center line

Figure 2-121 Make the center of ion chamber superpose the FOV’s center 10.) Tighten the four screws loosened at step 5 as Fig 2-115 to fix the ion chamber. 11.) Remount the top cover of the cassette holder. 12.) Remount the cassette holder to wall stand.

Page 118


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 119


1:28 PM



13.) Connect the Ion chamber cable and ground cable as below Fig shown.

Connect the ground cable here

Connect the ion chamber cable here

[email protected]

Figure 2-122 Connect the Ion chamber cable and ground cable 14.) Remount the cover at the bottom of the front surface of the cassette holder. 15.) Remount the wall stand front panel.


Page 119

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 120


1:28 PM



8.5

Counterweight Note:

Load a cassette onto cassette tray before adjust the counterweight. Adjust the counterweight by adding or removing couterweight blocks until the up/down operation force is balanced.

[email protected]

Figure 2-123 Adjust Counterweight

Page 120


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 121


1:28 PM



Section 9.0 Final Cover Installation After system configuration and calibration, ty-rap all the cables, and install the protective covers.

9.1

Install Standard Tube Stand Covers

3 1 2 [email protected]


Page 121

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 122


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 1.) Loosen the screw on the tube arm protective cover.

Figure 2-124 Loosen the Protective Cover 2.) Insert SID ruler through the cover, and install the ruler. [email protected]

Figure 2-125 Install SID Ruler 3.) Install tube stand side covers, and tighten the tube arm protective cover. Note:

Notice the side covers directions. The No1 Cable (5197244) should be routed inside the right side cover.

Page 122

Section 9.0 - Final Cover Installation

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 123


1:28 PM



Figure 2-126 Route Cable Inside Right Side Cover

[email protected]

Figure 2-127 Tighten the Screw 4.) Install tube stand top cover.


Page 123

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 124


1:28 PM



9.2

Install Table Front Cover

Figure 2-128 Install Table Front Cover

9.3

Install Standard Wall Stand Covers

2 Figure 2-129 Wall Stand

Page 124

Section 9.0 - Final Cover Installation

[email protected]

1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 125


1:28 PM



Section 10.0 Labels and Rating Plates Attach English/multilingual labels to overlay the English/Chinese labels attached in factory.

10.1

System Console

Label

Description

References

5194330

System Console Rating Plate

See Figure 2-130

[email protected]

Figure 2-130 5194330, System Console Rating Plate

10.2

Integrated Table

Label

Description

References

5180891

Standard Integrated Table Rating Plate

See Figure 2-131


Page 125

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 126


1:28 PM



Figure 2-131 Integrated Table Rating Plate

10.3

Cabinet

Description

References

5220653

PDU Rating Plate

See Figure 2-132

Figure 2-132 PDU Rating Plate

10.4

Page 126

Wall Stand

Label

Description

References

5183492

Standard Wall Stand Rating Plate

See Figure 2-133

Section 10.0 - Labels and Rating Plates

[email protected]

Label

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 127


1:28 PM



Figure 2-133 5183492, Wall Stand Rating Plate

[email protected]


Page 127

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 128


1:28 PM



Section 11.0 Installation Checklist Purpose:

Installation checklist to confirm that all critical installation steps have been completed. Item # 1.)

Item Power and ground cables connected and tightened: •

Power cables (how many, where)

•

Ground cables (how many, where)

All signal cables connected and tightened.

3.)

Cable shield clamps installed and tightened (how many, where).

4.)

All mounting bolts installed and tightened (floor and wall).

5.)

Mechanical alignments done.

6.)

Control room cables properly dressed.

7.)

All covers installed.

8.)

Room cleaned.

9.)

Product locator cards collected.

10.)

Missing components and/or options:

11.)

List of any installation drawing deviations (all deviations should be signed by customer).

12.)

Packing materials disposed of.

13.)

Dollies and crates returned: Positioner Table / Standard Wall Stand dolly

14.)

Have all calibrations been completed?

15.)

Have the sample images been installed on the system?

16.)

Have purchased options been installed/enabled/configured?

17.)

All appropriate regulatory labels installed: •

X-ray tube focal spot

18.)

HHS testing completed?

19.)

Have functional checks been completed?

20.)

Are all covers installed?

21.)

Have all protective tape/coverings been removed?

Table 2-1 Installation Checklist Section 11.0 - Installation Checklist

[email protected]

2.)

•

Page 128

Sign Off

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 129


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item #

Item

22.)

Are there any cosmetic issues?

23.)

Are there any system issues?

24.)

Are there any functional limitations?

25.)

Has system documentation (paper) been given to the customer?

26.)

Has local physics inspection been completed? (some states/sites may not allow use of system for patients until this is done)

27.)

Has backup of pristine system been performed? (Patient Data Base as well as total system backup)

28.)

Field engineer has completed all checklists: •

Pre-Installation

•

Installation checklist

Sign Off

Table 2-1 Installation Checklist

[email protected]


Page 129

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 130


1:28 PM



Section 12.0 Regulatory Tests and Final Steps 12.1

AEC Tests

12.1.1

AEC Maximum MAS

12.1.1.1

Overview At 50kV or more, exposures shall not exceed 600mAs per exposure.

12.1.1.2

Procedure (50kV) 1.) Select 50 kV, AEC (all three areas selected) and an mA that selects 600mAs. 2.) Position the X-ray tube away from the Ion chamber selected, close collimator blades. 3.) Perform an exposure. 4.) Record the selected mAs and actual mAs. After exposure, mAs will be displayed on the LCD screen. Selected mAs ________________ Measured mAs _______________ 5.) Verify that the AEC exposure is less than 600 mAs.

AEC Minimum Exposure Time

12.1.2.1

Overview At 50 kV or more, minimum exposures must be less than 16 msec.or less than the time to deliver 5 mAs, whichever time is greater.

12.1.2.2

Procedure 1.) Align the tube with the image receptor. Lateral Detent ON. Select 50kV, AEC (area 1 selected). 2.) Set the SID to 100 cm. 3.) Remove all phantoms. 4.) Acquire an AEC exposure. 5.) Record the exposure time: Ion Chamber Area 1 _____________ msec Ion Chamber Area 2 _____________ msec Ion Chamber Area 3 _____________ msec 6.) Verify that the exposure time is less than 16 msec, or less than 5 mAs. 7.) Repeat the above procedure for each detector in the system. Record the exposure time: Ion Chamber Area 1 _____________ msec Ion Chamber Area 2 _____________ msec Ion Chamber Area 3 _____________ msec 8.) Verify that the exposure time is less than 16 msec, or less than 5 mAs.

Page 130

Section 12.0 - Regulatory Tests and Final Steps

[email protected]

12.1.2

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 131


1:28 PM



12.1.3

Reproducibility Of Exposure

12.1.3.1

12.1.3.2

Overview •

For any specific combination of selected technique factors, the estimated coefficient of variation (CV) of radiation exposures shall be no greater than 0.05. HHS rejection limit is 0.045.

•

Test Equipment: Radiation meter with integrate mode, 3.8 cm thickness of Aluminum.

Procedure 1.) Align the tube with the image receptor. Lateral Detent ON. 2.) SID = 100 cm. 3.) For Digital table place 3.8 cm aluminum on the table, center in the collimator light. 4.) Center radiation probe 30 cm above the table top. 5.) Collimate to a field size of 13 cm square. 6.) Select 80 kV, AEC mode and mA such that the exposure will be at least 0.1 second long. 7.) Measure the exposure in mR for each of the 10 exposures. After each exposure, recycle the technique (switch to other values and then return them to the original values). Also vary the time between exposures to record any filament heating variations. Test Results: kV

mA

Time

mR

1

_______

_______

_______

_______

2

_______

_______

_______

_______

3

_______

_______

_______

_______

4

_______

_______

_______

_______

5

_______

_______

_______

_______

6

_______

_______

_______

_______

7

_______

_______

_______

_______

8

_______

_______

_______

_______

9

_______

_______

_______

_______

10

_______

_______

_______

_______

[email protected]

Exposure #

Coefficient of Variation = ______________ (see formula at the end of this section) 8.) Verify that the coefficient of variation is < 0.045 for AEC exposures. 9.) Repeat the above procedure for each detector on system. Test Results Exposure #

kV

mA

Time

mR

1

_______

_______

_______

_______

2

_______

_______

_______

_______

3

_______

_______

_______

_______

4

_______

_______

_______

_______

5

_______

_______

_______

_______

6

_______

_______

_______

_______

7

_______

_______

_______

_______

8

_______

_______

_______

_______


Page 131

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 132


1:28 PM



_______

_______

_______

_______

10

_______

_______

_______

_______

Coefficient of Variation = ______________ (see formula at the end of this section) 10.) Verify that the coefficient of variation is < 0.045 for AEC exposures.

Calculation for Coefficient of Variation (C.V.): Formula:

C.V. = s / X(avg.)

where s = sample standard deviation (n-1)

Sample standard deviation (s) can be calculated on a calculator with statistics functions (such as the TI36Y) as follows:

12.2

*

Clear the stat register, press (CSR).

*

Enter the first reading and then press (+). Repeat this step for all readings.

*

Press (mean) to get X(avg.).

*

Press sample standard deviation key (n-1).

*

Enter the results in the formula above.

Final Installation and Admin Tasks 2.) Install all covers on system equipment. (Refer to above for procedure.) 3.) Remove trash, remove installation equipment and tools, clean up room and store service manuals. 4.) Fill out Product Locator Cards and return them. Part No.

Page 132

Part Name

5183178

Pioneer console assembly

5180891

Standard integrated table assembly

5183392

Standard integrated tube stand assembly

5189248

Manual collimator

5192454

50kW Tube: Toshiba E7843X

2212259-2

Generator (VR Jedi 50 R1T)

5220653

Platform PDU

5213401

78l 10:1 180cm grid

080-1004

60l 10:1 180cm grid

5198785

40l 10:1 180cm grid

5167409-1

Table ion chamber

5167409-2

Wall stand ion chamber


[email protected]

1.) Ready system for normal customer operation.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 133


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Part No. 5176556

Part Name Pioneer system console control board

5.) Record installation time in Service database.

[email protected]


Page 133

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 134


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 134


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 135


1:28 PM



Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration Section 1.0 Configuration & Calibration List

Section

Content

Page

System Configuration

123

2.2

X-ray Tube Seasoning

124

2.3

Service Software User Guide

139

2.4

Tube Configuration

145

2.5

Receptor Programming

146

2.6

Automated AEC Calibration

151

2.7

CR AEC Calibration

158

2.8

Checksum Validation

160

2.9

Backup and Restore Database Parameters

162

[email protected]

2.1

Section 2.0 Configuration & Calibration Contents 2.1

System Configuration During the Application screen, press these two buttons for more than 5sec to switch from Application screen to Configuration screen. If system is at configuration screen, press these two buttons to switch from Configuration screen to Application screen. At the configuration screen, operator can configure the Type of Generator, System Power, Table AEC, Wall Stand, Wall Stand AEC. 1.) Configure the Generator Press the Patient View button

to configure that the generator is Jedi or Djinn.

2.) Configure the System Power Press Receptor button

to configure the system power is 50kW.

3.) Configure Table AEC

Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 135

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 136


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Press the Patient Size button

to configure that system is with Table AEC or not.

4.) Configure Wallstand Press the Focus Spot button

to configure if there is Wall-stand.

5.) Configure the Wall-stand AEC Press the Previous Exp Recall button

to configure if there is Wall-stand AEC.

6.) Configure Dose Display Press this button

2.2

to configure if console will display the Dose or not.

X-Ray Tube Seasoning

NO EXPOSURES SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT TUBE CURRENT AT A TUBE VOLTAGE OF MORE THAN 50KV.

2.2.1

Requirements 1.) Use the larger focal spot of the tube, and the seasoning will be done with the circuit specified in technical data. 2.) The operating tube voltage and current should be monitored all exposures during this seasoning operation. 3.) The anode rotation should be utilized at normal speed (3000 or 3600 min-1). 4.) Do not exceed either the generator or the tube ratings. ALL RADIATION SAFETY RULES MUST BE OBSERVED. IN ORDER TO PROTECT HUMANBODY FROM HARMFUL X-RAY, CLOSE THE COLLIMATOR OR BLOCK THE TUBE ASSEMBLY RADIATION PORT WITH AT LEAST A SIX (6) MM THICK PIECE OF LEAD. NO PATIENT OR PERSONNEL IS ALLOWED IN THE ROOM.

2.2.2

Procedure Effecting exposure at near peak potential and current without prior tube warm up will damage the tube. To maximize tube life, perform the following tube seasoning procedure. 1.) Provide continuous input of small tube current (Approx.1 mA) and increase the tube voltage stepwise according to the time of the Seasoning Schedule at installation (See Figure 3-1).

Page 136

Section 2.0 Configuration & Calibration Contents

[email protected]

When warming up the tube, always take the precautionary measures to protect personnel from Xray radiation. When a new x-ray tube is put into operation for the first time or when it has not been in operation for more than one month, the seasoning procedures Seasoning Schedule at installation (See Figure 3-1) shall be carried out to assure subsequent trouble-free operation. This procedure establishes the proper relation to its new environment with the equipment in used. The action establishes a favorable distribution of the electrical charges and Electrostatic stresses in the insulation system of the tube and the associated equipment.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 137


1:28 PM



For any X-ray equipment without the fluoroscopy circuit, perform seasoning of short-time input from 50 kV. 2.) Use the larger focus, rotate the anode, set the tube current to 50% of the maximum permissible tube current at maximum tube voltage, apply short-time input once a minute with exposure time of 0.1s, and increase the tube voltage stepwise. When unstable, states of the tube current are observed in the course of increasing tube voltage, reduce the tube voltage to the extent that no variation occurs, and then increase it more slowly than previously. 3.) Stain like impact traces might appear on the X-ray tube target surface by the slight discharge in the course of the seasoning. The phenomena are one process to recover the withstanding voltage performance at that time, Even if unstable states appear in the course of the seasoning, the stable operation is obtained at the maximum tube voltage of succeeding seasoning, the tube unit can be used without any interference to its electrical performance. (The maximum tube testing voltage must be strictly limited to the maximum rated tube voltage of the tube unit.) 4.) When the X-ray tube unit is used after a dormant period of a week or more, use the tube unit after performing the Seasoning Schedule at Starting (See Figure 3-1). 5.) Every day morning, when you start to use X-ray tube, you are requested to warm-up the tube to your necessary high voltage condition for stabilized equipment operation. a.) At least 80kV (Step 1) is requested for all operation. b.) Need voltage up to your necessary daily voltage (Step 2 or higher step). If discharge happened, re-warm up again under the previous condition.

Steps (condition)

Voltage [kV]

Current [mA]

Focus

Expose Time [sec.]

Cooling Time after Exposure [sec.]

Number of cycle

1

80

160

Large

0.05

20

1

2

100

160

Large

0.05

20

1

3

110

160

Large

0.05

20

1

4

120

160

Large

0.05

20

1

5

over 120 kV (Note 1)

160

Large

0.05

20

1

Note 1: If you use over 120 kV, up voltage by 5 kV to your necessary voltage. 6.) After these seasoning operations are completed, the X-ray tube unit can be used in the usual way.


Page 137

[email protected]

c.)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 138


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Figure 3-1 Seasoning Schedule

Page 138


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 139


1:28 PM



2.3 2.3.1

Please press

and

together to get into HUB Mode.

Service Software User Guide Supplies None.

2.3.2

Tools • • •

2.3.3

JEDI service software (the software is a DOS application) Console R232 cable (5194292) Computer with floppy or CD drive

Safety Precautions Not applicable.

2.3.4

Prerequisites Basic knowledge of PC based computer laptop, DOS and usage of Microsoft WINDOWS.

Personnel

[email protected]

2.3.5

1 person.

2.3.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.3.7

Procedure

2.3.7.1

Loading service software on service laptop The Service software is a DOS application. It can operate under DOS or Windows; but for software download or database backup, it is required to run ASIAN.exe under DOS to avoid communication problem (with the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE; see Chapter 9 - - Service Tool Job Cards - Section 1.0 Software Download / Upgrade). To load the software on to the hard drive: • Power ON Service laptop. Under Windows, run the File Manager (Explorer)) • Create a new directory (e.g.: JEDISVC) under C:\ • Insert the "Service Software" CD delivered with the equipment in the Service Tool set into the CD drive. • Copy all the files from the CD to your hard drive. (Double click on A:\, drag and drop on C:\ JEDISVC or whatever name of your directory.) • Double click the file JEDP424B expanding the software to your hard drive. The service software is installed and ready for use.

2.3.7.2

Using service software Connect Service terminal as follows: • Use the 9 pin Service cable, Part No 2207478, to connect serial line of Service terminal to system console. Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 139

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 140


1:28 PM



• Switch on the Service terminal. • To run the program: Under Windows: Exit Windows. Restart computer in MS-DOS mode. Select Disk Drive from where you want to run the program: C: [enter] Change to the new directory Type: "ASIAN" [enter] to run the program The following screen appears:

Power ON the generator. Press function key F1. The following screen appears:

Page 140


[email protected]

• •

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 141


1:28 PM



The software will load the help screen information contained in Asiane .msg file. •

Wait or press space bar to jump to screen. The Application screen will appear: "English text Version 1.2" is displayed 5 sec., then display shows the last used parameters.

2.3.7.3

If the serial line to the generator is not operating (e.g.: cable not correctly connected, I/F or kV Control board down, Generator not ready or powered OFF), further screens will not be displayed and no function keys will operate. Correct this problem before continuing.

Typical screen description 1 2 3

4

1 : Area for Parameters, Error codes. Controlled by JEDI Software. Display of exposure parameters setup in Application mode, depending on technique selection: kV, mAs, mA, Exposure time. (max. number of exposure in sequence, not used on Rad product.) Specific display in Maintenance Mode (Alt S or Alt D). Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 141

[email protected]

Note:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 142


1:28 PM



2 : Status area. Displayed by Service Software, Enlighten or blinking key controlled by JEDI Software. Display of function keys usable with menu displayed. Commands are remembered in help area: Right arrow: Increase kV

Left arrow: Reduce kV

F1: Set 2 points mode F2: Set 3 points mode F3: Increase mA or mAs (3 points or 2 points)

F4: Decrease mA or mAs (3 points or 2 points)

F5: Increase Exposure Time

F6: Decrease Exposure Time

F9: Darkness correction + (w/t AEC Cell)

F0 (F10): Darkness correction - (w/t AEC Cell)

Lit when thermal limit is reached

Lit when ready for exposure

Error or impossible selection Lit during exposure Lit during exposure

3 : Select Technique, Screen film pairs, AEC cell, ...

1...4: Select workstation, whenever programmed in service menu TECH. 0: select Large focus

9: select Small focus

A, B, C: Select screen film pair (Whenever programmed) A: Slow speed

B: Medium speed

C: High speed

D, E, F: Select cell in AEC (Whenever programmed) D: Left cell

E: Central cell

F: Right cell

R: to Reset whenever error occurs

U: Toggle fast or normal kV change.

Z: to display in area (1) the measured exposure parameters when "DISP" in menu 5 is set ON. APR valid: enlighten when the display in area (1) is valid for recording in Customized protocols. (Not used in RAD) 4 : Area for Static Help, related to screen in Service Mode. Displayed by Service Software.

Page 142


[email protected]

Keys always displayed, but will be active depending on configuration and technique selection. Includes help command.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 143


1:28 PM



SELECTING MAINTENANCE AND APPLICATION MODE; MAJOR KEYS FROM

PROCEDURE

TO

APPLICATION MODE

Type - (Together)

SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODEMENU 3

APPLICATION MODE

Type - (Together)

SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODELAST MENU OR SUB-MENU selected.

SETUP/MAINTENANCE MODE

From any menu, type (several times if necessary) or

APPLICATION MODE

[Q]

Return to application mode

[R]

Return to a higher level menu

[W]

Validate

[ALT] & [S] (Together)

Calibration mode (Menu 3)

[ALT] & [D]

Calibration mode (Last menu called)

[

] and [

]

In maintenance mode, to move through menus

[F1] to [F0]

Function keys with action based on context.

Other keys

Based on context. Main function recalled in the screen and also in sections wherever used.

•

Type [ALT] & [S] (Together) to go to Maintenance Menus (MENU 3)

•

Type [

•

Figure 3-2 shows the relationship between the Maintenance Mode menus and the function keys used to access those menus. To return to a higher level, key in [R]

•

] and [

] keys to select a menu.

The darkened menus are used for Generator and room setup (Configuration and Calibration): menu 3, 4, 5. Menu 3 is used to Configure the system Menu 4 is used to calibrate AEC mode (Automatic Exposure Control) Menu 5 is used to perform Checksum Menu 1 is used to perform generator test and diagnostics. Menu 2 is used to enter Date and Time, view/clear error log, and view/clear tube and generator recorded tracking Data.


Page 143

[email protected]

SERVICE MENU TREE BREAKDOWN

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 144


1:28 PM



MENU 1

[F1]

[F3]

HEAT

[F5] HIGH

ANOD

AUTO, 3,4,5

[F3]

GATE CD Tst

ShC INV Tst

[F5]

LIST

MENU 3

AEC

AUTO, 3k, 9k NoLD

MENU 2

[F7]

[F7]

NEXP

DATE

[F1]

[F5]

TECH

MODE

[F7]

[F5] AEC

[F1]

MENU 5

[F3] KG

KVEF

CAL

[F5] KTIME

[F1]

CKS

KF

[F7]

RAMS

[F1]

[F9]

Vx Px.x

DSPL

[F3] MCL

Figure 3-2 Service Menu Tree Breakdown SUB-MENU SUMMARY DESCRIPTION 1.) Configuration - MENU3 TECH: programming workstation, technique parameters. MODE: Select Renard or Normal scale for kV selection. Calibration - MENU4 AEC: To set parameters if known, or modify them manually. CAL: To calibrate Automatic Exposure Control, for each AEC chamber and Screen-film combination. Page 144


[email protected]

MENU 4

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 145


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 (See 2.6 - Automatic AEC Calibration) 2.) Ram - MENU5 RAMS: NVRAm operation & display: Note:

CKSM: To update Checksum after configuration, calibration, parameter change. (See 2.8 - Checksum Validation) MCLR: Clear NVRam memory. Normally not to be used, unless specifically instructed. Do not use if Data Base backup has not been performed previously. Vx Px.x: Display generator software version (e.g. P3.3)

DSPL: In Maintenance Mode, to display parameter after exposure using key [Z] 3.) Utilities - MENU2 LIST: To display last recorded error codes (up to 64) -

Last error is viewed with Date and Time Function keys allow to scroll down and up [Z] to get back to the last recorded error Same consecutive error are counted Up in the same line [^H ], and [W] to clear error log

NEXP: To view/clear tube and generator recorded tracking Data. Clear must be performed only when replacing X-Ray tube. Meaning of each parameter is found in Chapter 9 - - Service Tool Job Cards - Section 2.0 - Tube Replacement Software Procedure. DATE: To enter / modify the date and time. 4.) Diagnostics - MENU1 -

Auto: run fixed current on both filament (if 2 filaments) in sequence on selected tube (If more than 1). L or S: run 3, 4, or 5 Amps on Large or Small Focus.

ANOD: To exercise Rotor function. -

Auto: run rotation cycle in Low Speed then High Speed (If allowed by configuration) on selected tube. (If more than 1) 3k: run one cycle acceleration, hold, break in Low Speed on selected tube (If more than 1) 9k: run one cycle acceleration, hold, break in High Speed (If allowed by configuration) on selected tube (If more than 1)

HIGH: To exercise High Voltage function. Note: Note:

NoLD: To troubleshoot HV problem, without mA nor rotation with or without X-Ray tube. Test is run from 80 to max. kV, adjustable from 1 to 60 sec. Gate CD Test: to verify operation of the gate command board on the Inverter. Test is run during 10 sec. At 0 kV. Requires manual set up. Read related information in diagnostics section. ShC INV Tst: To verify operation of inverter with inverter in short circuit. Test is run during 100 msec. At 0 kV. Requires manual set up. Read related information in diagnostics section.

AEC: To verify operation of AEC board. Refer to diagnostics section.

2.4 2.4.1

Tube Configuration Supplies None.


Page 145

[email protected]

HEAT: To exercise Heater/filament function.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 146


1:28 PM


2.4.2

Tools • • •

2.4.3




2.4.4

Prerequisites The service terminal must be configured and software installed (refer to 2.3 - Service Software User Guide).

2.4.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.4.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.4.7

Procedure Load software according to tube present in the installation A database is available on the JEDI Service Software supplied in Service Tools: • for 50 kW tube: Type E7843X File = E7843_R?.mx (? means the current revision) Load the file corresponding to the tube present in the installation from Service Terminal. Refer to 2.9 - Backup and Restore Database Parameters.

2.4.7.2

Verify According to the tube used in the installation, verify if 50 kW database loaded for tube E7843X • The maximum mA displayed on the console must be 630 mA for 80 kV. The word "Workstation" is incorrectly used and displayed in the JEDI software screens. "Workstation" actually refers to the word "Receptor".

2.5 2.5.1

Receptor Programming Supplies None.

2.5.2

Tools • • •

2.5.3


Safety Precautions The JEDI is factory preprogrammed. Therefore, even if the data appears to correspond to the preprogramming, it must be confirmed. For example, AEC enable, wall bucky enable must be confirmed.

Page 146


[email protected]

2.4.7.1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 147


1:28 PM



2.5.4

Prerequisites Service terminal must be configured and software installed. Refer to 2.3 - Service Software User Guide.

2.5.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.5.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.5.7

Procedure

2.5.7.1

Introduction Receptor programming uses function keys indicated on screen for the following : • receptor select, • tube select, • define nominal number of exposures for 2-point mode operation, • AEC : types of chamber and number of pickup fields in each, • Screen-film combination select, (if only one Select A).

Calling the subroutine

[email protected]

2.5.7.2

Call TECH (setup mode, menu 3, function key [F1]).

MENU3 TECH ->

MODE F5

F1

<-

R : Return

Q : Exit

************** TECH : MODE :

MENU3

**************

Select Workstation Renard

Figure 3-3 Setup Mode, Menu 3

2.5.7.3 Note:

Parameter selection Any new parameters created must be stored in the installation report (same as Illustration 3). 1.) Receptor Selection OFF

No selection Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 147

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 148


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 SPE *

Anatomic (for RF room)

DIR*

Anatomic (for RAD room)

POMU

Wall-mounted Bucky (i.e. SG50 or SG70)

SETE

Spot-film device technique on remote-controlled table (i.e. Prestilix 1600)

TOPO

Tomography Bucky

TOSE

Tomography spot-film device technique

POTA

Table-mounted Bucky

PULM

Pulmorapid

CHAN

Film changer

TOCO

Special tomographic applications

SECO

Spot-film device technique on conventional table

NUME

Digital mode

TONU

Digital tomography

Use the [

] and [

] keys to select.

* For RAD TECH 1 = DIR TECH 2 = POTA (TABLE BUCKY with moving grid) or DIR (if fixed grid). TECH 3 = POMU (with moving grid) or DIR (if fixed grid) or OFF (if no Wall Bucky). Tube

Tomo tech & time

Nominal number of exposures In 2-point mode

Type of AEC

Figure 3-4 Receptor Menu 2.) Tube Selection T1 Tube 1 only 3.) Select the number of nominal exposures for 2-point mode operation. Page 148


[email protected]

Receptor

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 149


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Suggested values are given below: DIR N = 2

POTA N = 2

POMU N = 2 Use function keys [F5] and [F6] to select. 4.) Selection of Exposure Chamber IN1

Ionization chamber 1 (for Table Bucky Receptor POTA).

IN2

Ionization chamber 2 (for Wall Bucky Receptor on - POMU).

Select AEC in or out using function keys [F7] et [F8]. Each chamber corresponds to a specific technique, i.e. POMU and POTA. 5.) Control Console Function Key assignment Function keys are assigned using the alphanumeric keyboard ([1] corresponds to function key 1, etc., up to 8). Use the shift key for numbers 0 to 9. With the RAD Console only four techniques are available. The technique selected is shown in reverse video in zone 3. 6.) Selection of screen-film combination used Keys [A], [B] and [C] are used to select the first, second and third screen-film combinations, respectively. The combination selected is displayed in reverse video in zone 2. Press the key again to cancel a selection. One combination is always selected. Select Key A for the RAD used screen film combination. The number of pickup fields of the exposure chamber selected for AEC Mode with ionizing chamber or II must be keyed in: [D] middle pick-up field (one), [F] three pick-up fields. The number of pick-up fields is displayed in reverse video in zone 3. 8.) Validation Use [W] to validate all values for a given function appearing on the screen.

2.5.7.4

Renard or normal scale for kv selection 1.) 2.) 3.) 4.)

2.5.7.5

Go to Service Mode, and call Menu 3 using the arrows on the keyboard. Call MODE by pressing F5. Select NORMAL or RENARD Scale by pressing F5. Hit W to confirm.

Date & Time To enter the Date and Time: 1.) Go to Service Mode, and call Menu 2 using the arrows on the keyboard. 2.) Call DATE by pressing F7. 3.) Enter date (MM DD YYYY) via numeric keypad. 4.) Hit W to confirm. 5.) Hit F1. 6.) Enter time (HH MM) via numeric keypad. 7.) Hit W to confirm. When replacing the battery in the CPU Board, clear the year-counter display on the righthand side via F7 and F9 to confirm. Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 149

[email protected]

7.) Selection of Number of Pickup Fields

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 150


1:28 PM



Anytime programming is modified, checksum must be validated (refer to 2.8 - Checksum Validation).

RECEPTOR SELECT 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

RECEPTOR

DIR

POTA

POMU

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

TUBE

T1

T1

T1

NUMBER OFEXPOSURES IN 2-POINT MODE

2

2

2

TOMOGRAPHIC UNIT USED: Y1 T1 Y2 T2 Y3 T3 Y4 T4 Y5 T5

N

N

N

TYPE CHAMBER

OUT

IN1

IN2

No

No

No

A

A

3

3

OF

[email protected]

FUNCTION

mA PLATEAUTIME FOR1-POINT MODE EXTERNAL RECEPTORCO MMAND* SCREEN-FILM COMBINATION S 1 2 3 NUMBER OFPICKUPFIELDS

-

MODE

RENARD OR NORMAL kV SELECTION

Number of cells usedin AEC

Table 3-1 Receptor Parameters (Example for RAD with Wall Bucky and two ionisation chambers)

Page 150


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 151


1:28 PM



2.6

Automatic AEC Calibration

2.6.1

Supplies None.

2.6.2

Tools • • •

Sensitometer Densitometer Set of five plexiglass plates (5 cm x 25 cm x 25 cm) For 5 cm, it is 2 inches OR

• • • •

2.6.3

A plastic bucket with a minimum height of 25 cm (for water) JEDI service software (the software is a DOS application) Console R232 cable (5194292) Computer with floppy or CD drive

Safety precautions Standard precautions for work with ionizing radiation.

2.6.4

Personnel

2.6.5

[email protected]

1 person.

Time 1 hour.

2.6.6

Prerequisites • • • •

2.6.7

Working knowledge of service terminal and installed software, Service terminal must be configured and software installed, Workstation configuration done, AEC option must be installed.

PROCEDURE

2.6.7.1

Development equipment CHECK DEVELOPMENT EQUIPMENT • •

Note:

Check that the automatic processor is available Check that solution concentrations and temperatures comply with the manufacturer's specifications. • Plot a sensitometrics curve to determine the gamma value of the film and to assess solution quality. • All the gray scale levels should be visible, and the base fog should not exceed 0.2 for the development equipment to be correct. This procedure normally requires a sensitometer. If this is not available, proceed as follows: • Run 2 exposures, using the same screen-film combination but with different mAs settings, mAs(f1) and mAs(f2). • Develop and measure the density d of each, d(f1) and d(f2). (Measured optical densities must be between 1.0 and 2.0) Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 151

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 152


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 •

Use the formula below to determine gamma: Gamma = ( d(f2) - d(f1) ) / log10 (mAs(f2)/mAs (f1))

•

2.6.7.2

If gamma is not between 2 and 3 change or renew the solution

Preliminary Remarks 1.)

All calibrations must be performed with a source to image receptor distance between 0.8m and 1.2m. 2.) Center the phantom over the middle pickup tube field. 3.) A calibration procedure has to be performed for each combination of ionization chamber and screen-film. 4.) If the same screen-film combinations are used for several ionization chambers (e.g. positionner and bucky), adjust the positionner chamber first, and adust KG only for the other chambers. For known screen-film combination or ionization chamber, KVEF, KT and KG could be entered with MENU4 AEC (F5 key). Refer to 2.3 - Service Software User Guide.

2.6.7.3

Principle The automation of this calibration is to use the optical density entered after one exposure or four exposures to predict and propose the parameter for the next exposures. This leads to a reduction in the number of exposures to run to find mAs, kV and reference AEC for a given optical density.

[email protected]

INIT KVEF acquisition screen

Select ionization chamber Select screen-film combination

Run kvef calibration Select screen-film combination If needed run Ktime calibration

Run kvef calibration If needed run Ktime calibration

If needed run Format calibration

other screen-film ? (2more possible) No Other ionization chamber ? (3 more possible)

other screen-film ?

Yes

Yes

No Yes Select ionization chamber

No Run grid calibration

Other ionization chamber ?

Yes

No END

Page 152


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 153


1:28 PM



Note:

2.6.7.4

If an error occurs during exposure, reset by pressing key Z - redo the exposure. • To redo an exposure after entering the optical density, enter "o" for optical density and redo the exposure. • To clear optical density, press and hold down the CTRL key, press the H key and enter the new optical density. You should back-up the database after all calibration have been done. Refer to 2.9 - Backup and Restore Database Parameters.

KVEF Adjustment INITIALIZATION KVEF is the main compensation coefficient for film darkening : its value varies significantly with kV The MENU4 F7 key of the laptop service enters the calibration menu.

AEC1 1 0,00V L 80kV 10m As 15cm

OD= 0,00

O ptical Ionization Exposure AEC Focus Kilovolt m As Plexi or Density Cham ber Num ber Reference W ater Thickness

KVEF PARAMETER ACQUISITION Refer to the flow diagrams in Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7. Press Key F7 in Menu 4 Choose screen film to be calibrated with Key A, B or C Key A, B or C flickers

Operator : Enter a targeted optical density (generally 1), with key T and validate with W key

A Figure 3-5 KVEF Parameter Acquisition Flow Diagram


Page 153

[email protected]

In this step, the available keys have the following function : • <- or -> keys to select the ionization chamber to be calibrated • F1/F2 keys to select the exposure number • F3/F4 keys to select the focus (generally Large Focus) • F5/F6 keys to select the kV • F7/F8 keys to select the mAs in Renard scale • F9/F10 keys to select plexi or water thickness • 0 to 9 keys to enter the optical density (target or measured) • A, B or C key to select screen film type(slow, medium, fast) (if only one screen-film, select A key) T key to select and modify target density The first proposed exposure is 80kV, 10mAs, 15cm of plexi or water thickness. Exposure time is calculated to be closest as possible from 100ms, according to the thermal status. The selected screen/film key flicker.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 154


1:28 PM



A Software : first kV step 80kV or next kV step (selected by Key F5-F6 (steps are 80kV, 100kV, max kV, 40kV and 60kV) Operator : Start a serie of exposures for this kV step Keys a & B are flickering Software : thickness proposal for the serie Operator : Insert plexi thickness in the XRAY beam

Software : mAs proposal (Operator : Can modify mAs according to the sensitivity/mAs chart) Operator : Insert casset (24x30) in spot film

Operator : Perform exposure Operator : After having performed the exposure, process the film and measure the resultant optical density [email protected]

Operator : Enter the resultant optical density for each exposure and validate with W key

Software :Try to calculate mAs0 for targeted optical density. When found, with previous exposure recorded, V key flickers and screen film keylights ON NO

Is V flickering ?

YES Operator : Valid the kV step with V key when flickered

Operator : Display final values kvref, kV, mAS, thickness, target optical density NO

Screen key light on?

YES

B

Figure 3-6 KVEF Parameter Acquisition Flow Diagram (Continued)

Page 154


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 155


1:28 PM



B End of kvef calibration. If first screen-film calibration , select, if needed, time

See descriptions of time and grid calibrations below

next screen-film calibration

Figure 3-7 KVEF Parameter Acquisition Flow Diagram (Continued)

Note:

2.) When the optical densities have been entered, the software calculate the parameters for the next exposure regarding the result of the previous ones (AEC signal from ionization chamber and optical density). 3.) The operator should run the next exposure proposed by the software, develop the film and measure the optical density. The operator then selects the exposure number with F1/F2 keys and enters the associated read optical density with the keypad, and validates it with the W key. The software records the AEC signal from the ionization chamber. At each optical density entered, the software evaluates if those values permit it to find the mAs0, which provides the target density for this screen-film combination and the kV. When the mAs0 is found, the software calculates the KVEF associated, then the V key starts to flicker to ask the operator to validate the calibration by pressing the V keystroke. 4.) Select another kV and repeat the previous operation for all kV steps Don't forget to change the phantom thickness when changing kV settings! When all kV values are calibrated, the software extend the result and calculates the equivalent mAs (for an optical density equal to the target value) to the kV,mA plan. At the end of the first screen-film KVEF calibration , the operator selects the KT time calibration with the V key after the V key has been illuminated. K TIME PARAMETER ACQUISITION (EXPOSURE TIME CORRECTION)

AEC1 1 0,00V L 80kV 10mAs 15cm OD= 0,00 Ionization Exposure AEC Focus Kilovolt mAs Plexi or Water Optical Chamber Number Reference Thickness Density

In this step, the available keys have the following function : • F1/F2 keys to select the exposure number • 0 to 9 keys to enter the optical density (target or measured) The operator could by-pass this calibration in depressing V key again. The software uses the KVEF calibration to find the thickness for the first KTIME exposures : if the mAs for 80kV, 15cm of plexi or water thickness are lower than 32mAs, the software calculates the necessary plexi or water thickness to obtain more than 32 mAs. The calculated plexi or water thickness is displayed.


Page 155

[email protected]

Note:

1.) Press T key and input Destination Density, then validates it with W key. Pressing T key deselect Destination Density. Run the first exposures proposed by the software, develop the films and measure the optical density. For each exposure, the software records the AEC signal from the ionization chamber. The operator then selects the exposure number with F1/F2 keys, enters the associated read optical density with key pad, and validates it with W key. There is no Beep during the exposure! The laptop Icon will light during X-ray.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 156


1:28 PM



1.) Set the plexi or water thickness indicated on the Service Terminal display 2.) Run the proposed exposures (0.5s) develop the film and measure the optical density for each image. The operator then selects the exposure number with F1/F2/ keys, and enters the associated read optical density with key pad, and validates it with W key. Repeat the operation for the other proposed exposures (1s, 2s, 3.2s) 3.) If the mAs for 80kV, 15cm of plexi or water thickness is greater than 2.5mAs, the software calculates the necessary plexi or water thickness to obtain less than 2.5 mAs. The calculated plexi or water thickness is displayed.. 4.) Set the the plexi or water thickness indicated on the Service Terminal display 5.) Run the proposed exposure (10ms), develop the film, measure the optical density, enter and validate the value with W key. The software calculate Ktime parameters. 6.) The operator validates the Ktime calibration with V key. For the first screen-film calibration, the software then proposes the KF calibration. By_pass it with V key again. KG PARAMETER ACQUISITION (GRID CORRECTION) This KG procedure has to be followed if the same film/screen combination is used on the second ionisation chamber. If no second ionization chamber is present, press key R (end of calibration). For a multiple ionization chamber, the operator runs the previous calibration (KVEF, KTIME for each film screen combination for one ionization chamber) and runs the KG calibration for the other ionization.

0.00V L 80kV xx mAs 15cm OD = 0,00

Ionization AEC Focus Kilovolt Chamber Reference

mAs Plexi or Water Optical density Thickness

In this step, the available keys have the following function : • 0 to 9 keys to enter the optical density. STEP 1 • Select the ionization chamber with the arrow keys (AEC2). • Set the SID at the same distance used for KVEF on AEC1. If not possible, go to STEP 3. STEP 2 • Run the proposed exposure, develop the film, measure the optical density and enter the value with keys 0 to 9. • Repeat the same operations for the next proposed exposures until the V key flickers. • When the V key flickers, press the V key (end of calibration). • Press the R key. STEP 3 • Hit key R and return to Application Mode. • Put 15 cm plexiglass in front of Wall Stand (AEC2) • Set 2 Point Mode • Set KV to 80 • For mAs : Calculate the mAs according to : mAs = mAs0 * (SID)2 mAs0 => mAs at 80 kV for AEC1 found during Autocalibration Page 156


[email protected]

AEC2

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 157


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 SID = new SID Example:

mAs0 = 5mAs SID = 1.4 mAs = 5 * (!.4)2 = 10 mAs Set mAs to 16 for backup. • Run exposure in AEC • Develop the film and measure the density • If the density is not equal to 1, go to MENU 4 AEC (F5) • Select KG (Key F3) • Select Grille 2 (Key F5/F6) • Enter a KG parameter : If density is greater than 1, decrease KG value If density is smaller than 1, increase KG value • Redo the same exposure and correct KG if density is not equal to 1. CHECKSUM VALIDATION The checksum must be validated at the end of the calibration. See 2.8 - Checksum Validation. AEC REPETITION TEST Make a series of 10 exposures in 2-point AEC (exposure time : aproximatively 10ms) and check mAs accuracy (+/-10%) for each exposure. [email protected]

SET KVEF, KT, KG Call the AEC menu (setup mode, menu4, function key [F5]).

AEC

KVEF KG KTIME

KF

SET KVEF •

Use the function key F1 to select sub-routine KVEF.

AECV 40KV 1 KV step

• • • • •

a.bc

screen-film combination 1,2 or 3

KVEF

Select screen-film combination with A, B or C keys. Select kV step 40, 60, 80, 100, or kVmax with F3/F4 keys. Set KVEF to known value with key pad. Validate each new setting with W key. Press the R key when settings have been completed.

SET KT •

Use function key F5 to select sub-routine KG.


Page 157

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 158


1:28 PM



AEC T N = 0 T = 0.5 1 a.bc Time step #

•

• • • • •

Time

screen-film combination 1,2 or 3

KTIME

Use the following keys to select the screen-film combination : A for combination 1, B for combination 2, C for combination3. The screen-film combination selected is displayed in reverse video. Select time step number with F1/F2 keys. (N = 0 T = 10ms, N = 1 T = 100ms, N = 2 T = 500, N = 3 T = 1s, N = 4 T = 2s, N = 5 T = 3.2s). If necessary, select time with F3/F4 keys. Set KTIME to the known value with F9/F10 keys. Validate each new setting with the W key. Press the R key when the settings have been completed.

SET KG •

Use the function key F3 to select sub-routine KG.

AEC G GRILLE 1 KG = a.b

• • •

KG 0.8 to 2

Use the function keys F5/F6 to scroll grid (grid number corresponds to the ionization chamber number). Set KG to the known value using F9/F10 keys Validate each new setting with the W key Press the R key when settings have been completed.

CHECKSUM VALIDATION The checksum must be validated after settings have been completed; refer to 2.8 - Checksum Validation.

2.7 2.7.1

CR AEC Calibration Systems with CR Filming Only Usually, a CR system does not require any compensation, so you can set all the values to 1.

2.7.1.1

Program Generator with Default CR Parameters 1.) Enter Generator service mode. Select MENU 4, AEC. 2.) Select the proper film - screen to calibrate.

Example: A: SCR1

B: SCR2

C: SCR3

3.) Program the generator with the following default values for KVEF, KG, KTIME, and KF.

Page 158


[email protected]

grid no (from 1 to 4)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 159


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Menu 4

F1 KVEF

Default KVEF Values

40 kV

60 kV

80 kV

100 kV

125 kV

Max kV

(how the film responds to kV)

1

1

1

1

1

1

Menu 4

F5 AEC

F3 KG

Default KG Values

Grille 1

Grille 2

Grille 3

Grille 4

(overall density adjustments)

1

1

1

1

(table)

(chestand)

Menu 4

F5 AEC

F5 KTIME

Default KVEF Values

N0

N1

N2

N3

N4

N5

(how the film respoonds to Time)

10

100

500

1000

2000

3200

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

1.00

F5 AEC

F9 KF

Default KVEF Values

0

1

2

3 thru 16

(collimator size compensation)

1

1

1

1

4.) 5.) 6.) 7.)

[email protected]

Menu 4

2.7.1.2

F5 AEC

Go to MENU 5, select F7 and turn display ON using F1. Go to MENU 5 and run CHECKSUM. Exit service mode into applications by pressing "R" on the laptop several times. Perform the "CR Dose Adjustment" procedure below.

CR Dose Adjustment Refer to the specific CR service manuals for specific details. 1.) Set up the system to measure dose to the CR cassette. 2.) Make an exposure and record the dose. 3.) Adjust the KG parameter to get the desired dose (the desired dose may need determined by Operators or CR supplier).

2.7.2

System with Film and CR Filming Combined If the system will be used with both Film and CR at the same time, then please keep the AEC calibration data for Film. If the dose for CR is not proper, the "+" and "-" button on the console can be used to increase or decrease the dose.


Page 159

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 160


1:28 PM



2.7.3

Final Adjustment

2.7.3.1

Disable Unused Film-Screen Program the generator to disable all unused film-screen combinations. Menu 3 F1 TECH

Example:

If you calibrated SCREEN 2 only, disable SCREEN 1 and SCREEN 3. If you calibrated Film and CR, disable the unused screen.

2.7.3.2

Perform Checksum Refer to 2.8 - Checksum Validation: Menu 5 F1 RAMS

2.7.3.3

F1 and V at the same time

Save Memory Back up the generator database. First service screen F6 Save Memory The file can be named, but it must be in the DOS format. Default name:

SV_VAR.MX

Acceptable name:

xxxxxxxx.MX (8 characters max.MX)

Save the file on the laptop hard drive. Copy the file to the site floppy.

2.8.1

Checksum Validation Supplies None.

2.8.2

Tools • • •

2.8.3



2.8.4

Prerequisites Service terminal must be configured and software installed (refer to 2.3 - Service Software User Guide.

2.8.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.8.6

Time 5 minutes.

Page 160


[email protected]

2.8

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 161


1:28 PM



2.8.7

PROCEDURE

2.8.7.1

Note: Note:

2.8.7.2

Preliminary Remarks Checksums must be validated at end of generator setup or whenever a parameter is changed. In the checksum validation process, the processor computes a number which is a function of all the setup parameters. When the generator is powered up, this number is computed, i.e. the sum is "checked". If the two numbers differ, the generator displays an error code, indicating that one or more parameters have been changed since the last time the sums were checked, or that a RAM-related fault has occurred. X-ray generation is inhibited if there is a checksum error. The display Va.b on menu 5 is for the software version in the CPU board EPROMS.

Checksum Validation Call RAMS (setup mode, menu 5, function key [F1].

[email protected]

Resulting display:

RAMS

CKSM

MCLR

Enter function key [F1] and [V] simultaneously. A buzzer will sound, indicating that the sums have been checked and OK on display screen. MCLR is used to erase all setup parameters. Function key [F3] corresponding to this function should not be used.


Page 161

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 162


1:28 PM


2.9 2.9.1


Backup and Restore Database Parameters Supplies None.

2.9.2

Tools • • •

2.9.3



2.9.4

Prerequisites 1.) The service terminal must be configured and the software installed (refer to 2.3 - Service Software User Guide). 2.) All calibrations must have been completed.

2.9.5

Personnel 1 person.

Time 15 minutes.

2.9.7

Applicability Setup parameters must be logged after the setup procedure has been completed, or whenever these parameters are changed. This enables service engineers to key in parameters rapidly, i.e. when changing the KV Control Board in the event of a battery outage.

2.9.8

Procedure

2.9.8.1

CPU memory backup The generator must be in application mode. The control console push buttons will be inactive during the transfer. • Connect service terminal to system console. • Power up. • Insert the calibration CD disk with write protection off. • From Laptop Dos, A: (It can also be run from Service Laptop Hard Disk Drive but in DOS mode). • Type JEDI on the terminal. • Hit [F6] to save memory. The system asks for a file name. Default file name is A:\sv_var.mx. • Type a file name or hit [ENTER]. During transfer, the number of frames sent is displayed. When transfer ends, the message "Transfer successful" is displayed. If any error is detected, the transfer stops and an error message is displayed. See list of error messages in this section.

Page 162


[email protected]

2.9.6

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 163


1:28 PM



2.9.8.2

Note:

2.9.8.3

CPU memory restore All parameters stored in CPU NVRAM memory must have been saved previously on calibration CD disk. The procedure is the same as "Memory backup" except: Hit [F7] to restore memory. This procedure is also used to down load new software (File type for Database or Software is automaticaly recognised). Errors during memory restore may cause unpredictable results. A new transfer is required. If generator is locked, cycle power and repeat the entire memory restore procedure.

Error messages

MESSAGE

2.10.1

Cannot open file

- No CD disk. - CD write protected during attempt to backup.

File contains data. Delete old (y,n):

The file already exists (backup). If you answer "y", the existing file will be erased.

Error time out

- Generator OFF. - Terminal not connected to generator..

Error communication

Error during transfer. Try a new transfer from the beginning. Note: Ensure ASIAN.exe software running under DOS and not under WINDOWS.

Dosimetric Calibration Dose/DAP accuracy check procedure Before conducting this procedure, make sure following items have been calibrated: - Generator - Tube - HVL - Collimator - Positioner - mR/mAs Procedure: 1.) Set the dosimeter probe with the small ion chamber sensor at 25 cm above the Tabletop/ Wallstand where the prediction algorithm is performed. Ensure the center of the probe is at the center of x-ray beam. 2.) Cover the detector with lead or other material, or move it out of the FOV if possible, so that the detector will not be damaged from over exposure. 3.) Set Exposure technique: FIXED (NON-AEC) mode Table or Wallstand mode Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration

Page 163

[email protected]

2.10

ERROR

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 164


1:28 PM



100kV, 50mA, 3.2mAs 20×20 cm FOV 100cm SID 4.) Take exposure. 5.) Read and take note of the results on dosimeter DoseRef. (unit in mR or μGy), the DAP value on the DAP meter DAPviewer (μGy *m2). 6.) Convert dose unit if needed: 1 mR = 8.76μGy, 1μGy = 0.001 mGy 7.) Determine the reference field size (convert unit to m2 if needed) at the dosimeter position Reference Field size = collimated FOV * (SOD/SID)2 where SOD is distance from tube focal spot to dosimeter upper surface. 8.) Calculate the Reference Dose Area Product DAPRef. = DoseRef. * Reference Field size. 9.) Compare the DAPRef. with DAPviewer as following: (DAPRef. - DAPviewer) / DAPRef.*100% The acceptable error is less than ±30% when DAP ≥ 5μGy*m2

2.10.2

Dose/DAP accuracy maintenance 4.2In case the DAP error is larger than ±30% when DAP ≥ 5μGy*m2, check if the SID, FOV calibration is good. If there is no problem, run Dose Prediction (mR/mAs) calibration then redo the accuracy check.

[email protected]

Page 164


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 165


1:28 PM



Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Section 1.0 Introduction Functional Checks describes the procedures necessary to determine whether the XR 6000 system (Refer to Figure 4-1) is operating correctly and performing within specifications. All the XR 6000 system functions should conform to safety regulations, local codes or other applicable standards. •

Operational Checks

•

Performance Checks

Operational Checks may be performed by the customer or trained personnel. These checks only indicate that the unit is functioning correctly at an operational level. They do not indicate that the unit is performing within specifications.

Before performing Functional Checks all System Configuration and Calibrations must be completed. Refer to Chapter 3 - - Configuraton & Calibration.

Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

Page 165

[email protected]

Performance Checks must be performed by trained personnel only. These checks verify that the unit is performing to specification. It is recommended to complete these checks during and after installation, during periodic maintenance, and when the equipment is replaced or modified.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 166


1:28 PM



1

3 2

10 9

4

8

5 [email protected]

7

6

Figure 4-1 XR 6000 System 1.) Tube Stand

2.) Tube Arm

3.) X-ray Tube

4.) Table Top

5.) Longitudinal Support

6.) Table Base

7.) Foot Pedal

8.) Cassette Tray

9.) Collimator

10.) Control Box

Section 2.0 Tools and Test Equipment In addition to the standard service tool kit the following tools and test equipment will be necessary to perform the functional checks described in this chapter:

Page 166

•

DVM

•

Metric Tape Measure

•

KEITHLEY 35080A kV peak meter (or equivalent)

•

RADCAL MDH2025 dosimeter (or equivalent) with 20x5-60 probe Section 2.0 Tools and Test Equipment

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 167


1:28 PM



Section 3.0 Operational Checks 3.1

System Power Up Power up the XR 6000 system, check that all the corresponding LEDs are displaying correctly.

Green

[email protected]

Red

Figure 4-2 LEDs

3.2

Tube Assembly Operation This section is used to perform mechanical movement checks.


Page 167

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 168


1:28 PM



5

6

1.) 2.) 3.) 4.) 5.) 6.)

2

3

4

6

Vertical Travel Control Switch. Longitudinal Travel Control Switch. Angulation Rotating Control Switch. All Moving Function Control Switch. Angular Indicator. Handle.

Tube Stand Longitudinal Movement Pressing the longitudinal movement button moving the tube stand.

3.2.2

•

Check the tube stand movement is operating smoothly and uniformly.

•

Check that the operation of the tube stand along with the cassette tray moves smoothly all the way to the end of the table.

Tube Stand Rotation Hold the operation handle to drive the tube arm to the left or to the right for rotation, and check that the tube stand can be rotated +/- 180 degree and can be stopped in anywhere.

3.2.3

Tube Arm Vertical Movement 1.) Press and hold the vertical button on the control box and check the tube arm can move smoothly up and down. 2.) Release the button, it will stop in any position. 3.) Press the collimator lamp button. 4.) Move the tube from the lowest position to the highest position. 5.) Check the variance of the cross line, and make sure that it will be less than 5 mm, otherwise, adjust the tube position.

3.2.4

X-Ray Tube Angulation Press and hold the angulation button and check that the X-ray tube angulation range is from -120 degree to +120 degree. The detents are at 0, +/-90 and +/-120 degree, and 0 degree detent position is the tube arm's horizontal axis.

Page 168

Section 3.0 Operational Checks

[email protected]

3.2.1

1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 169


1:28 PM



3.2.5

X-Ray Tube Tilting Release the machine lock (two), and check the tube can be tilting from forward 20 degree to backward 30 degree.

3.2.6

Table Top Movement Checks 1.) Double press the table foot pedals, check the tabletop is free for both Longitudinal and transverse movement. 2.) Check that all movements are smooth. 3.) Release the table foot pedal, the table top will automatically lock at any position.

3.2.7

Cassette Tray Movement The Cassette Tray is normally coupled with the tube stand.. 1.) In coupled state: The Cassette Tray should move together with the Tube Stand. 2.) Uncoupled state: a.) Press the push button on the carriage. Check that the Cassette Tray can be moved longitudinally without the tube stand. b.) Release the push button, the Cassette Tray is locked in the position.

3.2.8

Collimator Rotation

3.2.9

[email protected]

1.) 2.) 3.) 4.)

Loosen set screw. Rotate the collimator. Check the collimator can be rotated. Secure the set screw.

Collimator Light Timer Press the collimator light button and check the light will be power off in more than 30 seconds.

3.2.10

Wall Stand Carriage Vertical Movement Check that the carriage can be moved smoothly up and down and can be locked in any position.

Section 4.0 Performance Checks 4.1

Console 1.) Check the buttons functions. a.) Power up. b.) Press every button except power up and off button, a beep sound will be heard. 2.) Check the APR Save function. a.) Change any parameter of the factory default APR database. b.) Press the APR Save button

for more than 3 seconds, and the system console will

give a beep sound to inform the operators. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

Page 169

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 170


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 c.)

Power off.

d.) Power up. e.) Check the technique parameters be saved. 3.) Check the APR Restore factory default function. a.) Press the buttons

together for more than 10 seconds. System console will

retrieve the factory default APR database. After the retrieve is done, system console will give a beep sound to inform the operators. b.) Power off. c.)

Power up.

d.) Check the technique parameters.

4.2 4.2.1

Accuracy of X-Ray Field and Light Field Alignment Requirements The following image is gotten in a plane that is perpendicular to x-ray field. Verify below requirements are met. |a1| + |a2| <= 1.7% SID and |b1| + |b2| <= 1.7% SID.

Visually Defined Field

b1

b2

X-ray Field

4.2.2

a2

Test Method 1.) Put the cassette onto the table top. 2.) Set SID to 1000 mm +/- 1 mm, and measure the distance by the ruler of the collimator. 3.) Darken the test bay (all light sources should be switched off). 4.) Adjust the blades to get x-ray FOV of 260 mm x 260 mm. 5.) Using metal indicators to indicate the four edges of the actual light field, so that the light field

Page 170

Section 4.0 Performance Checks

[email protected]

a1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 171


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 edges can be identified from the x-ray film. 6.) Make exposure at 40kV/2mAs with large focal spot. Note:

The mAs value may need change according to the development liquid condition. 7.) Adjust the blades to get x-ray FOV of 300 mm x 300 mm. 8.) Make exposure at 40kV/0.5mAs with large focal spot.

Note:

The mAs value may need change according to the development liquid condition. 9.) Develop the film. 10.) Measure the variance between the light field edge and x-ray field edge of the second exposure. For each edge, record the value into following table. 26×26 (cm)

|a1| + |a2| |b1| + |b2|

11.) Calculate accuracy between X-ray field and light field. Note:

If the accuracy meet the system requirements, please skip the following steps, and directly to 4.3 - Alignment of Centers of X-Ray Field and Image Receptor. If not meet, that is |a1|+|a2| > 1.7%SID, follow step 13) to 15). If the test is after tube or collimator replacement, please make marks on the flange interface between the tube and collimator what the below picture shows.

Note:

If the x-ray field is left shifted, move the flange right.


Page 171

[email protected]

12.) Remove the collimator from the tube, and adjust the flange position to the opposite direction to the shift direction of the x-ray filed to the light field. For example, the x-ray field is shifted to the left of the light field, so move the flange to the right. Please refer the figure below for reference.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 172


1:28 PM



Note:

If the x-ray field is right shifted, move the flange left.

14.) If the requirement |a1| + |a2| <= 1.7% SID and |b1| + |b2| <= 1.7% SID has been met, make marks on the flange, spacer, and tube as below. Note:

Please oriente the collimator flange by referring to the thin and thick lines.

Figure 4-3 Make Thin Marks Inside

Page 172


[email protected]

13.) Re-install the collimator to the moved flange, re-test the misalignment value between x-ray field and light field.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 173


1:28 PM



Figure 4-4 Make Thick Marks Inside Note:

Please orient the collimator flange by referring to the marks outside. [email protected]

Figure 4-5 Make Marks Outside 15.) If the misalignment is not within the system requirements, please repeat step 13) to 14) until the accuracy is within the specification and then make marks when the accuracy finally meet the requirements.

4.3 4.3.1

Alignment of Centers of X-Ray Field and Image Receptor Requirements Mis-alignment of centers of x-ray field and image receptor shall not exceed 1.7% SID. |d1| <= 0.017 SID.

4.3.2

Test Method 1.) Set SID to 945mm +/- 2mm from focal spot to table top mode measured by collimator ruler. 2.) Insert the cassette into the cassette tray. 3.) Darken the test bay (All light sources should be switch off ). 4.) Adjust the blades to get X-ray FOV less than the film size. 5.) Make exposure at 40kV,1.6mAs, large spot, and table mode. 6.) Develop the film. 7.) Using the diagonal method to find the center of X-ray field, and use halving method to find the center of film field. Chapter 4 - Functional Checks

Page 173

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 174


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 8.) Measure the distance between the two centers. 9.) Check whether it meets the requirement.

Center of X-Ray Field

d1

4.4

Image Quality The Min resolution measured with following test method should be larger than 4lp/mm.

4.4.1

Test Method 1.) Set following exposure technique: -

45kV;

-

4mAs;

-

Small focus;

-

SID = 100cm;

-

1cm thick plexiglass phantom;

-

Resolution card.

2.) Put the resolution card onto the phantom, and put phantom on the center of the full FOV. 3.) Take exposure, develop the film. 4.) Put the film on a light box, maybe with the help of magnifying glass, read out the max resolution of the film, verify the value is equal to or large than 4lp/mm.

After replace the tube or JEDI or some parts in JEDI, please do the tests below from 4.5 to 4.8.

Page 174


[email protected]

Center of Cassette Film

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 175


1:28 PM



4.5

Tube Voltage Accuracy

4.5.1

Tools A calibrated non-invasive kV meter of 2% accuracy or better. KV meter calibration value must be inside the spec and must be in period of validity Or invasive Dynalyzer or equivalent.

4.5.2

Requirements Range: 40kVp ~ 150kVp; Minimum adjusting step: 1kV; Accuracy: less than or equial to +/-(3%+2 kV+kV meter accuracy)

Note:

4.5.3

If measurement with non-invasive kV meter failed, turn to Dynlayzer for accurate measurement.

Procedure 1.) System power up, select radiography mA at 200mA to 630mA, set 100ms, Large focal spot, select exposure kV as following table. 2.) Take exposure with large spot and record the data of console display. The variance should be met the requirement as above. Setting Value (kV)

Test Data @ 200 mA

Pass/Fail

40 [email protected]

80 150

4.6

Tube Current

4.6.1

Requirements Range: 10mA~630mA separate adjustment, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 40.0, 50.0, 63.0, 80.0, 100.0, 125.0, 160.0, 200.0, 250.0, 320.0, 400.0, 500.0, 630.0; Large Spot: 10~630mA; Small Spot: 10~250mA; Accuracy: less than or equal to +/-15%.

4.6.2

Procedure 1.) System power up, select three parameter mode (mA,kV,time) on system console. Manually adjust exposure mA as following table, exposure at 150kV from 10 to 400mA, 80kV for 630mA, set 100ms exposure time. 2.) Take exposure by handle switch with Large Spot, record the data of console display.

Note:

The mA used shall be minimum as allowed and mSec > 20. Setting Value (kV)

Test Data @ 80 kV

Test Data @ 150 kV

Pass/Fail

10 mA 200 mA


Page 175

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 176


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Setting Value (kV)

4.7 4.7.1

Test Data @ 80 kV

Test Data @ 150 kV

400 mA

N/A

630 mA

N/A

Pass/Fail

Exposure Time Requirements Range: 1.0ms~6300ms; Separate adjustment: 1.0, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 40.0, 50.0, 63.0, 80.0, 100.0, 125.0, 160.0, 200.0, 250.0, 320.0, 400.0, 500.0, 630.0, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300; Accuracy: less than or equal to +/-(10%+1ms).

4.7.2

Procedure System power up, select radiography exposure parameter 80kV, 100mA. Take exposure and record the data of console display. The variance should be less than or equal to +/-(10%+1ms). Setting Time (ms)

10

500

6300

4.8 4.8.1

[email protected]

Test Data (ms)

Exposure mAs Requirements Range: 0.5mAs~630mAs; Separate adjustment: 0.5, 0.63, 0.8, 1.0, 1.25, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 40.0, 50.0, 63.0, 80.0, 100.0, 125.0, 160.0, 200.0, 250.0, 320.0, 400.0, 500.0, 630; Accuracy: less than or equal to +/-(10%+0.2mAs).

4.8.2

Procedure 1.) System power up, select two-parameter exposure mode, and select the exposure mAs as following table at 80kV. 2.) Take exposure and record the data of console display. The variance should be less than or equal to +/-(10%+0.2mAs). Setting Value @ 80kV (mAs)

Test Data (mAs)

10 40 63 400 (type test) 630 (type test)

Page 176


Pass/Fail

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 177


1:28 PM



4.9

Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) - Optional If table AEC or wall stand AEC is ordered, enable them through configuration screen of the console.

4.9.1

Table AEC 1.) Adjust the SID to 100 cm. 2.) Open the collimator. 3.) Select the large focal spot. 4.) Set 80 kV, 20 mAs backup, table mode, center cell of ion chamber selected, and take an exposure. 5.) Check the exposure is terminated less than 5 mAs. 6.) Close the collimator. 7.) Select the large focal spot. 8.) Set 80 kV, 600 mAs, table mode, center cell of ion chamber selected, and take an exposure. 9.) Check that the exposure is interrupted after about 4 seconds, a buzzer will be heard, and the inhibit indicator will light up. 10.) Check the exposure is terminated. The value is 600 mAs or less.

4.9.2

Wall Stand AEC 1.) Adjust the SID to 180 cm. 3.) Select the large focal spot. 4.) Set 80 kV, 20 mAs backup, wall stand mode, center cell of ion chamber selected, and take an exposure. 5.) Check the exposure is terminated less than 5 mAs. 6.) Close the collimator. 7.) Select the large focal spot. 8.) Set 80 kV, 600 mAs, wall stand mode, center cell of ion chamber selected, and take an exposure. 9.) Check that the exposure is interrupted after about 4 seconds, a buzzer will be heard, and the inhibit indicator will light up. 10.) Check the exposure is terminated. The value is 600 mAs or less. Warm up or season the tube before exposures of high kV or mA can be taken appropriately.

4.10

Collimator Light Timer Press the collimator light button and check that the light will go out automatically in more than 30 seconds.


Page 177

[email protected]

2.) Open the collimator.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 178


1:28 PM



Section 5.0 HHS Test Installers must indicate that the combination of installed HHS Certified Components is compatible on Form F3382 provided in Direction 46-013894, System Field-Test For HHS.

Figure 4-6 System HHS Compliance Compatibility List

PRODUCT CATEGORY X-RAY CONTROL

X-RAY TUBE ASSEMBLY HOUSING (CASING) BEAM LIMITING DEVICE CASSETTE TRAY

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SYSTEM CONSOLE GEN. & PDU Toshiba E7843X

MODEL NUMBER

Manual COLLIMATOR CASSETTE TRAY

5189248

5183178 5308337

[email protected]

Page 178

Section 5.0 HHS Test

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 179


1:28 PM


XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 5 - JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Section 1.0 Theory 1.1

Glossary Glossary of terms used in this document:

Definition

ABC

Automatic Brightness Control. Regulation loop which makes the measured brightness equal to brightness demand

AEC

Automatic Exposure Control. Exposure cut off technique which uses the brightness signal to cut the exposure

CAN

Controller Area Network. A network used for localized control.

CPU

Control Processor Unit. Microprocessor and peripherals which run the software/firmware

EPLD

Erasable Programmable Logic Device.

EMC

Electro Magnetic Compatibility. The EMC function prevents the generator from polluting the power source.

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array. It is programmed by the CPU core after the reset and handles all the exposure control logic including the system interface real-time lines.

HV RIPPLE

High voltage variations due to inverter current pulses. Typically a few percent.

STATE MACHINE

Software or hardware function which handles the state of a system and authorize to go to the next state upon reception of specific events.

IGBT

Insulated gate bipolar transistor. A type of power switch

Llp

HV power inverter parallel resonant current; current in the parallel inductor

Llr

HV power inverter serial resonant current; current in the serial inductor.

MOS

Metal Oxide Semiconductor. A type of power switch

OGP

On Gantry Processor. Unit which drives the generator in CT systems

PDU

Power Distribution Unit

RMS

Root Mean Square

Chapter 5 - JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Page 179

[email protected]

Term

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 180


1:28 PM



1.2

JEDI HIGH LEVEL BLOCK DIAGRAM

[email protected]

Figure 5-1 JEDI Generator / Functional Architecture

Page 180

Section 1.0 Theory

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 181


1:28 PM



Section 2.0 Theory Presentation 2.1

Introduction Jedi is the engineering name for a family of compact high frequency X-Ray generators. This generator family covers a wide range of applications from mobile equipment up to vascular systems: • JEDI 12-25 kW: Mobile applications • JEDI 24-48 kW: CT applications • JEDI 32-50 kW: RAD applications • JEDI 50-65-80 kW: RF applications • JEDI 100 kW: VASCULAR applications

2.2

Standard Features

2.3

Applications RAD

Surgery

RF

Vascular/ Cardiac

3 Points Mode

X

X

X

2 Points Mode

X

X

X

1 Point Mode

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

0 Point Mode AEC

X


CT

Page 181

[email protected]

Jedi is a family of 150 kV generators operating from 12 kW up to 100 kW for all the major radiological, fluoroscopic and CT applications. The family handles 1 ms to continuous exposures with tube currents ranging from 0mA up to 1000 mA. The generators feature the very latest technology available: • Constant potential independent of line voltage variations • Power generation by a high-frequency converter (High voltage ripple: 40 kHz-140 kHz) • Distributed micro-processor controlled functions (CAN bus) Other features include: • Single phase, three phase or battery power source • Very low kV and mA ripple, excellent accuracies and dose reproducibility • Compatible with a wide range of tubes, high speed or low speed, can supply up to 3 different tubes. Thermal load interactive integrator ensuring optimum use of the heat protection curve of the x-ray tube • Available in various packaging configurations: gantry, under-table, cabinet • Serviceability: high reliability, fast installation (no generator calibration), application error codes ensure fast troubleshooting • Meets CE marking (and in particular EMC), IEC, UL, CSA, MHW regulations (if required) • Optional pulsed fluoroscopy

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 182


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Tomography

X

X

AET

X

X

Continuous/Pulsed Fluoroscopy

X

Rad Exposures

X

Cinema 30 fr/s

X

X

X

Cinema 90 fr/s

X

ABC

X

X

Variable mA Scans

X

Low mA Fluoroscopy

X

Legend: • AEC - Automatic Exposure Control • AET - Automatic Tomographic Exposure • ABC - Automatic Brightness Control in fluoroscopy

2.4

Architecture

2.4.1

A Kernel • High voltage chain composed of kV control, HV power inverter and HV tank • Anode rotation function • Tube filaments heater function • Control bus for communication between the functions • DC bus for power distribution to each function • Input voltage to DC conversion: AC/DC function • Low voltage power supply • Application software, running on the kV control board These functions are the Jedi core. They are present in all versions of the generator. A function can be unique for all products, or can have several different releases based on product specification.

Example:

2.4.2

The anode rotation function is available in 2 releases: • low speed rotation for applications where the tube has a max rotation of 3000 rpm • high speed/low speed rotation for applications where at least one of the tubes can use 800010000 rpm The control bus is unique.

Options Depending on the Application •

Page 182

A System Interface which can be: -

CT interface

-

RAD interface (console interface, room interface, AEC management present or not)

-

ATLAS interface Section 2.0 Theory Presentation

[email protected]

Refer to Illustration 19: Jedi Generator / Functional Architecture The Jedi family is composed of 3 elements:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 183


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 • EMC function • Grid function (RF, vascular) • Bias function (RF, vascular) • Tube management (2 tubes or 3 tubes option)


[email protected]

Figure 5-2 JEDI Generator / Functional Architecture Chapter 5 - JEDI GENERATOR THEORY AND FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Page 183

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 184


1:28 PM



2.5

A Packaging Architecture The packaging architecture consists in a set of boxes which can be put together in several ways to make Jedi fit either in a cabinet, or a console foot, or a table foot. The boxes can also be split in 2 units distant of several meters (example: CT gantry). Refer to Illustration 20. The boxes normally consist of the following:

2.5.1

Auxiliaries Box • Rotation function • Heater function • Low voltage power supply (which can also be in the AC/DC box) This box is always present.

2.5.2

Power Box • HV tank • HV power inverter • kV control • System interface (for the less complex system interface) This box is always present.

2.5.3

AC/DC Box

2.5.4

System Interface Box • RAD interface • AEC interface This box is present in the RAD product.

2.5.5

Optional Boxes • •

Page 184

Tube selection Grid/Bias control

Section 2.0 Theory Presentation

[email protected]

• MC filter (optional) • AC/DC function • Low voltage power supply (which can also be in the auxiliaries box) This box is always present.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 185


1:28 PM



Inverter LVPS Board (for TIGER)

Dual Snub Tube HV

Gate

+-

Board

KV Measure

CT Inter face

AC/DC Board

HV Tank

Rectifier Block

KV Control Board

EMC Filter (Optional)

AC/DC Box

Power Box

AEC Interface

[email protected]

RAD Interface

LVPS Board (for NP and Emperor) Heater Board

System Interface Box for the rad product

Rotation Board

Tube Selection Rotation Capacitor

Grid/Bias Control

Rotation Capacitor

(optional) Auxiliaries Box

Optional Boxes

Figure 5-3 JEDI Generator / Packaging Architecture


Page 185

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 186


1:28 PM



Section 3.0 Technique Factors Measurement Criteria 3.1

kV Accuracies JEDI emperor: Generator 50kW Definition: accuracy between operator selection and the peak kV during the exposure. Radiography: 40kV~150kV range: +/- 3%+/-2kV

3.2

mA Accuracies JEDI emperor: Generator 50kW Definition: accuracy between operator selection and the real mean mA during the exposure (characterized by real kV>75% of the operator selection). Radiography: exposures shorter than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 10%+/-1mA exposures longer than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 5%+/-1mA

3.3

mAs Accuracies

1/3 point Mode Definition: accuracy between operator selection (mA and ms) and the real mAs during the exposure (characterized by real kV>75% of the operator selection). Radiography: exposures shorter than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 15%+/-0.1mAs exposures longer than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 10%+/-0.1mAs 2/2 point Mode Definition: accuracy between the internal mAs measure displayed after the exposures on the operator console and the real mAs during the exposure (characterized by real kV>75% of the operator selection). Note: mAs measure is also called postdisplayed. Radiography, manual mode: exposures shorter than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 5%+/-0.1mAs exposures longer than 40ms (=mA loop setting time): +/- 5%+/-0.1mAs

3.4

Exposure Time Accuracies JEDI emperor: Generator 50kW Time accuracy (3 point Mode) Definition: accuracy between operator selection and real exposure time (characterized by real kV>75% of the operator selection). Radiography: +/- 5%+/-0.5ms

Page 186

Section 3.0 Technique Factors Measurement Criteria

[email protected]

JEDI emperor: Generator 50kW Two accuracies have to be defined: one in 3 point Mode, one in 2 point Mode.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 187


1:28 PM



Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes Section 1.0 Exception Handling JEDI software performs auto-test at power up and continuously monitors the correct operation of its functions during application. Any malfunction is stored in the JEDI error log. Errors found can only be reported if the generator is powered on and functional.

1.1

Diagnostics There are different levels of diagnostics.

1.2

Power-On Diagnostic

1.3

Live Diagnostics 1.) Under application faults will be reported through an error code on the Service Laptop. Some are straightforward and convey the root cause. Refer to the recommended action in the error list. 2.) Diagnostics run separately: -

heating function

-

rotation function

-

inverter gate command diagnostic

-

inverter in short circuit diagnostic

-

no load HV fucntion diagnostics

3.) Manual Diagnostics Through a troubleshooting guide based on an error message or when the generator does not reply.

1.4

Error Code Structure The error code structure described in this chapter applies to JEDI error detection and logging. The JEDI error log file can be accessed from the system through the system console or a laptop (JEDI error log upload functionality).

Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes

Page 187

[email protected]

At power-up the kV control performs its own initialisation, checks its memory integrity (checksum of program and NVRAM) and starts the communication with its peripherals as well as the system. Communication is permanently checked afterwards. It then initialises the Rotation board and Heater board with their respective database parameters and loads kV control FPGA. Eight LEDs (S7..S0) on the kV control board show the software status. During power-on, the Heater board and the Rotation board CPUs are initialised and check their memory integrity and hardware. If a problem is encountered, a PRD error is reported to the kV control.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 188


1:28 PM



When an error is detected, it is logged in the JEDI error log file. The file contains a maximum of sixty four error logs. Each log shows the following structure: Simplified Generator Error Error Data associated Number of Date & error code Phase Class Code with the error code occurrences time The fields are described in the following paragraphs.

1.5

Simplified Error Code Definition

1.6

Generator Phase Definition The generator phase field contains the state of the generator when the error occurred. Generator Description Phase 0 idle: entered in diagnostic mode 1 powered up; waiting for configuration 2 Stand by: configuration completed, waiting for a preparation command 3 Preparation in progress: JEDI gets ready to take X-rays 4 Ready for exposures (rotation at speed; filament; HV inverter drive ready; no errors): waiting for an exposure command 5 High voltage on 6 Error detected and not yet cleared

1.7

Class Page 188

Error Class Definition There are five classes of errors that correspond to different levels of impact to the system. The class of errors correspond to the seriousness of the errors. Description Section 1.0 Exception Handling

[email protected]

The simplified error code is a grouping of the JEDI error codes. This field gives a rapid understanding of which part of JEDI is faulty. Simplified Description Error Code 30 Tube spits errors 40 Rotation errors 50 Heater errors 60 Exposure errors (HV inverter + mA measure + exposure control 70 Power supply errors (low voltage + DC bus)Hardware errors (internal communications + cables) 80 Hardware errors (internal communications + cables) 90 Application errors (saved RAM + software) 100 External communication errors 110 Thermal errors 120 Manipulation error 10 Rotation warnings (engineering use) 20 Heater warnings (engineering use) 25 LVPS warnings (engineering use) 27 Application warnings (mainly saved RAM battery change)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 189


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE

1.8

Error Code Definition Each error code comprises two fields (which cannot be generated and used separately); • the first field describes the JEDI function which is faulty (referred to as the function code) • the second field describes the error detected. Example: error code 0306 means: • 03: high voltage generation function; • 06: no kV feedback on anode. Function Codes List Function Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Description Rotation heater High voltage generation mA control Power supplies System interface Software Application Tube control


Page 189

[email protected]

DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL 1 Errors which have no impact on the system operation. Errors detected in background diagnostics during application. They are referred as "Warning" errors, to monitor drifts and used for engineering tracking. The generator phase remains unchanged. Errors are stored in the JEDI error log. 2 Errors which are detected by JEDI and that are recoverable automatically without noticeable effect on the system, such as error related to recovered tube spits. The generator phase remains unchanged. Errors which usually occur during exposure. 3 Errors detected by JEDI during exposure. They stop the exposure and revert the generator into a safe state. Error will be reset on Exposure Command release. It will require another Exposure Command to restart the sequence. The generator phase is set to "error" until the error is cleared. 4 Errors which are related to any hardware failures, software application or communication errors. JEDI will revert to a safe state. If preparation is in progress, it is stopped. Errors are cleared either by a reset error action from the system (for system having a reset error mechanism) or by a prep release or by a new prep command. The generator phase is set to "error" until ther error is cleared. Application cannot work if errors are persistent. 5 These codes may appear when the generator or tube temperature limits are reached. The application waits until the thermal information disappears. The error information is temporary. The generator phase is set to "error" until the error is cleared.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 190


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 10 11 12 13 14

1.9

Tube management Grid Bias AEC Hardware

Data Associated With The Error Code The field "data associated with the error code" shows detailed information over the state of the generator when the error occurred.

Example:

1.10

Rotation high speed acceleration state, small focus preheat, tube number 1 selected.

Number Of Occurrences The field "number of occurrences" is used to log the same error occurring several times consecutively. Instead of filling the error log file with the same error which has occurred consecutively several times, the first error is logged and successive errors are recorded through increasing the "number of occurrences" field.

1.11

Date & Time

Section 2.0 Error Codes, Diagnostics & Troubleshooting 2.1

Introduction This diagnostics section is to introduce the JEDI generator with the following information: • Power-On diagnostics LED indication. • List all the potential error codes that can be issued by JEDI Generator. • Provide error code explanation, potential cause and recommended action. • List of diagnostics aids and explanation of diagnostics.

2.2

Power On Diagnostics Refer to theory of operation for power-on sequence. This paragraph in this section is to provide meaning of boards' LED status. The LED display status is offering useful information at a glance to proceed to error code based troubleshooting. Whenever in doubt, a simple step is to watch the LED status display on the kV control board, then the Rotation and Heater. kV control LED status: • During Power On Diagnostics

Page 190

Section 2.0 Error Codes, Diagnostics & Troubleshooting

[email protected]

The field "date & time" stores the date and time when the error occurred. This is the JEDI internal date and time which may be different from the system date and time. In the case of logging the same error the date/time is of the most recent entry.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 191


1:28 PM



kV control board S0..................S7 _

 

oooo

S0.........................S7

The 8 LED's (S0...S7) are lit successively in both directions (Scrolling as indicated by the arrows): the power up diagnostics are completed, kV control board is up and running.

S0.....................S7 o

o

o

o

One out of two is lit: Data base checksum problem. An error code is logged. Refer to error code description.



o oo

S7, S6, S5 are lit along with either S0 or S1 or S2 (depending of the type of FPGA downOne out of two is lit: Data base checksum problem. An error code is logged. Refer to error code description. •

When an application error occurs (Not PRD)

 

e.g: No communication

The simplified error code is displayed on the Leds. They blink; when the error is cleared (by a return to the standby mode for example), the 8 LEDs are lit successively.

Heater board LED status: (See central listing) After the power on diagnostics, heater board LEDs DS1 and DS2 are lit successively. Any different status correspond to an abnormal situation. An error code is logged. Refer to error code description.

Rotation board LED status: (See central listing) After the power on diagnostics, rotation board LED DS5 is blinking. Any different status correspond to an abnormal situation. An error code is logged. Refer to error code description.

2.3

Error Code List

Simplified Error Code 30

The error code list and associated short description is presented below. Description ErrorClass ErrorCode Description Tube Spits

2 2

0301H 0302H

Tube spit (kV+ and kV- dropped) Tube spit (kV+ has dropped)


Page 191

[email protected]

S0.....................S7

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 192


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Simplified Error Code

40

50

Description

Rotation Error

Heater Error

ErrorCode

Description

2 2 2 4

0303H 0304H 0305H 0101H

Tube spit (kV- has dropped) Tube spit (kV regulation error) FPGA problem (restarting safety signal) No CAN message received within 5 secs

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Database not correct Rotation current overload Rotation Openload Rotation Phases unbalanced Rotation Phases error Rotation Inverter permanent overcurrent Rotation command error MAINS_DROP has failed PRD error F0 main frequency problem Unknown Rotation error No CAN message received within 5 secs Heater inverter permanent overcurrent Filament permanent open circuit Heater Inverter permanent short circuit Filament too high for Pre-heat Filament too high for Pre-heat Filament too high for Heat Heater command error Current under estimated fork Current over estimated fork MAINS_DROP detected PRD error Stay too long in Boost Filament selection error Measured current while inverter OFF Filament Database not correct

3

0102H 0103H 0104H 0105H 0106H 0107H 0108H 0109H 0110H 0111H 0149H 0201H 0203H 0204H 0205H 0206H 0207H 0208H 0209H 0210H 0211H 0212H 0213H 0214H 0215H 0216H 0221H 0222H 0223H 0224H 0248H 0249H 0306H

3 3 3 3 3 3

0307H 0308H 0309H 0310H 0311H 0312H

No kV Feedback on cathode No kV Feedback on anode and cathode kV detected during kV diag kV max detected ILP current not OK ILR current not OK

4 60

Page 192

Exposure errors

Unknown Heater error No kV Feedback on anode


[email protected]

ErrorClass

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 193


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE 0313H 0314H 0316H 0317H 0318H 0319H 0320H 0323H 0401H 0402H 0403H 0504H 0801H 0802H 0803H 1406H 1407H 1408H 1409H 1410H 0501H

XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL ILR max current detected ILR current timeout Spit Max error Spit Ratio error kV did not reach 75% after 20ms kV unbalanced detected FPGA problem (safety signal) ILP and ILR currents not OK No mA feedback mA scale error mA accuracy exceeded 5% Inverter Gate Power Supply failed Exposure backup mAs exceeded Exposure backup time exceeded Exp cmd while gene not ready time counter error mAs counter error AEC counter error mAs meter saturated FPGA Locked DC bus out of range

0503H 0505H 0506H 0507H 0549H 0553H 0557H 0563H 0567H 0573H 0577H 0180H

Inverter Gate Power Supply error Mains power supply has dropped during exposure DC bus 1 phase precharge error DC bus 1 phase discharge error Unknown LVPS error Detected +160V too high Detected +160V too low Detected +15V too high Detected +15V too low Detected -15V too strong Detected -15V too weak Rotor board communication problem

0181H 0280H 0281H 0321H 0322H 0601H 0602H 0902H 1402H 1403H 1404H

Rotor board has reset Heater board communication problem Heater board has reset kV conversion error kV ref ADC / DAC failed RTL error External CAN bus off tube Fan supply error Internal CAN bus off Connectic Fault FPGA configuration problem


Page 193

[email protected]

DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 70 Power 4 Supply errors 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 80 Hardware 4 error 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 194


1:28 PM



100

110

120

10

Page 194

Communica tion errors

Thermal error Manipulatio n error

Rotor Warning

Heater Warning

1405H 0701H

Tank sensor problem Saved RAM checksum pb

4 4 4 4

0702H 0703H 0704H 0603H

Software problem Watchdog reset has just occurred Rotor/Heater hold too long Debug screen com error

4 4 4 4 5

0604H 0605H 0606H 1301H 0804H

Database download error TAV communication error MPC/Madrid communication error AEC communication error Tank Thermal Error

5 5

0903H 1500H

Tube exceeded 70degC Tomo brightness error

5 5 1

1501H 1502H 0151H

Exposure switch released during exposure AEC cut off error CAN Domain command number error

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0152H 0153H 0154H 0155H 0156H 0157H 0158H 0159H 0160H 0161H 0162H 0163H 0164H 0199H 0251H

CAN Domain request with no transfer init CAN Domain Toggle bit error CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download CAN Domain Abort received & applied Bad index in config upload Tube switch while rotor not off Acceleration cmd while no tube selected Acceleration cmd while database not OK Database download while rotor speeding Acceleration command not OK Rotor acceleration while in error No CAN message received within 4 secs Rotation Inverter overcurrent (< 3 times) Unknown rotation warning Received command is not OK

1 1 1

0252H 0253H 0254H

1 1 1 1 1 1

0255H 0256H 0257H 0258H 0259H 0260H

Heater command not OK No CAN message received within 4 secs Heater inverter overcurrent (inverter1) (<3 times) Filament open circuit (inverter1) (<3 times) Heater Inverter short circuit (inverter1) (<3times) Tube switch while filaments not OFF CAN Domain command number error CAN Domain request with no transfer init CAN Domain Toggle bit error


[email protected]

20

Application errors

4 4

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 195


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 1 1 1 1 25 Low Voltage 1 Power supply Warnings 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 27 Application 1 warnings

2.4

0261H 0262H 0263H 0299H 0550H

XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download CAN Domain Abort received & applied Database download while heater not cut Unknown Heater warning No more warn +160V too low or too gigh

0551H 0555H 0560H 0561H 0565H 0570H 0571H 0575H 0599H 1401H

Detected +160V too high Detected +160V too low No more warn +15V too low or too high Detected +15V too high Detected +15V too low No more warn -15V too low or too high Detected -15V too strong Detected -15V too weak Unknown LVPS warning Saved RAM power supply limit reached

Error Reporting

2.5

Diagnostics This chapter describes diagnostics tools based on error codes and specific diagnostics. Before any manual intervention, ensure the main power is off. Apply lock out-tag out procedure for your own safety when manipulating inside the equipment is required.

2.6

Detailed Error Description & Troubleshooting Guide The table below provides guidelines to troubleshoot Generator problems based on error code. For each code, there is: • Associated message and additional explanation related to the error occurrence. • List potential cause, in the order of expected probability. • Recommended action, with, in some cases, link to some more information as indicated where cases apply, such as to run some specific diagnostics. Codes are sorted by ascending order both for simplified code and error code. Refer to the theory of operation for error code structure. Information about associated data structure is located at the end of each error code subset whenever it applies. Whenever wiring, cabling, LED check is mentioned in the recommended actions, refer to the central listing or to Illustration 1. Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes

Page 195

[email protected]

The control console only displays the simplified error code from the Jedi generator. Whenever a generator error is displayed on the operator console, the Jedi errorlog upload functionality is available to get more detailed information about the error .This function is performed from the service laptop. The simplified error code is used to find the Jedi error code in the Jedi errorlog file. With this information, look at the Jedi trouble shooting table to find the FRU to replace.

N1 (230 V)

K1

EMC Flt.

"VCC": +5V

kV ctrl

-15V, +15V

DS 1, 2

3ph, 380 - 480 VAC

+ 15 V

- 15 V

+

AC/DC

DS 1

-

-

F1 - 15V

NE 1

+ 15V

LVPS

Rotor Board

DS 7

DS 3, 2, 1 +5, -15, +15

DS 2

DC bus, 160V (120 to 200V)

DS 3

Heater Board


CB1

Figure 6-1 JEDI Visual Power Supply Distribution for XR 6000


PDU

+ 15 V

- 15 V

I/F PUPTor DS7-6

*

*

Console

DS 300

+ M

DC bus, 400 ... 800 V

*

AEC

*

Gate Command Board

* *

INVERTER. & LLC. Circuit

DS 1

Neon's


[email protected]

Page 196

Page 196

DC bus, 400 ... 800 V

LEDs

PioneerSM_ENG.book 1:28 PM


*

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 197


1:28 PM


2.6.1

2.6.1.1 Class 2Error code 30-0301H 30-0302H

Tube spits detection Errors (Code 30) Message/explanation Tube spit (kV+ and kV- dropped) kV drop/spit detected Tube spit (kV+ has dropped) kV drop/spit detected on Anode side Tube spit (kV- has dropped) kV drop/spit detected on cathode side

30-0304H

kV regulation error This is a slow speed safety circuit in case of "smooth" spits.

30-0305H

Re-starting safety. (unknown reason) Error occurring on safety line, while No root error present at the error inputs (Err 0301 to 0304). This is probably due to transient interference (Spikes).

2.6.1.2 Class 4 Error code 40-0101H

40-0103H

40-0104H

40-0105H

Potential cause x-ray tube spit. 1. Anode side Tube spit. 2. Anode HV cable 3. HV tank 1. Cathode side Tube spit. 2. Cathode HV cable 3. HV tank 1 smooth HV tube spits 2 kV control board (HV regulation problem) 3 too much line impedance 4 half of AC/DC capacitors open 5 Inverter (parallel inductor or filtering capacitors) 6 HV tank 1. External unknown cause. 2. kV control board. [email protected]

30-0303H

40-0102H


Errors

Anode Rotation errors (Code 40) Message/explanation

Potential cause

No CAN message received within 5 sec's The rotation board has not received any signal from the kV control main software for the last 5 sec., interpreted as a loss of communication Database not correct. The firmware of the rotation board has detected that the Database received from the kV control board has wrong data. Rotation current overload Rotation board has detected Main or auxiliary rotation current too high compared to the max. Tube motor current. Rotation current openload Rotation board detected that no current is flowing to the motor.

1. kV Control main software lost 2. kV control or Rotation board driver failure 3. Bad contact on one of the pin on the CAN bus line connector

Rotation phases unbalanced The amplitude difference of the current bwtween main and auxiliary is too large.

1. Wrong kV control Database. It can only happen at power up.

1. Rotation board 2. Wrong Database (improbable)

1. Tube stator winding is open circuit: x-ray tube 2. Incorrect wiring (Open) 3. No DC bus on Rotation board 4. Rotation board 1. One rotation wire missing 2. Rotation board 3. Wrong tube configuration database


Page 197

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 198


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 40-0106H

40-0107H

40-0108H

40-0109H

40-0110H

40-0111H

Rotation command error. Rotation board has informed kV control board that the command was erroneous; this is a DEBUG error. MAINS_DROP has failed The firmware of the rotation board has detected the mains_drop signal activation and transmitted error to kV control PRD error Firmware checksum, RAM test and EPLD access are performed at power up or reset. F0 main frequency problem. EPLD has not applied the inverter start command. Unknown Rotation error. The main software received an error from rotation board with no error code assocxiated.

1. Rotation board

1. Rotation board 2. Tube stator winding in short circuit -> x-ray tube 3. Wiring incorrect (shorted) No hardware failure

1. Interference (spikes) 2. Mains drop 3. Cable or connector contact in DC bus between power unit and auxiliary unit 4. Rotation board Rotation board

Rotation board

Software problem

Associated data structure: PRD error: component failure: 0001H=RAM 0002H=RAM stack 0200H=EPLD 8000H=program checksum Rotation database error: 2 bytes data, each value points to a specific parameter found as being erroneous Other errors: rotation state: 0=inverter OFF 1=acceleration 0 to low speed 2=acceleration 0 to high speed 3=acceleration low speed to high 4=low speed run 5=high speed run 6=high speed to low speed brake 7=brake reverse 8=brake DC

Page 198


[email protected]

40-0149H

Rotation phase error The rotation board has detected that the current in the anode stator does not show the correct phase shift between main and auxiliary. Rotation Inverter permanent overcurrent An overcurrent has been detected and 3 restart have been tried unsuccessfully within a single rotation state

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 199


1:28 PM


2.6.1.3 Class4 Error code 50-0201H

50-0203H

50-0204H

50-0205H

50-0207H

50-0208H

50-0209H

50-0210H

50-0211H

50-0212H

Message/explanation No CAN message received within 5 sec's The Heater board has not received any command from the kV control main software for the last 5 sec., interpreted as a loss of communication Heater inverter permanent overcurrent. (SW limit) Issued by the heater board when an overcurrent has been detected and 3 restarts have been tried without success within 100 ms Filament permanent open circuit. Issued by the heater board when an open has been detected and 3 restarts have been tried without success within 100 ms Heater Inverter permanent short circuit (HW limit) Issued by the heater board when a short circuit has been detected and 3 restarts have been tried without success within 100 ms Filament current too high on inverter 1 for "Pre-Heat" This is the result of an integrated value of the RMS current measurement on Heater board comparison with max. Tube value in Database. Filament current too high on inverter 1 for "Boost" Same as above Filament current too high on inverter 1 for "Heat" Same as above Heater command error Heater board has informed kV control board that the command was erroneous; this is a DEBUG error. Current under estimated fork/range RMS filament current measurement (every 0.5 msec.) on heater board is too high Current under estimated fork range RMS filament current measurement (every 0.5 msec.) on heater board is too low MAINS_DROP detected. The firmware of the Heater board has detected the mains_drop signal activation and has transmitted error to kV control

Potential cause 1. kV Control main software lost 2. kV control or Heater board driver failure 3. Bad contact on one of the pin on the CAN bus line connector 1. Heater board

1. X-ray tube filament open 2. Heater to HV tank cable 3. Cathode HV cable or pin contacts 4. Open circuit in filament transformer inside HV Tank. 1. Heater board

[email protected]

50-0206H


Filament Heater errors (Code 50)

1. Tube Database or calibration 2. Heater board

1. Tube Database or calibration 2. Heater board 1. Tube Database or calibration 2. Heater board No hardware failure

Heater board

1. Open circuit 2. Heater board 1. Interference (spikes) 2. Mains drop 3. Cable or connector contact in DC bus between AC/DC and auxiliary unit4 . Heater board


Page 199

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 200


1:28 PM



50-0214H 50-0215H

50-0216H

500221H 0222H 0223H 0224H 500248H 0249H

PRD error Firmware checksum, RAM test and EPLD access are performed at power up or reset. Boost too long on inverter 1. Boost command stayed longer than 400 ms Filament selection error. The relay on the Heater board selecting the filament is in the wrong position with respect to the selection Measured current while inverter OFF Inverter current has been measured while the inverter was not commanded Filament Database not correct The firmware of the heater board has detected that the Received Database from kV control contains erroneous data for Tube 1, 2, 3, or 4.

1. Heater board 2. No -15V on Heater board

Unknown heater error The main software received an error from heater board with no error code associated.

Software problem.

May be a loss of communication during boost. Heater board

Heater board

1. Wrong kV control Database. It can only happen at power up.

Filament database error: 2 bytes bitmap (LSByte=small focus, MSByte=large focus) Each bit points to an erroneous parameter Other errors: 1 byte bitmap with the following structure: bit7 (MSB) bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 focus selected tube selected small focus state 0=small focus selected 1=tube 1 selected 0=inverter OFF 1=large focus selected 2=tube 2 1=preheat 3=tube 3 2=boost 4=tube 4 3=heat

Page 200

[email protected]

Associated data structure: PRD error: component failure: 0001H=RAM 0002H=RAM stack 0200H=EPLD 8000H=program checksum

bit1 bit0 (LSB) large focus state 0=inverter OFF 1=preheat 2=boost 3=heat


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 201


1:28 PM


2.6.1.4


Exposure errors (Code 60)

Class 3 Error code 60-0306H

Message/explanation

Potential cause

No kV feedback on anode side kV measured <12 kV 0,5 ms after start of exposure on anode side only

60-0307H

No kV feedback on cathode side kV measured <12kV 0,5ms after start of exposure on cathode side only

60-0308H

No kV Feedback (on anode and cathode) kV measured <12 kV 0,5 ms after start of exposure on both anode and cathode. kV detected during kV diagnostics. KV measured during inverter diagnostics while no kV must be generated. kV MAX detected kV reached 160 kV during exposure ILP current not OK. The current in the parallel resonant circuit of the inverter did not rise at the beginning of the exposure.

1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2.

60-0309H

60-0310H 60-0311H

60-0313H

60-0314H

60-0316H

60-0318H

60-0319H

60-0320H

60-0323H

ILR current not OK The current in the serial resonant circuit of the inverter did not rise at the beginning of the exposure. Inverter max. ILR current detected. This is a hardware detection of maximum current in serial resonant circuit. ILR Current time out. The current resonant frequency is lower than expected Spit Max error. kV control has detected the number of tube spits during exposure has reached the limit (see theory of operation, software section) kV did not reach 75% after 20 ms. Indicates that there were no HV ON signal generated for exposure time count-up kV unbalanced detected. Detects that there is more than 12 kV difference between kV+ and kV FPGA problem; Safety hit with unknown reason No error at the inputs while checking for error source. ILP and ILR current not OK No inverter current measures at the beginning of the exposure

Improper setup before the diagnostic is run.

kV control 1. Inverter LC resonant circuit (Inverter coil assy, capa inverter assy.) 2. Inverter 3. kV control See above

1 2

HV tank kV control

1. kV control 2. Inverter 3. Current measurement circuit. reasonably x-ray tube

1. kV control

HV tank

1. This may be due to transient interference (Spikes). 2. SW bug 1. Inverter LC resonant circuit. (Inverter coil assy, capa inverter assy, cabling) 2. Inverter 3. kV control board


Page 201

[email protected]

60-0312H

HV cable short circuit HV tank kV control board (less probable) HV cable short circuit HV tank kV control board (less probable) HV tank kV control board

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 202


1:28 PM



60-0402H

60-0403H (Class 2 error) 60-0504H

No mA feedback mA measurement function: kV control has detected no mA feedback 20 ms after the beginning of the exposure. mA scale error mA has been measured to be either too low or too high with respect to mA demand 20 ms after the beginning of the exposure mA accuracy exceeded 5% Measured mA every 50 msec exceeded 5% of mA demand.This error is logged, but does not stop the exposure. Inverter Gate Power Supply error gate supply voltage has dropped below the level required to drive the IGBTs properly Exposure backup mAs exceeded The exposure command last so long that the maximum mAs allowed has been reached.

60-0802H

Exposure backup time exceeded. The exposure command last longer than the duration that was loaded by the system (Backup time + 5%.) Exp cmd while gene not ready. generator received an exposure command while not in ready state

60-0803H

60-1406H

60-1407H

60-1408H

60-1409H

60-1410H

Page 202

Time counter error. Error found in verifying the counter normal operation. mAs counter error Error found in verifying the counter normal operation. AEC counter error If there is no AEC feedback in AEC station exposure. mAs meter saturated. A check is done on mAs counter operation at the beginning of exposure and found the mAs meter with unrealistic value. FPGA locked. FPGA detected an error and did not allow start exposure after exposure command symbol was received

1. kV control board 2. default filament currents not correctly adjusted 3. HV Tank (improbable) 1. tube spit

1. Inverter (gate command board) 2. kV control board 3. Generator input voltage too low or line impedance too high 1. Esposure command line stuck to the active state 2. kV control board 3. Heater board 1. System 2. System-Generator cable 3. I/F board: exposure line stuck to the active state 1. Software bug/problem 2. Cable / communication problem 3. External cause (Spikes) kV control board

kV control board

1. ION chamber 2. AEC cable, connection 3. AEC board 4. kV control 1. kV control

1. Software problem 2 kV control


[email protected]

60-0801H

1. HV tank 2. kV control board 3. x-ray tube (filament open)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 203


1:28 PM


2.6.1.5

Power supply (Code 70) Message/explanation DC bus out if range (<400 or >850)

70-0503H

Inverter Gate Power Supply error (checked at prep)

70-0505H

Mains power supply has dropped During exposure Unknown LVPS error The main software received an LVPS error with no error code associated. Detected +160 V too high +160 V is higher than 225 V (measured on heater board) Detected +160 V too low+160 V is lower than 110 V (measured on heater board) Detected +15 V too high +15 V is higher than 17.3 V (measured on heater board) Detected +15 V too low +15 V is lower than 13 V (measured on heater board)

70-0553H

70-0557H

70-0563H

70-0567H

70-0573H

70-0577H


80-0181H

80-0280H

Detected -15 V too high -15 V is lower than -17.3 V (measured on heater board) Detected -15 V too low -15 V is higher than -13 V (measured on heater board)

Potential cause 1. mains problem (Too low or too high) 2. One phase missing at Generator input 1. Mains 2. Cable pb 3. Gate command board (Inverter) 4. kV control unknown Software problem

1. LVPS 2. Heater board 1. LVPS 2. Heater board 1. LVPS open circuit 2. Heater board 1. LVPS open circuit 2. Heater board 3. rotation (short circuit)kV control (short circuit) (improbable) 1. LVPS open circuit 2. Heater board 1. 2. 3. 4.

LVPS (open circuit) Heater board rotation (short circuit) kV control (short circuit) (improbable)

Hardware errors (Code 80) Message/explanation Rotation board communication problem. kV control board communication Watch Dog with Rotation board popped up because it did not get reply from Rotation board. Rotation board has reset. kV control has detected the Rotation board has reset. KV control will reload Rotation Database. Heater board communication problem kV control board communication Watch Dog with Heater board popped up because it did not get reply from Heater board.

Potential cause 1. Rotation board 2. Control bus cable 3. kV control 1. Rotation board 2. Interference (Spikes)

1. Heater board 2. Control bus cable 3. kV control


Page 203

[email protected]


70-0549H


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 204


1:28 PM



80-0322H

80-0601H

KV conversion error KV feedback measured while no KV generated kV ref ADC / DAC failed kV control DAC and ADC capability are permanently tested for coherency. RTL error (+ associated data to check which of the 4 RTL lines) Real Time Lines show a wrong state. RTL's are tested on a regular basis in stand by.

External CAN bus off

80-0902H

Tube Fan supply error. Rotation board has detected that a wrong voltage is applied to the tube fan Internal CAN bus off Can device on kV control board detected abnormal level on it's 2 line and sent error to the CPU Connection Fault One of the flat cable connector is not connected in Generator. FPGA configuration problem. Detected during power up. The kV control main software cannot load the FPGA. Tank temperature sensor problem. Means that t?„ value of the HV tank is < 10?„C

80-1402H

80-1403H

80-1404H

80-1405H

Page 204

KV control board

1. system communication power supply (for isolated communications) 2. system communication cable 3. system interface board 4. system interface to kV control flat cable 5. kV control board 1. system communication power supply (for isolated communications) 2. system communication cable 3. system interface board 4. system interface to kV control flat cable 5. kV control board 1. No 115 V tube cooling supply 2. Rotation board 1. kV control 2. Control bus cable 3. Heater or Rotation Multiple, but likely improbable.

kV control board.

kV controlHV tank


[email protected]

80-0602H

KV control board

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 205


1:28 PM



90-0702H 90-0703H

90-0704H

2.6.1.8 Class 4 Error code 100-0603H 100-0604H

100-0606H

100-1301H

2.6.1.9

Message/explanation NV RAM checksum pb. Generator kV control board has detected corruption in the NV Ram verification (After power up) Software problem. Watchdog reset has just occurred. This error is logged when the CPU of the kV control board is reset by it's Watch Dog timer. Rotation/Heater hold too long. Will pop up if preparation command from the system is maintained longer than 3 minutes.

Potential cause 1. Database problem 2. External cause (Spikes) 3. kV control 1. 2. 1. 2.

Software or Database problem. kV control board failure. Software or Database problem. kV control board failure.

Software problem.

Communication errors (code 100) Message/explanation Debug screen com. error Database download error Generator has detected a problem during Database download TAV communication error. Generator has detected a communication problem between the I/F and the service laptop (When generator is controlled by the laptop) MPC/Madrid Communication error. No reply from the console.(This error message can be seen using the service laptop)

AEC communication error KV Control has detected a communication problem with AEC board.

Potential cause Engineering use 1. Database file incorrect 2. Transmission problem 1. Software / laptop problem 2. Cable problem

1. Cable, connection problem between Generator and the console. 2. Interface board 3. kV control board 4. Cabling between kV control board and IF board 5. Console problem 1. AEC board 2. I/F board 3. kV control 4. Wiring

Thermal errors (code 110)


Message/explanation Tank Thermal Error HV tank temperature measurement has reached 60 degree C

110-0903H

70 degree C thermal safety error 70?„ loop detected open

Potential cause 1. HV tank too hot; normal error 2. HV tank 3. kV control 1. X-ray tube too hot; normal error 2. Wiring problem 3. Sensor problem (Tube) 4. rotation board


Page 205

[email protected]

100-0605H


Application errors (Code 90)

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 206


1:28 PM



2.6.1.10

Manipulation errors (code 120)


Message/explanation Tomo brightness not good

120-1501H

Exposure switch released

120-1502H

AEC CUT off error

2.7

10

Page 206

Warning Errors Warning errors are the result of automated and regular background monitoring for either software events or voltages exceeding thresholds. Those errors are merely for engineering usage and do not indicate any hardware error failure. However, as they are logged into the Generator Err_log file, just as the previous list of errors, they are listed here to help error review. If many are seen when viewing error log, we recommend reporting this with a CQA, since the equipment is still operating. Rotation Warning 0151H CAN Domain command number error 0152H CAN Domain request with no transfer init 0153H CAN Domain Toggle bit error 0154H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download 0155H CAN Domain Abort received & applied 0156H Bad index in config upload 0157H Tube switch while rotor not off 0158H Acceleration cmd while no tube selected 0159H Acceleration cmd while database not OK 0160H Database download while rotor speeding 0161H Acceleration command not OK 0162H Rotor acceleration while in error 0163H No CAN message received within 4 secs 0164H Rotation Inverter overcurrent (< 3 times) 0199H Unknown rotation warning Heater Warning 0251H Received command is not OK 0252H Heater command not OK 0253H No CAN message received within 4 secs 0254H Heater inverter overcurrent (inverter1) (<3 times) 0255H Filament open circuit (inverter1) (<3 times) 0256H Heater Inverter short circuit (inverter1) (<3times) 0257H Tube switch while filaments not OFF 0258H CAN Domain command number error 0259H CAN Domain request with no transfer init 0260H CAN Domain Toggle bit error 0261H CAN Domain : less than 2 data to download 0262H CAN Domain Abort received & applied 0263H Database download while heater not cut


[email protected]

20

Potential cause Technics (kV, mA) not set at the correct value. The brightness signal is out of range (+/-20%) Handswitch has been released before the end of exposure Backup time or mAs too short; AEC did not cut the exposure

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 207


1:28 PM


Low Voltage Power Supply Warnings

27

2.8

Application warnings

0299H 0550H 0555H 0560H 0561H 0565H 0570H 0571H 0575H 0599H 1401H

Detected +160V too low No more warn +15V too low or too high Detected +15V too high Detected +15V too low No more warn -15V too low or too high Detected -15V too strong Detected -15V too weak Unknown LVPS warning Saved RAM power supply limit reached This message is the result of a computation that is made by the software based on the Date for a period of approximately 7 years

Other Failures

Error code System

Potential cause

GENERATOR does not reply to the system

1. No power on Generator 2. EMC filter 3. AC/DC- Diode bridge 4. Cable between AC/DC and LVPS 5. LVPS down 6. CAN cable problem 7. kV control 8. CT interface 9. Rotation board 10. Heater board 11. Inverter in short circuit 12. Generator to system cable 1. Short circuit on Generator : IGBT in short circuit ACDC or bridge rectifier in short circuit EMC filter in short circuit 1. After software download: -Incorrect or uncompleted download -Checksum problem

Software or Data base corrupt

Message / explanation CONSOLE boot up error

Potential cause

Recommended action Troubleshooting guide

Console power supply is not correct

Locate the Switch Power DSP1 on the back of PDU, then adjust VR1 to make 5V terminal out put 5.50.05V.


Page 207

[email protected]

Message/explanation

3 phases CB1 breaker trips in PDU

Error code Console

XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL Unknown heater warning No more warn +160V too low or too high

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 208


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 System

1. No power on the Generator 2. EMC filter 3. AC/DC- Diode bridge 4. Cable between AC/DC and LVPS 5. LVPS down 6. CAN cable problem 7. kV control 8. RAD interface 9. AEC board 10. Rotation board 11. Heater board 12. Inverter in short circuit 13. Generator to system cable

Perform the troubleshooting in the following way: 1/ kV control Leds S0-S7 are lit successively: refer to system communication errors (code 06xx H) 2/ Leds S0-S7 show a specific pattern: refer to PRD errors section 3/ Led RESET is lit: board is maintained in reset either by the system or by a system I/F failure or kV control failure 4/ Led HALT is lit: replace kV control 5/ No Led is lit: verify that +5 V on kV control board (J6, pin 2).is present. If yes, replace kV control. If no: 6/ Verify if +15 V/-15 V is present (Leds DS1/ DS2). If yes: Verify that mains_drop line is not stopping the kV control software (mains_drop active): 6_1/Check if DS1 LED on LVPS board is lit. If yes, replace LVPS board. 6_2/Disconnect Heater board control bus cable. Check if kV control software starts. If yes, replace Heater board. 6_3/Disconnect Rotation board control bus cable and connect it directly to LVPS board. Check if kV control software starts. If yes, replace rotation board. 6_4/If AEC existing, disconnect AEC cable (J5) from IF board (J3) cable. Check if kV control software starts. If yes, disconnect AEC chambers and connect AEC board to IF board. If kV control starts, check AEC chambers, else replace AEC board. 6_5/Disconnect IF board cable (J10). Check if kV control software starts. If yes, replace IF board, else: replace kV control board. if no: 7/ Verify if +15 V/-15 V is present on rotation board (DS1/DS2) and the 160 V is present on the heater board (DS3). If yes: check the control bus cable to the kV control board. If no error, change the kV control board. If no:


[email protected]

Page 208

GENERATOR does not reply to the system

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 209


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 GENERATOR does not reply to the system(Cond't)

1. Short circuit on Generator: - IGBT in short circuit - ACDC or bridge rectifier in short circuit - EMC filter in short circuit

Software or Data base corrupt

1. After software download: - Incorrect or uncompleted download - Checksum problem Console power does not reach the specification

Console display malfunction

2.9

PDU DPS1:V1 output should be +5V. Adjust the potentiometer if needed.

Heating Function diagnostics

Purpose:

Pre-requisites:

Test type: Sequence:

The purpose of this test is to drive the heater inverter(s) on both filaments and all the tubes connected to the Generator in order to identify a faulty heater FRU or a wrong connection between heater board, HV Tank and tube(s). • kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a combination of them blink • heater board alive and running: DS1 and DS2 Leds are lit successively • heater DC supply present: DS3 Led is lit No manual interaction Select the tube to run the test on, start the diagnostic. The following sequence runs on the small focus and then on the large focus: • 5 seconds preheat • 0,4 s boost • 5 s heat (focal spot max current - 1Amp) There is 10 s stop time between each focal spot run. During the test, the heater safeties are checked the same way than in application mode. Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes

Page 209

[email protected]

3 phases CB1 breaker trips in PDU

XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL 8/ Verify if the LVPS DC input is right. If no, check AC/DC fuse and input line If yes: 9/ disconnect all output cables from the LVPS board. Verify the +15 V/-15 V/160 V output. If right: reconnect each board successively to find the one stucking the 15V to ground. If wrong, replace LVPS board 1/ Disconnect DC bus cables between AC/DC and inverter (on AC/DC side) 2/ Check if these cables are in short circuit. If yes, replace inverter if no, 3/ Remove ACDC board 4/ Check between outputs pins then between inputs of ACDC board. If short circuit, replace AC/ DC FRU if no: 5/ Check bridge rectifier, between outputs, if yes, replace ACDC FRU (including rectifier bridge) if no: 6/ Check bridge rectifier, between inputs, if yes, replace ACDC FRU (including rectifier bridge) if no: 7/ Disconnect AC line input from EMC board. Check EMC for short circuit between phases. If short circuit, replace EMC board. Retry download

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 210


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Error codes reporting: Refer to the troubleshooting table.

2.10

Rotation Function diagnostics

Purpose:

Pre-requisites:


Associated data points to both high speed and low speed mode

Replace the rotation board

For the other error codes, refer to the troubleshooting table.

2.11

Inverter in Short Circuit Function diagnostics

Purpose:

Pre-requisites:

Test type:

Page 210

The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter is working properly. The inverter is commanded at a fixed frequency and is loaded with a short circuit. Verification is made that the inverter currents are correctly set. At the same time verification is made that no High voltage is measured. This test is performed without connecting the HV Tank to the inverter so that no Xray is generated. Anode rotation and filament drive are not activated during this test. • Generator input line in an acceptable range (380 V-10% to 480 V+10% for 3-phase AC input) • kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a combination of them blink • inverter gate_cmd board DC supply present: DS300 neon is lit • inverter dual snubber board DC supply present: DS1 neon is lit • Inverter gate command diagnostic passed without failure Manual operation is required.


[email protected]

Error code 0103H 0104H 0105H 0106H 0103H 0104H 0105H 0106H

The purpose of this test is to drive the rotation inverter(s) in high speed mode (for application supporting high speed mode) and low speed mode on all the tubes connected to the Generator in order to identify a faulty rotation FRU or a faulty dephasing capacitors FRU or a wrong connection between rotation board and tube. • kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a combination of them blink • rotation board alive and running: DS5 Led blinking • rotation DC supply present: DS7 neon is lit • cabling between rotation board and tube checked No manual interaction, no loop on Select the tube to run the test on, start the diagnostic. The following sequence runs in low speed mode and then in high speed mode (if high speed mode allowed): • acceleration (time depends on tube type) • 2 s run • brake (time depends on tube type) There is 2 s stop time between each speed mode. During the test, the rotation safeties are checked the same way than in application mode. Error codes reporting: Associated data Conclusion Associated data points only to high speed Power-off. Check if rotation board K2 relay is mode short circuiting the rotor capacitors. If yes replace the rotation board. If no replace the rotation capacitors

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 211


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Sequence: 1.) Disconnect the HV Tank primary cables from the inverter.


Take care not to disconnect at the same time the parallel inductor cable which is tightened with the HV Tank primary cables. Put the short circuit cable (included in the first aid kit) between the two capacitors as shown:

[email protected]

Check that the parallel inductor cable do not remain unscrewed. 2.) Power on the Generator 3.) Verify that the DS1 neon on inverter dual snubbers board is lit 4.) Verify that the DS300 neon on inverter gate_cmd board is lit 5.) Start the diagnostic and verify that no error is reported on the operator console 6.) Press the exposure switch (500 ms exposure is taken) 7.) Release the exposure switch 8.) Verify error reported on the console 9.) After exiting the test, power off the Generator 10.) Remove the short circuit cable, reconnect the HV Tank primary cables (see HV Tank D/R job card). 11.) Verify that the parallel inductor cable is connected.

Error reporting: error DS1 neon off DS300 neon off 0301/0302/0303/0304/ 0309/0310/0319 (H) 0311 0312 0313 0314 0320 0323

Conclusion Check that DC bus cables between AC/DC and inverter Check the gate_cmd supply cable between AC/DC and gate_cmd board Check that HV Tank primary cables have been removed. If yes, replace kV control board No Ilp current detected. See note 2 No Ilr current detected. See note 3 replace kV control board Ilr current resonant frequency is lower than expected. See note 4 if problem persists, replace kV control board Both Ilr and Ilp currents not detected. See note 1


Page 211

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 212


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 0501 0503 0504 0505

Note 1:

kV control or inverter can be faulty kV control or inverter can be faulty kV control or inverter can be faulty Isolation fault between inverter components and ground. Check inverter inductors. If no faulty component, kV control or inverter can be faulty

Ilp and Ilr currents not detected 1.) Check the -15 V (Led DS1) on kV control board (see central listing). If it is not lit, refer to "other failures" section. Else: 2.) Power off the Generator. Wait until all neons are off. 3.) Check that the currents transformers (capacitor set) to gate_cmd board cable is correctly connected. If yes: 4.) Check that the inverter inductors are correctly connected. If yes: 5.) Check that the gate_cmd to HV Tank cable and HV Tank to kV control cables are correctly connected. If yes, replace the inverter 6.) Reconnect all the cables

Note 2:

Ilp current not detected 1.) Power off the Generator. Wait until all neons are off. 2.) Check that the parallel inductor is correctly connected. If yes: 3.) Check that the parallel inductor impedance is 0 Ohms. If no: replace inverter. If yes:

5.) Disconnect the currents transformers to gate_cmd board cable. Check that the parallel current transformer impedance is 0. If no: replace the capacitor set. Else: 6.) Check that the gate_cmd to HV Tank cable and HV Tank to kV control cables are correctly connected. If yes: 7.) Disconnect the HV Tank to kV control cable. Check that the impedance between pin 20 and pin 21 of J2 of HV Tank is 3,3 Ohms. If no replace the inverter. If yes replace kV control board. 8.) Reconnect all the cables. Note 3:

Ilr current not detected 1.) Power off the Generator. Wait until all neons are off 2.) Check that the inductors are correctly connected. If yes: 3.) Disconnect the currents transformers to gate_cmd board cable. Check that the serial current transformer impedance is 0. If no: change capacitor set. Else: 4.) Check that inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes, replace the capacitor set. Else: 5.) Check that the gate_cmd to HV Tank cable and HV Tank to kV control cables are correctly connected. If yes: 6.) Disconnect the HV Tank to kV control cable. Check that the impedance between pin 20 and pin 21 of J2 of HV Tank is 5 Ohms. If no replace iverter. If yes replace kV control board. 7.) Reconnect all the cables

Note 4:

Ilr current resonant frequency is lower than expected 1.) Power off the Generator. Wait until all neons are off. 2.) Check that the inductors are correctly connected. If yes: 3.) Check that the inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes: replace the apacitor set. Else: 4.) Disconnect the currents transformers to gate_cmd board cable. Check that the parallel current

Page 212


[email protected]

4.) Check that inverter capacitors (capacitors set) are not broken. If yes, replace the capacitor set. Else:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 213


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL transformer impedance is 0. If no: change the capacitor set. Else: replace kV control board. 5.) Reconnect all the cables

2.12

AEC diagnostics

Purpose: Pre-requisites:


-

No cell selected, Test 4 is OK if return voltage measurement is 0 V.

-

Select respectively one of the three cells, left, right, middle.

Test 5, 6, 7 are OK if: 1 V < measured value < 3 V. Error codes reporting: Error Code Associated Data Conclusion 1111111 (*) None Test OK Any combination None Test KO = test failed; replace AEC board 0001000 None Communication error: - Replace AEC board - If same problem, apart from a DOA board, suspect IF board then KV Control board. (*) except for AEC board with serial number: 2184569-X: the resulting error code must be 0001111 (test is OK on this board the HV power supply test is not performed). For the other error codes, refer to the troubleshooting table.

2.13

No Load HV diagnostics

Purpose:

The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter and HV tank are working properly. The exposure is taken as in application mode except that no filament drive nor anode rotation is running. Verification is made that the inverter currents are correctly set and that kV regulation is operating properly. As no filament drive is applied, no XRays are generated. Chapter 6 - Exception Handling And Error Codes

Page 213

[email protected]

The purpose of this test is to drive the AEC function in order to identify a faulty AEC, IF or kV control board FRU or the wrong connection between the AEC board and ion chambers. • application mode without AEC mode is running properly • kV Control board alive and running: S0-S7 LEDs are lit successively or a combination of them blink • cabling between IF board, AEC board and ionization chambers checked. Automated, with the use of Service Laptop Select AEC function in menu 1 on Service Laptop. Press V to run the test. AEC function is verified through a series of 7 tests as follows: • AEC return measurement test: A voltage reference is switched to one input of the AEC select multiplex. Nominal value of return voltage = 5.24 V Test 1 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V This test is also performed at lower frequency count up: Test 2 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V. • Switching Gain test (x10): A voltage reference is switched to one input of the AEC select multiplex and count up gain is applied. Nominal value of return volatge = 4.76 V Test 3 is OK if: 4 V < measured value < 6 V. • AEC ion chamber HV power supply test: A portion of HV power supply is switched to one input of the AEC select multiplex:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 214


1:28 PM


Pre-requisites:



This test also allow to separate Generator from HV cable or x-ray tube problem by running it with or without the HV cables plugged on the HV tank. • Generator input line in an acceptable range (380 V -10% to 480 V +10% for 3-phase AC input) • kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a combination of them blink • inverter gate_cmd board DC supply present: DS300 neon is lit • inverter dual snubber board DC supply present: DS1 neon is lit • Inverter gate command diagnostic passed without failure • Inverter in short circuit diagnostic passed without failure • *) HV Receptacles must be filled with oil if HV cables are removed. Manual operation is required. 1.) Power on the Generator 2.) Start the diagnostic and verify: -

error reported on the operator console

-

inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS101, DS102, DS201, DS202 are lit: IGBTs gate drive supply is working properly

3.) Select kV (default = 80 kV) and exposure time (default = 1 sec.). 4.) Press the exposure switch 5.) During the "exposure", verify: -


6.) Release the exposure switch

Error reporting: See Troubleshooting Table.

2.14

Inverter Gate Command diagnostics

Purpose:

Pre-requisites:


The purpose of this test is to verify that the HV power inverter drive is working properly. The IGBTs gate drive supply and the IGBTs gate drive is verified. At the same time verification is made that no inverter currents nor High voltage are measured. This test is performed without DC voltage applied to the inverter so that no Xray is generated. Anode rotation and filament drive are not activated during this test. • generator input line in an acceptable range (380V-10% to 480V+10% for 3-phase AC input) • kV control board alive and running: S0-S7 Leds are lit successively or a combination of them blink • inverter gate_cmd board DC supply present: DS300 neon is lit Manual operation is required. 1.) Switch the system OFF. Ensure there is no voltage on AC/DC board 2.) FOR XR 6000: -

Remove DC BUS cable going to Inverter (refer to Chapter 8 - - Renewal Parts-3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly).

-

Remove the EMC cover (refer to Chapter 8 - - Renewal Parts-3.4 - Inverter Mid-Power Assembly).

-

Refer to Central Listing to "GATE COMMAND BOARD" and to "DUAL SNUB BOARD" for leds location.

3.) Power on the Generator 4.) Verify that the DS1 neon on inverter dual snubbers board is not lit 5.) Start the diagnostic and verify: Page 214

error reported on the operator console Section 2.0 Error Codes, Diagnostics & Troubleshooting

[email protected]

7.) Power off the Generator

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 215


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS101, DS102, DS201, DS202 are lit: IGBTs gate drive supply is working properly 6.) Press the exposure switch (10 s exposure is taken after a 10 sec. delay) 7.) During the "exposure", verify: -


-

inverter gate_cmd board Leds DS100 and DS200 are lit: IGBTs gate drive is working properly

8.) Release the exposure switch 9.) Power off the Generator 10.) Reconnect the 2 DC bus cables from the AC/DC board (see Central Listing).

Error reporting: Error DS1 neon lit DS300 neon off

if problem persists, replace Kv control board kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first Replace inverter

Check cabling between kV control, HV Tank and gate_cmd board. If cabling is right, kV control or inverter fault, replace inverter first


Page 215

[email protected]

0301/0302/0303/0304/ 0309/0310/0311/0312/ 0313/0314/0319/0323 (H) 0320 0501 0503 0504 one of DS101/DS102/ DS201/DS202 LEDs off while no error reported DS100 and/or DS200 LEDs off

Conclusion Check that DC bus cables have been removed Check the gate_cmd supply cable between AC/DC and gate_cmd board Check that DC bus cables have been removed. If yes, replace kV control board

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 216


1:28 PM



Section 3.0 Console Troubleshooting & Error Codes 3.1

Error Codes Error Code C01-0001 C02-0001 C02-1000 C03-0001 C04-0001 C04-0002 C04-0003 C04-0004 C05-0001 C06-0001

3.2

Messages System Error Memory Error on Console Control Board Membrane Button Error JEDI Communication Error APR Random or All No AEC Config Overlimit Phase Missing Generator Error Exposure Error

Console Troubleshooting

3.2.1

System Error (C01-0001) [email protected]

Adjust KV No

KV can be changed?

Connector of J4 on console is loosing?

Yes

No

8QSOXJ+6FRQQHFWRU Press the button.

HS Pin1/2 and Pin3/4 can switch with pressing?

No

Replace handswitch If connector of TAV board and connector J3 on Jedi is loosing?

Yes Open PDU cover. J2 on Jedi is loosing?

Yes

Yes

Re-connect No

Yes

Re-connect

No Power off console. Then power on it after 15s, if the issue still exists?

Power on console. Pull out TAV cable connector from Jedi J3 and J2. Then press HS.

No

Yes Is LED (DS4) lighting or flashing on TAV board?

Yes

Jedi troubleshooting

Replace console

No Replace TAV board

Page 216

Section 3.0 Console Troubleshooting & Error Codes

Power up 15s after power off

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 217


1:28 PM


3.2.2


Memory Error on Console Control Board (C02-0001) Power off console. Then power on it after 15 sec. Repeat this operation for more 3 times.

If there is at least one time error code C02-0001 displaying.

No

Replace console main board

Yes Make APR saving Operation. Reset console.

Check if the APR has been changed to above setting?

Yes

As error issue report

No Replace console main board [email protected]


Page 217

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 218


1:28 PM



3.2.3

Membrane Button Error (C02-1000)

Check if console can enter normal work mode?

No

Yes Operation each button. Check and record which button is invalid.

If all the button on a line all are invalid?

No

Replace console

Yes Replace console main board

[email protected]

Page 218


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 219


1:28 PM


3.2.4


JEDI Communication Error (C03-0001) Check if connector J4 of console is loosing?

Yes

No Power off console, then power on it after 15 sec Check if the error disappears?

No

Power up 15s after power off

Yes Power off console. Open PDU cover

Check if the connector of TAV board and J3 connector of Jedi is loosing?

Yes

Re-connect Jedi troubleshooting No

No Open TAV cover, and power on console. Check if LED DS1 is light?

Yes Check if DS3 is flashing?

Yes

Check if DS2 is flashing?

No

3.2.5

Replace console or TAV board

Yes Replace console

APR Random or All (C04-0001) APR parameters are invalid, its root cause is perhaps one or more parameters from local database are over-limit. LCD screen will display zero.

3.2.6

No AEC Config (C04-0002) AEC Operation will be regarded as an error, if there is not AEC configuration.

3.2.7

Overlimit (C04-0003) Value is out of predefined range. Jedi can not accept.


Page 219

[email protected]

No Replace TAV board

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 220


1:28 PM



3.2.8

Phase Missing (C04-0004)

check if PDU misses phase?

Yes

No

Pull out J3 of Console. Test if Pin 5 is connected with Pin 6 of power cable connector?

Yes

PDU troubleshooting

No Replace console main board

3.2.9

Generator Error (C05-0001) 1.) It is a real time indication of Jedi error. Enter error code mode and get detail Jedi error code information. 2.) Look up Service Manual of Jedi and enter Jedi trouble shooting.

Other Troubleshooting

3.2.10.1

LED Unlit Failure Power off. Then power up after 15 seconds. Check if all LEDs light up in initialization. Y: It’s OK. N: Replace the console.

3.2.10.2

Buzzer Failure Power up. Check if there a beep sound after button press operation. If there is not a beep, buzzer circuit is failure. Replace the console main board.

3.2.10.3

LCD Display Failure 1.) Power off. Check if Power LED lights up. N: Replace console main board; Y: Go to step 2). 2.) Open console cover. Check if LCD connector J1 and J14 are loosing. Y: Fix them well; N: Replace the console.

3.2.10.4

LCD Display Faintness Power off. Open console cover. Power up again. Adjust R133 on console main board. Check if the LCD display can be changed to be clear enough for watching. Otherwise, replace the console.

Page 220


[email protected]

3.2.10

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 221


1:28 PM


3.2.10.5


Power Un failure Power off. Pull out J3 connector from console. Check if there is 24VDC between Pin1 and Pin2 of Power cable. This is console 24V supplier from PDU. If it does not exist, check PDU. Otherwise, replace the console main board.

Section 4.0 PDU Troubleshooting 4.1 4.1.1

PDU Troubleshooting No Console Power Check TM1 1,2,3 is 380VAC and BK is close

No Console Power

N

Close BK or hostipital BK

Y

Check DSP1 input is 110 VAC or not

N

Check T1 output is 110VAC or not

Replace F3 or filter NF1

Y

Replace T1

Y N

Replace Console or Console Cable

Y

Check DSP1 output is 24 V or not

Check T1 input is 380 VAC or not

N Replace DSP1

N Replace F1


Page 221

[email protected]

Y

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 222


1:28 PM



4.1.2

No EM Lock Power or No Collimator Power No EM lock power or No collimator power

Check LED1 is light or not

N

Close BK or hostipital BK

Y

Check DSP2 input is 110 VAC or not

Check T2 output is 110VAC or not

N

Y

Replace F4

Y N Replace EM lock or Replace Collimator

Y

Check DSP2 output is 24 V or not

Check T2 input is 380 VAC or not

N

Y

Replace T2

N

Replace DSP2 Check CT2 is close or not

Y

Replace F2

N

Y

Replace CT2

N

Replace Console

Page 222

Check TM3 1 vs 7 voltage is 24 VDC or not

Section 4.0 PDU Troubleshooting

Y

Replace K1

[email protected]

Check K1 is close or not

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 223


1:28 PM


4.1.3


No Generator Power NO Generator Power

Check TM1 1,2,3 is 380VAC

N

Check hospital power

Y

Check CT1 is close or not

Y

Replace CT1

N

Check K1 is close or not

Y

Check CT2 is close or not

N

Replace CT2

N N Y Refer to No Console Power Troubleshooting Chart

N

Check DSP1 output is 24 VDC or not

Check T2 is output is 110 VAC or not

N

Replace F2

Y Y Replace Console

N

Check TM3 1 vs 7 voltage is 24 VDC or not

Replace K2

[email protected]

Y Replace K1


Page 223

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 224


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 224

Section 4.0 PDU Troubleshooting

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 225


1:28 PM



Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance Section 1.0 Preventive Maintenance Action List The following table lists the required planned maintenance activities and the associated Job Card for each task. OPERATION

FREQUENCY

SECTION

DESCRIPTION

General cleaning and painting

As required

2.1

Keep all surfaces clean and touch-up paint chips

Visual inspection

13 months

2.2

Check for debris that would indicate abnormal wear

Functional checks

13 months

2.3

Perform the tasks described in Chapter 4 Functional Checks

Control pedals andmovement inhibition buttons

13 months

2.4

Check condition and functioning; ensure pedals and buttons have free play without any obstruction

Electrical cables

13 months

Check condition of cable sheathing and correct routing

Power and ground connections

13 months

Check condition and connections

Connector panel and cable connectors

13 months

Check condition and connections

GENERAL

TABLE BASE

[email protected]

PATIENT SUPPORT Surface finish

13 months

2.5

Check condition and clean

Bearings (longitudinal & transversal)

13 months

Check condition and lubricate with grease

Bearing tracks and rails (longitudinal & transversal)

13 months

Clean and wipe with light machine oil

CASSETTE TRAY AND CARRIAGE Electrical connector and cable

13 months

2.6

Ensure connector is in good condition and making good contact; check condition of cable sheathing

Cassette handle assembly, push button & hand holder

13 months

Ensure handle and push button have free play without any obstruction

Bearings and tracks (front and rear)

13 months

Check condition; clean and wipe with light machine oil and lubricate with grease

Tray

13 months

Check general condition of the tray

Rubber bumper end stops

13 months

Check condition of stops and tightness of anchoring

Cassette size marker and locking assembly

13 months

Check condition; clean and wipe with light machine oil

TUBE STAND

Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance

Page 225



Check longitudinal bearings and rail mounting screws

13 months

If the longitudinal bearing and rail mounting screws are loose, below steps must be performed while installation or replacement: 1. Apply Loctite 242 (or 243) to the screws. 2. Tighten M8 screws to 24 N-m (17.7lbs-ft) with the torque wrench; Tighten M10 screws to 48 N-m (35.4 lbs-ft) with the torque wrench.

Counterweight chain

13 months

Carriage roller bearing inspection

13 months

Clean roller bearings and tracks

Vertical lock

13 months

Clean and inspect

2.7

Inspect and grease length of chains; replace if required

GENERATOR 13 months

2.8

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Test exposure, including AEC if present Record last error codes Record result on counters Check technique factors Tighten terminals and remove dust

Regrease HV cables and tube cable sockets

13 months

2.9

Perform the tasks described in Chapter 2 Physical Installation to regreasing HV cables and tube cable sockets

Replace NonVolatile RAM on the kV Control Board

Every 8 Years

2.10

1. 2. 3.

Upload database Battery replacement Download database

Collimator Check the collimator mounting screws

13 months

Check the flange and stop plate, if mounting screws are loose, below steps must be performed while installation or replacement: 1. Apply Loctite 242 (or 243) to the screws. 2. Tighten screws to 9.9 N-m (7.3lbs-ft) with the torque wrench.

13 months

Remove tube covers, Check tube fork and tube arm, if mounting screws are loose, below steps must be performed while installation or replacement: 1. Apply Loctite 242 (or 243) to the screws. 2. Tighten M6 screws to 9.9 N-m (7.3lbs-ft) with the torque wrench; Tighten M8 screws to 24 Nm (17.7lbs-ft) with the torque wrench;

Tube Check the tube mounting screws

WALL STAND (Optional) General cleaning and painting

As required

2.1

Keep all surfaces clean and touch-up paint chips

Visual inspection

13 months

2.2

Check for defects that would indicate abnormal wear

Functional checks

13 months

2.3

Perform the tasks described in Chapter 4 Functional Checks

Page 226

[email protected]

Check generator functions

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 227


1:28 PM



Counterweight chain

13 months

2.7

Inspect and grease length of chains; replace if required

Carriage roller bearing inspection

13 months

Clean roller bearings and tracks

Vertical lock

13 months

Clean and inspect

Section 2.0 Preventive Maintenance The following pages list the preventive maintenance detailed activities.

2.1 2.1.1

General Cleaning and Painting Supplies Cleaning liquids and compounds. Touch-up paint.

2.1.2

Tools None. [email protected]

2.1.3

Safety Precautions Remove power from the system before beginning work. Check that the power is off.

2.1.4

prerequisites None.

2.1.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.1.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.1.7

Procedure 1.) Remove power from the system. 2.) Carefully clean all surfaces of the system. Note any paint damage as you clean the system. 3.) Apply touch-up paint to any paint-damage areas. 4.) Reapply power to the system.

2.2 2.2.1

Visual Inspection Supplies None.


Page 227

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 228


1:28 PM



2.2.2

Tools None.

2.2.3


2.2.4

Prerequisites None.

2.2.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.2.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.2.7

Procedure 1.) Remove power from the system.

3.) If any debris, wear or damage is observed, replace or repair the affected areas. 4.) Reapply power to the system.

2.3 2.3.1

Functional Checks Supplies None.

2.3.2

Tools None.

2.3.3

Safety Precautions No specific precautions. Check that the power is off.

2.3.4

Prerequisites None.

2.3.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.3.6

Time 45 minutes.

Page 228

Section 2.0 Preventive Maintenance

[email protected]

2.) Visually check around the moving parts of the system for any debris, wear or damage. This includes tabletop, tube stand, XRT mount, collimator moving parts and the wall stand if present.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 229


1:28 PM


2.3.7


Procedure Follow the functional checks specified in Chapter 4 - Functional Checks of this Service Manual.

2.4 2.4.1

Table Base Maintenance Supplies None.

2.4.2

Tools Measuring tape.

2.4.3

Safety Precautions Remove power from the system before beginning work as indicated in the procedure steps. Check that the power is off.

2.4.4

Prerequisites None.

2.4.5

Personnel 1 person. [email protected]

2.4.6

Time 45 minutes.

2.4.7

Procedure 1.) Control Pedals and Movement Inhibition Buttons a.) Confirm the control pedal unlocks the table top when depressed and locks the table top in place when released. Adjust the locks as required if there is inappropriate table motion. b.) Confirm that each of the 4 movement inhibit buttons on the control panel release the appropriate lock when depressed and locks the relevant motion when released. Adjust the locks as required if there is inappropriate motion. 2.) Electrical cables a.) Remove power from system b.) Check condition of all cables including cable sheathing, connectors and overall condition; if any cable damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable c.)

Confirm that the cables are correctly routed

3.) Power and ground cables a.) Check that power is removed from system b.) Check condition of all power and ground cables including cable sheathing, connections and overall condition; if any cable damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable c.)

Confirm that the cables are correctly routed

4.) Connector panel and cable connectors a.) Check that power is removed from system b.) Check condition of all interconnection cables including cable sheathing, connections and overall condition; if any cable damage is noted, replace or repair affected cable c.)

Confirm that the cables are correctly routed Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance

Page 229

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 230


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 d.) Reapply power when complete

2.5

Patient Support Maintenance

2.5.1

Supplies Grease. Light Machine Oil.

2.5.2

Tools None.

2.5.3


2.5.4

Prerequisites None.

2.5.5


2.5.6

Time 45 minutes.

2.5.7

Procedure 1.) Surface finish. Remove the dust from the table top and table topside rails. 2.) Bearings (longitudinal and transversal). Remove the dust. 3.) Bearing tracks and rails (longitudinal and transversal). Remove the dust from the bearing tracks and rails. Add the light machine oil on the tracks and rails. 4.) Rubber bumper end stops (longitudinal and transversal). Verify the bumper stops have no cracks and one fixed tightly.

2.6 2.6.1

Cassette Tray Carriage Maintenance Supplies Grease. Light Machine Oil.

2.6.2

Tools None.

2.6.3

Safety Precautions Remove power from the system before beginning work.

Page 230


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 231


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Check that the power is off.

2.6.4


Prerequisites None.

2.6.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.6.6

Time 45 minutes.

2.6.7

Procedure 1.) Electrical connector and cable Confirm properly connected. 2.) Cassette handle assembly, push button and hand holder Check the push button function. Check the movement with the handle functions. 3.) Bearings and tracks (front and rear) Remove the dust and add grease or light machine oil. 4.) Rubber bumper and stops Confirm the bumper and stops have no cracks and are fixed tightly. Confirm the pull-in and pull-out movement is smooth. 6.) Cassette size marker and locking assembly Check the cassette size marker is firmly set and the cassette locking assembly is functional.

2.7 2.7.1

Tube Stand and Wall Stand Maintenance Supplies Grease. Light Machine Oil.

2.7.2

Tools None.

2.7.3


2.7.4

Prerequisites None.

2.7.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.7.6

Time 45 minutes. Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance

Page 231

[email protected]

5.) Tray

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 232


1:28 PM



2.7.7

Procedure 1.) Counterweight chain (Tube stand) Check the chain is fixed tightly. 2.) Carriage roller bearing inspection Corresponding movement operates smoothly. 3.) Vertical lock Confirm proper function.

2.8

Generator Functional Checks

2.8.1

Supplies Film. Error-code recording form. X-ray counter recording form.

2.8.2

Tools Laptop.

2.8.3

Safety Precautions No specific precautions. [email protected]

2.8.4

Prerequisites None.

2.8.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.8.6

Time 60 minutes.

2.8.7

Procedure

2.8.7.1

Test exposure Post display initialization: Connect the service Laptop Run the service software Go to calibration mode by using keys “ALT and S” Go to MENU 5 with arrow keys Press (F7) to select DSPL Press (F1) to select Display ON Press Q to quit the program and return to application mode

Page 232


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 233


1:28 PM



mA accuracy Run the exposures in table below and check if the mA value on post display (Z key) is between the min and max value. If not , run the same exposure 10 times with exposure time set to 12.5ms and then check again. Focus

Parameter

mA results

(Post Display)

min and max value

Small

40 kV 100mA 50ms

90-110

Small

80kV 100mA 50ms

90-110

Small

120kV 100mA 50ms

90-110

Large

40 kV 200mA 50ms

180-220

Large

80kV 200mA 50ms

180-220

Large

120kV 200mA 50ms

180-220

AEC functionality check (if existing) Put 15cm of Plexiglas or a plastic bucket with 15 cm of water on the table top Select Two point mode (mAs) Set kV to 80 kV and mAs to 600 [email protected]

Run the exposure Develop the film Check that the density is 1 +/-10%.If not redo AEC calibration.

2.8.7.2

Record last error codes Go to calibration mode by using keys “ALT and S” Go to MENU 2 with arrow keys Press (F3) to select LIST Press (F5) to select the first error code Fill the chart below with the error code number Then use F5 key for following error code. Refer to diagnostic section (Chapter 6) for fix if necessary. Clear the Error Log after checking. (Use CTRL and H keys, then confirm with W key).

Simplified Error Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Error Code

Generator Phase

Error Class

Data associated with the Error Code


Number of occurrences

Date and Time

Page 233

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 234


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

2.8.7.3

Record results on counters Go to calibration mode by using keys “ALT and S” Go to MENU 2 with arrow keys Press (F5) to select NEXP(Number of EXPosures) Fill the chart below with the counter number Then use F5 key for following counter. Counter name

Data

Explanation

No WARM-UP

Don't care

Number of skipped warm-up (N/A)

RX GSF

H

Cumulated exposure time on Small Focus

RXGLF

H

Cumulated exposure time on Large Focus

RXSCOP

Don't care

Cumulated exposure time in Fluoro (N/A)

ROTANOD

H

Cumulated anode rotation time

NEXPSF

Cumulated number of exposure on Small Focus

NEXPLF

Cumulated number of exposure on Large Focus

N100%SF

Don't care

Cumulated number of exposure on Small Focus at 100% (N/A)

N100%LF

Don't care

Cumulated number of exposure on Large Focus at 100% (N/A)

NAMOR

Page 234

Cumulated Number of spits

KJSF

E

Cumulated dissipated power on Small Focus

KJLF

E

Cumulated dissipated power on Large Focus


[email protected]

Press (F5) to select the first counter

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 235


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 TIME ON

XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL H

N EXP G

2.8.7.4

Total Generator Power On (not erasable) Total generator number of exposure (not erasable)

Check technique factors Run the Accuracy checks in “Functional Check procedure” in Chapter 4. Make a copy of illustrations 3, 4, 5, and 6 and fill it with the results you get.

2.8.7.5

2.9 2.9.1

Tighten terminals and remove dust •

Tighten the inputs connections on generator, located near the labels on AC/DC module (refer to illustration in disassembly / reassembly section).

•

Tighten the DC bus connections on generator located on the upper side of the generator (refer to illustration in disassembly / reassembly section).

•

Verify if all connectors are correctly plugged in.

•

Remove dust by using a vacuum cleaner.

HV Cable and Sockets Regreasing Supplies

2.9.2

[email protected]

None.

Tools None.

2.9.3

Safety Precautions No specific precautions. Check that the power is off.

2.9.4

Prerequisites None.

2.9.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.9.6

Time 30 minutes.

2.9.7

Procedure Follow the process specified from Step 7 to Step 11 in Chapter 2 - Physical Installation - 4.3 X-Ray Tube of this Service Manual.

2.10 2.10.1

Replace Generator NonVolatile Parameters RAM Supplies None. Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance

Page 235

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 236


1:28 PM



2.10.2

Tools 5.5 nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

2.10.3

Safety Precautions Remove power from the system before beginning work. Check that the power is off. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

2.10.4

Prerequisites Upload the database that is stored in the RAM before starting the replacement procedure Refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters.

2.10.5

Personnel 1 person.

2.10.6

Time 45 minutes.

2.10.7

Remove and Replace the RAM On the kV Control board, note the direction that the RAM faces. Insert the tip of a small screw driver underneath left side of U32 and lever gently, then grasp it between your thumb and forefinger and pull it directly away from its support on the board. Insert the new Nonvolatile Parameters RAM in its place. Be careful to insert it facing in the same direction.

Refer to Central Listing section for more details. This NV RAM contains a LITHIUM CARBON MonoFlouride (LiCFx) battery, used to provide the battery backup for the static RAM and the time keeper device.Electrical Characteristics: 3 V - 49 mAh type BR 1225.Resend the former component to your local GEMS representative for recycling.

2.10.7.2

Download Database Reapply power. Download the database (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters.).

Page 236


[email protected]

2.10.7.1

Procedure

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 237


1:28 PM



Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts Section 1.0 Renewal Parts List Note:

Refer to Section 2.0 for information regarding JEDI Generator Renewal Parts. Item Part No. Description 5183178 5199452 5184620 5182285 5195772 5195778 5195779 5181727

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

5182277 5195615 5191715 5181910 5181374 5184986 5180983 5215489 5184226 5184407 5184488 5184750 5184895 5196542

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

5184245 5184272 5195279 5193099 5193102 5260909 5195278 5196543 5196544 021-0103 021-0129 021-0102 021-0122 5184698 5184364 5183903 5182354 5212348 2259298-75 5308337 5213401

Pioneer console assembly Pioneer console E-board Handswitch TAV board Relay DC24V Power supply 150W Power supply 320W Long electromagnetism brake assembly C (tube stand movement) Line wheel Circle electrical bracket A (up/down) Tube stand top cover (50kW) Pioneer tube support assembly (without clamps) Tube fork clamps Rotundity electricity brake assembly B (tube rotate) Pioneer tube cover assembly (mechanical parts) Table top Long electricity brake assembly B (table top lognitudinal) Table front cover Long electricity brake assembly A (table top transverse) Lock handle (table cassette tray) Foot Pedal Tweak spring Pioneer WS cassette tray spring kit (spring 5193827, twist spring 5193856) Wall Stand bottom cover Wall Stand top cover Switch VS10N051C2 MC3 MC4 cable MC8 cable Key switch Foot pedal switch Bearing kit 1 GB/T276 6001-2Z(021-0141) + 5181681 Bearing kit 2 GB/T276 6001-2Z (021-0141) + 5182435 Bearing GB/T276 6200-2Z Bearing GB/T276 6203-2Z Bearing GB/T276 6000-2Z Bearing GB/T276 609-2Z Bearing outer circle A Nylon outer circle B Pioneer console power cable Pioneer generator console cable Table 78L 10:1 100 cm grid Table 60L 10:1 100 cm grid Tube (50kW): Toshiba E7843X Wall stand with 78L 10:1 180 cm grid Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts

2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 2

[email protected]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Quantity/ unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 5 1 6 4 12 2 19 3 4 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 Page 237

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 238


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Note:

2226687 5189248 5136302 5224261 5224263 5224276 5224272 5224265 5224548 5224274 5224275 2259298-85 5167409-1 5167409-2 5184391 5335073 5184224 5323823 5193838 5184243 5184224

Wall stand with 60L 10:1 180 cm grid Manual collimator Collimator lamp 24V Pioneer PDU breaker Pioneer PDU contactor 50A Pioneer PDU contactor 9A Pioneer PDU Fuse kit Relay MY2J 24VDC NTC board assembly Pioneer PDU transformer 550VA Lose phase monitor HV cables (8 m federal standard high voltage cable) Table ion chamber (same as VR) Wall stand ion chamber (same as VR) Faceplate Tabletop IF board Photo drawer part assembly Bucky Handle Assembly Pioneer WS cassette tray support assembly Table cassette tray WS cassette tray

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

If the part 5192454 needs replacement, please order tube 5308337. Item 2

Item 1

[email protected]

Item 39 Item 38 Item 3

Page 238

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 239


1:28 PM



Item 4

Item 7

[email protected]

Item 53 Item 49

Item 48

Item 47 Item 6 Item 50 (F1~F5)

Item 54 Item 52

Item 11 Item 51

Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts

Page 239

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 240


1:28 PM



Item 31

Item 33

Item 33

Item 30

Item 8

[email protected]

Item 31

Item 30

Item 40, 41, 43, 44

Page 240

Item 30

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 241


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item 9

Item 10 Item 34

[email protected]

Item 46

Item 11

Item 42 Item 45

Item 16

Item 18


Page 241

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 242


1:28 PM



Item 15

Item 28

Item 13

Item 14

Two

Four Totally

Four Totally

Item 32

Page 242

[email protected]

Item 12

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 243


1:28 PM



Item 26

Item 27

Item 34, 37

Item 34, 37

Item 17

[email protected]

Item 34, 37 Item 55


Page 243

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 244


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item 34, 36 Item 34, 36

Item 19

Item 19

Item 35

[email protected]

Item 21

Item 29

Item 21

Item 19

Item 25

Page 244

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 245


1:28 PM



Item 56

Item 57

[email protected]

Item 28

Item 20


Page 245

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 246


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Item 24

Item 34

Item 58

[email protected]

Item 23

Item 61

Page 246

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 247


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Item 22 - 5193827

Note:

1.1

Item 22 - 5193856

If any brake is replaced, please use electric iron to seal the cable.

Bearing kit 5196543, 5196544 1.) Power off. 2.) Demount the tube stand. Please refer to Chapter 2 - Physical Installation - Section 4.0 Integrated Table - 4.2 Tube Stand 3.) Replace the bearing. 4.) Put a standard slide between the idler wheel and the eccentric cam. Then ajust the position of the eccentric cam to assure the clearance between idler wheel and the standard slide is 0.51mm with clearance gauge. See the illustration below.、


Page 247

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 248


1:28 PM



Idler Wheel Put the standard slide here

Eccentric Cam

1.2

1.3

X-Ray Tube (5192454) / Collimator (5189248) Replacement Note:

About disassembly/reassembly of the tube assembly or collimator, please refer to Chapter 2 Physical Installation - Section 4.0 Integrated Table - 4.3 X-Ray Tube ~ 4.4 Control Box and Collimator.

Note:

Accuracy of X-ray field and Light field alignment is required after tube or collimator replacement. For details, please refer to Chapter 4 - Functional Checks - 4.2 Accuracy of X-Ray Field and Light Field Alignment.

Collimator Lamp (5136302) Replacement 1.) Power off. 2.) Loose the fix knob, and rotate the collimator to the location which is convenient for operation.

Page 248

[email protected]

5.) Reinstall the tube stand.Please refer to Chapter 2 - Physical Installation - Section 4.0 Integrated Table - 4.2 Tube Stand

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 249


1:28 PM



3.) Demount the back cover with four screws (two in the back cover, and two in side covers).

Another Screw [email protected]

4.) Replace the collimator lamp.

Note:

Note the former lamp’s location.

5.) Remount back cover, rotate collimator back, and tighten the fix knob. Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts

Page 249

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 250


1:28 PM


1.4


The collimator uses a special Collimator lamp.When the collimator lamp burns out it MUST be replaced with the replacement lamp listed in the renewal parts section. Part number 5136302 MUST be used as a replacement lamp. DO NOT use any other lamp as a replacement bulb as X-ray field to Light field alignment may not meet HHS requirements.

Rotundity Electricity Brake Assembly (5184986) Replacement Note:

About disassembly/reassembly of the tube assembly, please refer to Chapter 2 - Physical Installation - Section 4.0 Integrated Table - 4.3 X-Ray Tube ~ 4.4 Control Box and Collimator. 1.) Power off. 2.) Lower the tube assembly to the location which is convenient for operation. 3.) Disconnect all the cables of X-ray tube, collimator and control box. 4.) Rotate the tube to 180 degree, and let the X-ray window upturned. 5.) Uninstall the collimator. 6.) Uninstall the control box. 7.) Rotate the tube back. 8.) Uninstall the two upper clamps of the tube fork. 9.) Remove the tube, and put it away carefully. 10.) Loosen the three fix screws on the tube arm, and demount the tube fork. 11.) Demount the fix screw. [email protected]

12.) Pull out the tube arm rotation shaft.

Note:

Page 250

Notice the ball bearing.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 251


1:28 PM



[email protected]

13.) Demount the cable clamp, disconnect the cable, and take out the rotundity electricity brake assembly.


Page 251

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 252


1:28 PM



14.) Replace the brake, seal the cable, and fix it with cable clamp. 15.) Refer to the above steps to re-install the parts.

Note:

Wall Stand Cassette Tray Spring Kit (5196542) Replacement 1.) Power off. 2.) Take out wall stand cassette tray. 3.) Demount the two rear covers.

Page 252

[email protected]

1.5

Please refer to Chapter 2 - Physical Installation - Section 6.0 Collimator Alignment to do alignment.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 253


1:28 PM



[email protected]

4.) Replace the springs.

BE CAREFUL OF NOT BE SCRATCHED DURING REPLACING THE SPRINGS. 5.) Remount the covers and insert cassette tray back to wall stand.

1.6

Console Replacement Note:

Please ask customers to write down the APR parameters set by themselves. 1.) Power off. 2.) Disconnect all the cables connected to the console: power cable (J3), communication cable (J4), and handswitch (J1).

Figure 8-1 Disconnect Console Cables 3.) Demount the handswitch socket off from the handswitch mounting plate. 4.) If console stand is ordered, please demount console off from the console stand. If not, please skip this step.


Page 253

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 254


1:28 PM



Figure 8-2 Console Uninstallation 5.) Install the handswitch socket which is demounted before to the mounting plate on the new console. 6.) Connect the related cables. 7.) If console stand is ordered, mount the new console onto the console stand. If not, please skip this step. 8.) Power up. -

32kW or 50kW

-

WS AEC or not

-

Table AEC or not

-

Have WS or not

-

Dose display or not

10.) Retrieve factory default APR database. 11.) Exit configuration mode, and reset system.

1.7

Console Main Board Replacement Note:

Please ask customers to write down the APR parameters set by themselves. 1.) Power off. 2.) If console stand is ordered, please disconnect the power cable (J3) and communication cable (J4), and demount console off from the console stand. If not, please skip this step.

Figure 8-3 Disconnect Console Cables

Page 254

[email protected]

9.) Switch to configuration mode and set the site’s system configuration.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 255


1:28 PM



Figure 8-4 Console Uninstallation 3.) Open the console cover with six screws. 4.) Disconnect all the cable connectors on the main board.

Note:

J14 LCD cable blue side is upside in the socket. 5.) Demount the main board with 8 screws, and mount the new one. 6.) Connect all the cable connectors to the main board.

Note:

J14 LCD cable blue side should be upside in the socket. 8.) If console stand is ordered, mount the console onto the console stand, and connect the related cables. If not, please skip this step. 9.) Power up. 10.) Switch to configuration mode and set the site’s system configuration. -

32kW or 50kW

-

WS AEC or not

-

Table AEC or not

-

Have WS or not

-

Dose display or not

11.) Retrieve factory default APR database. 12.) Exit configuration mode, and reset system.

1.8

Hand Switch Replacement 1.) Power off. 2.) Disconnect the handswitch cable from J1. 3.) Connect the new handswitch cable to J1. 4.) Place the new handswitch handle onto handswitch socket.

1.9

TAV Board Replacement 1.) Power off. 2.) Open table front cover. 3.) Pull out the cabinet tray.


Page 255

[email protected]

7.) Close the console cover with six screws.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 256


1:28 PM



Pull Here Figure 8-5 Pull Out Cabinet Tray 4.) Demount PDU cover. 5.) Demount TAV board cover. 6.) Disconnect the communication cable connector from TAV board J1. 7.) Demount TAV board, and install the new one. 9.) Mount the TAV board cover. 10.) Mount PDU cover. 11.) Push back the cabinet tray under the table.

Push Here

Figure 8-6 Push Back Cabinet Tray 12.) Close table front cover.

Page 256

[email protected]

8.) Connect the communication cable.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 257


1:28 PM



1.10

Table Top IF Board (5335073) Replacement 1.) The default setting for DIP switch S3 as

Table 8-1 DIP-Switch bit

1

2

3

4

XR6000

On

On

On

On

2.) Set DIP switch as following before installing

Table 8-2 DIP-Switch bit

1

2

3

4

XR6000

On

On

On

Off

Section 2.0 JEDI Generator Renewal Parts Introduction This Section provides information for the identification of Renewal Parts for the JEDI 50 R 1T generator.

2.2

JEDI Generator Renewal Parts List Part No.

Description

Quantity /Unit

2212259-2

Generator (Jedi 50 R1T)

1

2409043

Rotation Board JEDI Program V3.02

1

5126988-2

LVPS 3PH V3

1

5126989

Mid Power Inverter Assy

1

5126994-3

Programmed kV Control Board P 3.2

1

5126997

AC/DC 3PH Board Assy

1

5126999

EMC Filter

1

2217057

First Aid Spare

1

2214527

HV Tank (ref: 2186730 FRU order is 2214527)

1

2184567-4

RAD I/F Board

1

5119911

AEC Board

1

2409047

Filament Board

1

99185290

Fuse 15A

1


Page 257

[email protected]

2.1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 258


1:28 PM



2.3

2121569

Power bridge

1

2200700

Inverter Coils Mid Power Assy

1

2159419

Non-Volatile parameters RAM

1

2208000

Assy AEC cable

1

2198191

KV Measure - KV Control cable

1

2215903

ROT/LVPS/Heater cable

1

2214511

System cable

1

5133341

Capa Inverter Assy

2

2202419

I/F RAD - AEC cable (option)

1

2202418

KV control - I/F RAD cable

1

2221983

CAN cable

1

2198185

KV Measure - Gate Command cable

1

FRU Information Information shown for each FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) is explained below. Wherever possible, the FRU or its position is illustrated for easy identification.

Inverter PW Assembly 2187001 

Inverter Capa Assembly 2203900

Items shown in this way are included in the FRU shown immediately above, but may also be ordered separately.

Page 258

Part number for ordering

Notes. These may include: Reference to an illustration with more information Reference to a relevant Disassembly/Reassembly Job Card Items included with the FRU etc.

Section 2.0 JEDI Generator Renewal Parts

[email protected]

FRU name

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 259


1:28 PM



2.4

Jedi 50 R 1T Structure JEDI 50 R 1T 2212259-2 JEDI STD HV Tank 2214527 Power Unit HLB 2214447-2

Module Auxiliaries 50 R 1T 2215808 System cable 2214511 Module Power 50 R 1T 2229597 Equipped AC/DC 50 R 1T 2221722

CAN Cable 2221983

Service Tools 2228546 [email protected]

Interface Module 50 R 1T 2205629-2 First Aid Spares 2217057

AEC Board (option) 2204112-2

AEC I/F Cable 2202419


Page 259

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 260


1:28 PM



2.5

Renewal Parts AC/DC Unit

Interface Unit

Power Unit

Auxiliary Unit

TOP VIEW

AC/DC Unit

Auxiliary Unit

Power Unit

Jedi Standard HV Tank REAR VIEW Figure 8-7 JEDI 50 R 1T Generator Location of Main Assemblies Miscellaneous Items: First aid spares: 1 short circuit cable 1 fuse 15 A 700 VDC 1 fuse 10 A 250 V 10 M4-8 mm screws 10 tie-wraps

Page 260

Services tools Service software, 2227656 RS232 Cable, 2207478


[email protected]

Interface Unit

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 261


1:28 PM



AC/DC 3 Phase Mid Power Assy (Board & Rectifier + 2 cables) 2214995 5126997 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-30

EMC Filter Board 2209840 5126999 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-29

AC/DC Unit

AEC Board V1 2184569-2 5119911 AEC Board V22222253 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-36

RAD I/F Board V1 2184567-4 RAD I/F Board V2 2226456FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-25

[email protected]

Interface Unit

Rotor Board High Speed 2214605-3 2409043 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-35

LV Power Supply 3 Ph Board 2212166 5126988-2 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-33

Filament Board 1 Inv. 2214604 2409047 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-34

Auxiliary Unit

Figure 8-8 JEDI 50 R 1T AC/DC Unit, Interface Unit & Auxiliary Unit


Page 261

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 262


1:28 PM



Inverter Coils Mid Power Assy 2200700 FRU: 2 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-31

A

Capa Inverter Assy 2229505 5133341 FRU: 2 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-32

Non-Volatile parameters RAM 2159419 FRU: 2 Job Card PM JEDI 15-2 Programmed kV Control Board 2214606-2 5126994-3 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-26

A Jedi Standard HV Tank 2214527 FRU: 1 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-23

Figure 8-9 JEDI 50 R 1T Power Unit

Page 262


[email protected]

Inverter Mid Power Assy 2215814FRU: 1 5126989 Job Card D/R JEDI 17-24

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 263


1:28 PM



2.6

Cables DC_BUS N to INVERTER DC_BUS P to INVERTER DC_BUS to Auxiliary Unit (Rotation Board)

88 Not Used

J1

9pts

AEC Board

J4 Not Used Not Used Room Door Interface

W22 Service Laptop Console

9 pts

J7

9 pts

J5

9 pts

J6

9 pts

J8

25 pts

J9

PH3PH2PH1 16 pts

J3

DC_BUS+ DC_BUSJ1J2J3

DC_BUS to Power Unit (Gate Command Board)

DC_BUS M

J5 PH1 PH2

J2&TP2J1&TP1

PH3

9pts 9pts

EMC Board

AC/DC Board

I/F Board

64 pts

J10

16 J3 pts

1 1 22 AC/DC Unit THREE PHASES + Ground from PDU

9

AEC2 pts

Interface Unit

Keyed Connections

1

I/F RAD - AEC cable

5

2202419

2

Assy AEC cable

6


CAN cable 2221983


KV Measure - KV Control cable 2198191

7

2202418

4

From KV Control board

2198185

2208000

3

[email protected]

3 3

9 AEC1 pts

ROT / LVPS / Heater cable 2215903

8

System cable 2214511


Page 263

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 264


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 8 8 DC_BUS N

70 o C

DC_BUS P DC_BUS to ACDC Unit J1 DC_BUS to ACDC Unit J3

Rotor

to Tube

to Tube

NP

anode

1

cathode 11

Power Unit

Inverter

grey red

1 1

J3

HV Tank

1

- + L0 S F F

1 -+ ACP

J3

J1A

KV Measure Board J1

J2A

CF-N CF-P

J1

CF3 CF4

77

CAN

66 J2

26 pts

J1

44

50pts

LVPS

CAN Board CF1 CF2

1

55 KV Control Board

26pts

J2 J2

J3

34 pts J2 50pts

to IF Board

1

26pts

J1

Gate J4 Command1 34 Board pts

33

1

1

Rotation Board High Speed

ILr ILp blue

6 5 4 3

J2

26 pts J1

grey

9

26pts

CF1 CF2

Filament Board 1 Inv. 1

26

J3 pts

Auxiliary Unit

64 pts

1

I/F RAD - AEC cable

5

2202419

2

Assy AEC cable

2198185

6

2208000

3


CAN cable 2221983

KV Measure - KV Control cable 2198191

7

2202418

4


ROT / LVPS / Heater cable 2215903

8

System cable 2214511

Section 3.0 JEDI Generator Disassembly/Reassembly 3.1

Introduction This section provides information to dismount and remount FRU (Field Replaceable Unit).

3.2

Tools Serviceability of Jedi Generator requires the following tools:

Page 264


[email protected]

Keyed Connections

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 265


1:28 PM



K J I

F

C

E

a

B

3.3.1

G H

Digital Multimeter

(A)

Phillips Screwdriver

(B)

Allen Key

(C)

Screwdriver With Interchangeable Socket Head

(D)

Long Extension for Ratchet Wrench

(E)

Short Extension for Ratchet Wrench Cutting Pliers High Voltage Wrench Ratchet Wrench Socket Wrench Hexagonal Head Socket Set

(F) (G) (H) (I) (J) (K)

[email protected]

3.3

D

HV Tank, 1 Tube, 1-3 Phase Supplies None

3.3.2

3.3.3

Tools •

5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

•

3 mm Allen wrench.

•

13 mm socket with ratchet.

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.3.4

Prerequisites Remove the generator from the table and put it on its bottom side on the floor or on a work bench.


Page 265

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 266


1:28 PM



Upload the database that is stored in the RAM before starting the replacement procedure (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters).

THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.

3.3.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.3.6

Time 1 hour 30 minutes.

3.3.7

Disassembly 1.) To release the Power Unit, follow the instructions of Disassembly / Reassembly procedure of 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly. Observe the Caution relating to dangerous voltages, and the Warning relating to the weight of the generator! Do not remove the two EMC panels from the top of the Power Unit. 2.) Disconnect the cable 1 connected to J3 on the KV Measure Board. [email protected]

3.) Disconnect the short ribbon cable 2 connecting J2 on the Gate Command board (Inverter Assembly) to J1 on the KV Measure Board (HV Tank). 4.) Disconnect the wider short ribbon cable 3 connecting J2 on the KV Control Board to J2 on the KV Measure board (HV Tank). 5.) Using a 13 mm socket wrench, remove the three nuts 4 attaching the primary coil flat cables

Page 266


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 267


1:28 PM



to the round capacitors located on the shelf just above the KV Control Board.

6.) Remove the two screws 5 on the HV Tank rear side. Take great care not to let screws fall into the HV connector receptacles. Cover them with plastic caps.

6 [email protected]

7.) Remove the 5.5 mm screws: three at the front side 6 (two at right, one at left) and three at the right side 7 .


Page 267

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 268


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 8.) At the rear side, remove the eight 3 mm Allen screws 8 Inverter Mid Power Assembly to the HV Tank.

which secure the heat sink of the

9.) Take off the assembly constitued by five parts: EMC covers, Coils Inverter Assy, Capa Inverter Assy, Mid Power Assy and KV Control Board. The HV Tank is now free 9 .

9

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedure to reassemble and replace the unit. 1.) Mount the flat cable J1 on the kV Measure Board of the new HV Tank (refer to (refer to Disassembly section 2 ). 2.) Reassemble the HV Tank with the other elements of the Power Unit (refer to Disassembly section 9 ). 3.) Mount the eight 3 mm Allen screws to secure the heat sink of the Inverter Mid Power Assembly to the HV Tank. (refer to section Disassembly

8 ).

Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm). 4.) Put back the 3 front 5.5 mm hex head screws (refer to section Disassembly 6 ), one at the left side,two at the right side. Tighten them between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). 5.) Reconnect the short ribbon cable from J1 on the KV Measure board to J2 on the Gate Command board (refer to section Disassembly 2

).

6.) Using the 13 mm socket wrench, connect the primary coil flat cables to the three capacitors 1

Page 268


[email protected]

3.3.8

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 269


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 ).

1

2

The two flat cables with white bands on them go both together on the middle capacitor with the parallel resonant cable (refer to section Reassembly 2 ).

Tighten the nuts to 8 N.m (80 kg.cm). 8.) Reconnect the wider short ribbon cable from J2 on the kV Control board to J2 on the kV Measure Board (refer to section Disassembly 3 ). 9.) Mount the two 5.5 hex head screws securing the cover to the HV Tank on the HV outlet side (refer to section Disassembly 5 ) and the three screws on the other side (refer to section Disassembly 7 ). Tighten the screws between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). 10.) Mount the Power Unit on the support plate.

THE POWER UNIT WEIGHTS 30 KG (66 POUNDS). 11.) Refer to Disassembly / Reassembly procedure of 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly to complete reassembly of the Unit. 12.) Put 5 cl of oil into the HV receptacles. Reconnect the HV cables.

3.3.9

Verify Connect the service laptop (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.3 Service Software User Guide) and proceed to "HV no load diagnostics" to ensure correct operation. Skip steps "Gate Command and Inverter in Short Circuit" diagnostics.

3.4 3.4.1

Inverter Mid-Power Assembly Supplies None


Page 269

[email protected]

7.) Reconnect the cable to J3 on the KV Measure Board (refer to section Disassembly 1 ).

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 270


1:28 PM


3.4.2

3.4.3


Tools •


•

3 mm Allen wrench.

•


•

C-clamp for HV connections.

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.THESE LEDS INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF DANGEROUS VOLTAGE ON THE POWER SUPPLY CAPACITORS. Look through the front of the power unit; observe leds ds 1 at the top of the dual snub board and ds 300 at the right hand end of the gate command board. if either is lit, wait until both are off before proceeding further. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.4.4


3.4.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.4.6

Time 2 hours.

Page 270


[email protected]

THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 271


1:28 PM



3.4.7

Disassembly 3

1

1

3

4

4

2

2 5

TOP VIEW

FRONT VIEW

5

1

4

AC/DC UNIT

2

POWER UNIT

3

INTERFACE UNIT

4

AUXILIARY UNIT

5

SUPPORT PLATE

3

AEC2 AEC2

AEC1 AEC1

TABLE TABLE BUCKY BUCKY WALL WALL BUCKY BUCKY DOOR DOOR LAPTOP LAP TOP CONSOLE CONSOLE

Figure 8-10 JEDI 50 R 1T Generator General View


Page 271

[email protected]

2

1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 272


1:28 PM



3.4.7.1

Remove the Auxiliary Unit

1

2

3

1.) Disconnect the connectors J2 and J3 and ground cable on the top of the generator 1 . 2.) Remove four 5.5 mm hex head securing screws holding the Auxiliary Unit on the support plate

2

. , without tearing, between the Auxiliary Unit and the

Interface Unit. 4.) Remove the Auxiliary Unit.

3.4.7.2

Remove the Interface Unit

2 1 3

1.) The Interface Unit appears after removing the Auxiliary Unit. Release the flat ribbon cable 1 ,making it sliding along the cover panel 2

of the Interface Unit.

2.) Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws that retain the cover panel and remove this one 2 . 3.) On the I/F Rad Board, disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable J10 3 Board.

Page 272


linked to the KV Control

[email protected]

3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 3

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 273


1:28 PM



THE POWER UNIT WEIGHTS 30 KILOGRAMS (66 POUNDS). DO NOT TRY TO LIFT IT WITHOUT ASSISTANCE. 4.) Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws securing the Interface Unit box to the Power box. 5.) Taking care of the flat wide ribbon cable 3 ,remove the Interface Unit box. The components of the Power Unit appear: coils assembly, capacitors assembly, KV Control Board.

3

Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate

[email protected]

3.4.7.3

3 5

2

1

2

5

4

1.) On the top of the generator, the two connectors

1 are fixed mecanically on the support

plate. Unscrew connectors screws in order to release the 4 power cables 2 the Power Unit and the AC/DC Unit.

coming from

2.) Remove the screw securing the ground cable on the AC/DC Unit. Disconnect the cable 3 linking the AC/DC Unit and the Power Unit 4 . 3.) Remove the four screws 5 on the support plate in order to release the Power Unit. This one is then free.


Page 273

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 274


1:28 PM



3.4.7.4

Remove the Inverter Mid Power Assembly

2

[email protected]

1

3

1.) Remove the 5.5 mm hex head screws which secure the two EMC cover panels 1 side of the Power Unit; remove the panels.

at each

2.) With a 10 mm socket wrench with ratchet 2 ,remove the three hex head screws securing the

Page 274


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 275


1:28 PM



cables Q100C 3 , Q100E and Q200C on the Inverter Mid Power Assembly.

5

A

[email protected]

A

7 6 8

3.) Disconnect flat ribbon cables from J1 and J3 on the Gate Command Board 4 and disconnnect J4 at the right hand side of the board. 4.) With 10 mm wrench, disconnect the parallel Coil connection from the Current Transformer pass through 5 and with 13 mm wrench the other connection from the Capacitor Assembly 6 . 5.) Remove the eight 3 mm Allen screws 7 which secure the Inverter Mid Power Assembly to the HV Tank.


Page 275

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 276


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 6.) Remove the Inverter Mid Power Assembly 8

3.4.8

.

Reassembly 1.) Present the new Inverter assembly. Put back the eight 3 mm Allen screws to secure the Inverter Mid Power assembly to the HV Tank (refer to section 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly 7 ). Tighten them firmly to torque 2 N.m (20 kg.cm). 2.) Remount all cables that were removed: a.) Remount the three Coil cables on the Inverter IGBT's with three 5.5 mm screws. Tighten them firmly to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).

[email protected]

RESPECT THE ORIENTATION OF THE CABLES TO THE IGBTS CONNECTIONS TO AVOID CABLE CONTACT WITH TOP COVER. b.) Reconnect the short flat cable between the HV Tank and the Gate Command board (J3), and the inverter current feedback cable (J1) on the Gate Command board (refer to section 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly 4 ). c.)

Reconnect the DC bus cable to J4 to the right hand side of the Gate Command board.

+

Top J4

-

d.) With the 10 mm screw and flat and lock washer, reconnect the shorter cable of the parallel coil on the Inverter assembly onto the right hand side current transformer (Ti1/100) pass through. A . Tighten to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm) torque.

Page 276


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 277


1:28 PM



B

e.) With the 13 mm screw, with flat and lock washer, reconnect the longer cable of the coil on the central capacitor (C3UF) of the Capacitor assembly, together with the two primary HV Transformer flat wires (the two with a white ring). B Tighten to 8 N.m (80 kg.cm) torque. 3.) Perform an overall inspection before proceeding. Use the following illustration to check the connections are right. [email protected]


Page 277

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 278


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Parallel Coil Q100C

Q200C C

C Q100E E

Inverter Assembly

E

Coil Assembly

+

+ DC

Ti1/40

Ti1/100

-

- DC Capa Assembly

HV Tank

4.) Remount the two EMC panels on the top of Power Unit with the 5.5 hex head screws. Tighten all the cover screws to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm) 5.) Assemble the Power Unit with the AC/DC Unit on the support plate with 5.5 mm hex head screws. Put back in place the disconnected cables: ground, DC bus (refer to section 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly). 6.) Remount the Interface Unit on the support plate then the Auxiliary Unit. Follow the inverse procedure indicated in the sections and . 7.) Remount the generator inside the table.

3.4.9

Verify Run HV LOAD DIAGNOSTIC - "Inverter in Short Circuit Diagnostics" and "Inverter Gate Command Diagnostic" are not pre-requested. Verify correct operation on the whole application range.

3.5 3.5.1

I/F Board RAD Supplies None

Page 278


[email protected]

C3UF

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 279


1:28 PM



3.5.2

Tools 5.5 mm nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

3.5.3


3.5.4

Prerequisites Remove the generator from the table and put it on its bottom side on the floor or on a work bench. THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.

3.5.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.5.6

Time

3.5.7

Disassembly The I/F Board Rad is situed in the Interface Unit. To reach this Unit, the Auxiliary Unit has to be released from the generator. Follow the instructions of 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.

3.5.7.1

Remove the I/F Board Rad

1

4

2

5 3

1.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 1 and the two cables 2 , if existing, coming from the AEC Board. 2.) Disconnect the flat wide ribbon cable J10 coming from the KV Control Board 3 .


Page 279

[email protected]

15 minutes.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 280


1:28 PM



3.) Remove the four screws of connectors J8 and J9 4 . 4.) Remove the ten 5.5 mm screws 5

3.5.8

securing the Interface Board Rad; remove the board.

Reassembly 1.) Reverse the disassembly procedure to reassemble the unit. Tighten screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). 2.) Power the system on and verify that the system functions properly.

3.6 3.6.1

KV Board RAD Supplies None

3.6.2

3.6.3

Tools •


•

10 mm Allen wrench.

•


Safety Precautions

3.6.4

Prerequisites Remove the generator from the table and put it on its bottom side on the floor or on a work bench. THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT. The KV Control board contains a saved memory Database with essentially the following parameters:

•

Tube configuration parameters, AEC calibration parameters, and Room configuration (workstation, AEC, screen film pairs).

•

Filament aging variable

•

Error Log

•

Recorded parameter data

If it is possible, backup database first. Else, the diagram hereafter helps you to determine the action to take for your situation.

Page 280


[email protected]

BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 281


1:28 PM



First Calibration

Configura* tion

Upload Database

Yes

Save Non Volatile RAM Database

DB Upload Possible?

KV Control Out of Order

Is original DB saved? (*)

No

No

Yes

SW OK?

Replace KV Control

Replace KV Control

Replace KV Control

No

Download Software

Yes

Yes

Yes

SW OK?

No

No

Download Software

Download Software

Download Original Database (*)

Configura* tion if applicable

Calibrate if applicable

Reset Database: * Date * Time * Clear Error log

Operational Checks

Save Non Volatile RAM Database

(*) or most recent

3.6.5

END

Personnel 1 person.


Page 281

[email protected]

Download Database

SW OK?

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 282


1:28 PM


3.6.6


Time 45 minutes.

3.6.7

Disassembly The KV Control board spare is pre-loaded with NP/NP+ software.  It will be required to download the software that is on site. DATABASE RESTORE IS MANDATORY.

3.6.7.1

Remove the Auxiliary Unit Remove the Auxiliary Unit as described in 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.

3.6.7.2

Remove the Interface Unit Remove the Interface Unit as described in 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.

3.6.7.3

Remove the kV Control Board

[email protected]

1.) Disconnect the cables from J1, J2 and J3 on the kV Control Board 1 . 2.) Remove the seven 5.5 mm hex head screws which secure the kV Control Board; remove the board 2 .

3.6.8

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the KV Control board and the Interface Unit. Tighten 5.5 mm screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

3.6.9

Verify 1.) Connect the Service Laptop (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.3 Service Software User Guide). 2.) Reapply power and verify that the 8 LEDs on KV Control board are scrolling. 3.) Verify software version (service floppy, menu 5) -

If it corresponds to the software version on the floppy delivered with the equipment (or upgraded by FMI), proceed to Database Restore (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters).

-

If not, download the software and proceed to Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards - Section 1.0 Software Download / Upgrade.

4.) Restore Database (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters). Page 282


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 283


1:28 PM



-

Up-to-date database if available

-

Most recent or originally saved Data Base if available

-

Default one from the floppy delivered with the equipment in the Service Tool set.

Alternately, you may try to swap the NVRAM chip (U32) from the former to the new KV Control board to keep all the parameters. Refer to Chapter 7 - Planned Maintenance - 2.10 Replace Generator NonVolatile Parameters RAM“Replace Non Volatile Parameters RAM” JobCard. If this chip is not involved in the failure or the cause for replacement, it will allow to keep up-to-date data. 5.) Calibrate: -

Perform several exposures on both focus in several workstation, with exposure time longer than 12.5 ms.

If default database was restored, it is necessary to resume room set up and AEC calibration (if present) (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.6 Automatic AEC Calibration). Then perform the checksum (refer to Chapter 3 - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.8 Checksum Validation). 6.) Save Database on the service floppy delivered with the equipment (refer to Chapter 3 Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 Backup and Restore Database Parameters).

3.7 3.7.1

EMC Board 3 Phases Supplies None.


3.7.3


3.7.4

Prerequisites Remove the generator from the table and put it on its bottom side on the floor or on a work bench. THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHTS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.

3.7.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.7.6

Time 45 minutes.


Page 283

[email protected]

3.7.2

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 284


1:28 PM


3.7.7


Disassembly

3.7.7.1

Remove the AC/DC Unit

1.) On the top of the generator, disconnect the connectors J1 and J2 1 . coming from the AC/DC Unit 2 . 3.) Disconnect the ground cable 3 . 4.) Remove the four 5.5 mm screws securing the AC/DC Unit to the support plate 4 . The AC/ DC Unit is now free 5 .

Page 284


[email protected]

2.) On the support plate, unscrew connectors screws in order to release the 2 power cables

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 285


1:28 PM



3.7.7.2

Remove the EMC Board

1

3

5 2

2.) Remove the three nuts 1 securing the phase cables and three screws 2 retaining the EMC board to the rectifier block. 3.) Unscrew nine 5.5 mm hex head screws 3 and remove the EMC Board 4 .

3.7.8

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the EMC board. Tighten 5.5 mm screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Ensure that U1 screw is tighten to the torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Refer to Disassembly 5 .

Remount the generator inside the table.

3.7.9

Verify Reapply power and verify the presence of 3 phases. Verify that the system functions correctly.

3.8

AC/DC 3 PH Mid Power Assembly

3.8.1

Supplies None.

3.8.2

Tools •

5.5 mm socket, with ratchet if possible (to remove cover and board)

•

10 mm socket with ratchet (to remove DC and rectifier cables) Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts

Page 285

[email protected]

1.) Remove ten 5.5 mm hex head screws which retain the cover. Remove that one.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 286


1:28 PM


•

3.8.3


Large Philips screw driver (to remove cables from the rectifier block).

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED.

1.) Insure that the neon (orange) indicator light on the board has gone out. 2.) Be careful touching components on this board; some become very hot. 3.) To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.8.4


3.8.5

Disassembly

Note:

Remove the AC/DC Unit

1.) On the top of the generator, disconnect the connectors J1 and J2 1 . 2.) On the support plate, unscrew connectors screws in order to release the 2 power cables coming from the AC/DC Unit 2 . 3.) Disconnect the ground cable 3 . 4.) Remove the four 5.5 mm screws securing the AC/DC Unit to the support plate 4 . The AC/ DC Unit is now free 5 .

Page 286


[email protected]

3.8.5.1

The AC/DC 3 Phases Mid Power Assembly is made up of two main elements: AC/DC Board 3 Phases and Rectifier Block 3 Phases.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 287


1:28 PM



3.8.5.2

Remove the AC/DC Board

1.) Remove fourteen 5.5 mm hex head screws which retain the cover. Remove that one. 2.) Remove the two DC cables fastened with 10 mm nuts on the board 1 . [email protected]

3.) Remove two screws retaining the AC/DC board to the rectifier block 2 . 4.) Remove seven 5.5 mm hex head screws 3 and lift out the AC/DC Board 4 .

3.8.5.3

Remove the Rectifier Block

1.) The Rectifier Block 1 appears after removing the EMC Board (refer to 3.7 EMC Board 3 Phases) and the AC/DC Board. 2.) With the Allen key 3 mm, unscrew the 2 screws 2 holding the rectifier to the chassis and remove the block.

3.8.6

Reassembly 1.) Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the AC/DC 3 PH Mid Power Assembly and the


Page 287

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 288


1:28 PM



EMC Board. 2.) Tighten the 10 mm cable retaining nuts to 3 N.m (30 kg.cm), and the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Ensure cable terminals are repositioned as noticed before. Verify that the + and - DC Bus cables are not reversed to prevent damage to the Inverter (Refer to section Disassembly 1 . The Rectifier Block has to be placed with the two poles in regard of the AC/DC Board (Refer to section Disassembly 1 . Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the Rectifier Block and the chassis. This grease, called: Conductive Surface Compound, provides both thermal and electrical conductivity that is important in reducing failure of the rectifier.

3.) Remount the generator inside the table.

3.8.7

Verify Reapply power and verify that the system functions correctly.

3.9.1

Inverter Coil Mid Power Assembly Supplies None.

3.9.2

3.9.3

Tools •


•

3 mm Allen wrench.

•



3.9.4


3.9.5

Personnel 1 person.

Page 288


[email protected]

3.9

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 289


1:28 PM



3.9.6

Time 2 hours.

3.9.7

Disassembly RESPECT THE CAUTION RELATING TO DANGEROUS VOLTAGE.

3.9.7.1

Remove the Auxiliary Unit and the Interface Unit Remove these Units as described in Disassembly / Reassembly procedure for 3.4 Inverter MidPower Assembly.

3.9.7.2

Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate as described in 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly. THE POWER UNIT IS NOW FREE BUT IT WEIGHTS 30 KILOGRAMS (66 POUNDS). DO NOT TRY TO LIFT IT WITHOUT ASSISTANCE.

3.9.7.3

Remove the Inverter Coil Mid Power Assembly 2 [email protected]

1

3

A

1.) On the Power Unit, remove the 5.5 mm hex head screws 1 which secure the L-shaped EMC cover panel 2 ; remove this one. 2.) With a 10 mm socket wrench with ratchet 3 , remove the three hex head screws 4 securing Chapter 8 - Renewal Parts

Page 289

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 290


1:28 PM



the cables Q100C, Q100E and Q200C on the Inverter Mid Power Assembly.

7

7

5

6

6

3.) Remove the 10 mm screw 5 on the left current transformer Ti1/40 pass through, top of the Capacitor assembly. Retain the washers and release the cable. 4.) Disconnect the two cables linking coils to capacitors at right and left 6 Use a socket wrench to remove screws. 5.) On each side 7 , remove one 5.5 mm screw holding the coils support.

8

3.9.8

Reassembly 1.) Present the new Inverter Coil assembly and mount one 5.5 mm hex head screw on each side of the frame to hold the Coil assembly (refer to 3.9 Inverter Coil Mid Power Assembly removed 7 . Tighten to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm) 2.) Remount all cables that were removed. a.) Remount the three Coil cables on the Inverter Mid Power Assembly (IGBTS) with three

Page 290


[email protected]

6.) Remove the Inverter Coil assembly 8 .

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 291


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 screws

1 . There is a locking washer between the screws and the cable.

Tighten firmly to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).

through 2 (refer to section Disassembly 5 . Tighten firmly to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).

c.)

Using a socket wrench, connect the two cables linking coils to capacitors at right and left (refer to section Disassembly 6 . Tighten to torque between 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

3.) Refer to Disassembly / Reassembly procedure for 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.


Page 291

[email protected]

RESPECT THE ORIENTATION OF THE CABLES TO THE IGBTS CONNECTIONS TO AVOID CABLE CONTACT WITH TOP COVER. b.) With the 10 mm screw, with flat and lock washer, remount the remaining cable from the right coil (of the Coil assembly) onto the upper left current transformer Ti1/40 pass

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 292


1:28 PM


3.9.9


Verify It is recommended to perform the “No load HV“ diagnostics test. “INVERTER GATE” and “INVERTER in Short Circuit ” diagnostics are not pre-requested. Verify correct operation on the whole application range.

3.10

Capacitor Inverter Assembly

3.10.1

Supplies None.

3.10.2

3.10.3

Tools •


•

10 mm allen wrench.

•


Safety Precautions

ENSURE THERE IS NO VOLTAGE ON THE DC BUS CABLE.

3.10.4


THE WHOLE GENERATOR WEIGHTS 63 KILOGRAMS (139 POUNDS). TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO CARRY IT.

3.10.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.10.6

Time 3 hours.

3.10.7

Disassembly RESPECT THE CAUTION RELATING TO DANGEROUS VOLTAGE.

3.10.7.1

Remove the Auxiliary Unit and the Interface Unit Remove these Units as described in 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.

3.10.7.2

Remove the AC/DC Unit and the Support Plate Remove the AC/DC Unit and the support plate together as described in 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly.

Page 292


[email protected]

BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 293


1:28 PM



THE POWER UNIT IS NOW FREE BUT IT WEIGHTS 30 KILOGRAMS (66 POUNDS). DO NOT TRY TO LIFT IT WITHOUT ASSISTANCE.

3.10.7.3

Remove the Capacitor Inverter Assembly 1

2

1.) On the Power Unit, remove the 5.5 mm hex head screws 1 which secure the L-shaped EMC [email protected]

cover panel 2 ; ; remove this one.

3

2.) Remove the cable from connector J1 3 on the Gate Command Board.


Page 293

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 294


1:28 PM


GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 3.) Disconnect the Filament cable J3 4 from the HV Tank.

6

5

8

6

8

4

4.) Remove the 10 mm 5 and 13 mm screws 6 on the top side , and the 13 mm screws 7 on the lower side of the Capacitor assembly. Release the cables. 5.) Remove the four left and right 5.5 mm screws 8 holding the Capacitor assembly. 6.) Remove the Capacitor Inverter Assembly 9 .

9

3.10.8

Reassembly 1.) Present the new capacitor assembly. 2.) Mount two 5.5 mm hex head screws to hold the Capacitor assembly (refer to section Disassembly 8 ) ).

Page 294


[email protected]

7

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 295


1:28 PM



3.) Reconnect the cable J1 on the Gate Command Board (refer to section Disassembly 3 ).

4.) Attach the shorter cable (parallel coil) on the upper right current transformer (Ti1/100) pass through with a 10 mm screw 1 Tighten to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).

and its washers (refer to section Disassembly 5 .

5.) Remount the DC+ cable and the corresponding serial coil cable together on the upper left side of the capacitor assembly with a 13 mm screw and its washers (refer to section Disassembly 6 . Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm).

Disassembly 6 . Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm). 7.) Remount the remaining serial coil cable to the upper left current transformer (Ti1/40) pass through with a 10 mm screw 1 to torque 3 N.m (30 kg.cm).

and its washers (refer to section Disassembly 5 . Tighten

8.) Run the ”INVERTER IN SHORT CIRCUIT” diagnostic:

HV TANK PRIMARY CABLES ARE DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. Note:

Connect the short circuit cable (included in the first aid kit) between the left capacitor and the central capacitor (see picture in ”Inverter In Short Circuit diagnostics”). a.) Tighten one extremity of the short circuit on the left capacitor with a 13 mm screw and its washers. Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm). b.) Mount the longer wire (Parallel Coil) and the other extremity of the short circuit on the central capacitor (C3UF) with a 13 mm screw and its washers. Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm),


Page 295

[email protected]

6.) Remount the DC- cable and the corresponding serial coil cable together on the upper right side of the capacitor assembly with a 13 mm screw and its washers (refer to section

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 296


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE  DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL Use the illustration below to check the connections are right: Parallel Coil Q100C

Q200C C

C Q100E E

Inverter Assembly

E

Coil Assembly

+

Ti1/40

+ DC

Ti1/100

-

- DC

Capa Assembly

c.)

C3UF

Reassemble the Power Unit with AC/DC Unit, Interface Unit and Auxiliary Unit (refer to 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly).

d.) Run “inverter short circuit diagnostics”. 9.) After ”INVERTER SHORT CIRCUIT” diagnostics, disassemble the Auxiliary Unit and the Interface Unit (see section Disassembly). Remove the short circuit cable. 10.) On the central capacitor (C3UF), attach together the two flat wires of the primary coils of the HV transformer that have a white ring 2 and the longer wire of Parallel Coil with a 13 mm screw and its washers. Tighten to torque 8 N.m (80 kg.cm).

2

3

3

11.) Mount the two remaining flat cables 3 from the HV Tank with 13 mm screws and their Page 296


[email protected]

SHORT CIRCUIT

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 297


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE  DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL washers underneath the capacitor assembly, one on the left side, one on the right side. 12.) Reconnect the Filament cable J3 on the HV Tank (refer to section Disassembly 4 . 13.) Mount the two last remaining 5.5 mm hex head screws on the left and right side of the frame (refer to section Disassembly). Tighten to torque 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). 14.) Reassemble the Power Unit. Mount it with the AC/DC Unit, the Interface Unit and the Auxiliary Unit on the support plate (Refer to 3.4 Inverter Mid-Power Assembly).

3.10.9

Verify It is recommended to perform the “No load HV“ diagnostics test. Verify correct operation on the whole application range.

3.11

LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board

3.11.1

Supplies None.

3.11.2

Tools 5.5 mm hex nut driver or socket wrench with ratchet.

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. 1.) Insure that the Neon N1 (orange) indicator light on the LVPS Board has gone out. 2.) Be careful touching components on the LVPS Board. Some become very hot. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.11.4



3.11.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.11.6

Time 15 minutes.


Page 297

[email protected]

3.11.3

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 298


1:28 PM


3.11.7 3.11.7.1


Disassembly Remove the Auxiliary Unit

1.) Disconnect the connectors J2 and J3 and the ground cable on the top of the generator 1 .

plate 5 . 3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 3 without tearing, between the Auxiliary Unit 4 and the Interface Unit 6 . 4.) Remove the Auxiliary Unit.

Page 298


[email protected]

2.) Remove four 5.5 mm hex head securing screws 2 olding the Auxiliary Unit 4 on the support

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 299


1:28 PM



3.11.7.2

Remove the LV Power Supply Board

2.) Disconnect the 3 cables 1 , 2 , 3 from the LV Power Supply 3 Phases board 4 . 3.) Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board

4 .

3.11.8

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the LV Power Supply 3 Phases Board.

Verify that the following cables are not reversed before power ON (refer to section 3.11.7.2 Remove the LV Power Supply Board: 1.) Cables CF2 (+DC BUS) and CF1 (- DC BUS) 2 . 2.) Cables CF4 (160 V) and CF3 (0 V)

3 .

Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Remount the auxiliary unit on the generator support plate. Remount the generator inside the table.

3.11.9

Verify Verify that the system functions correctly.


Page 299

[email protected]

1.) The Auxiliary Unit being free, unscrew ten 5.5 hex head screws and remove its cover.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 300


1:28 PM


3.12


Filament Board 1 INV

3.12.1

Supplies None.

3.12.2


3.12.3

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. 1.) Insure that the Neon DS3 (green) indicator light on the Filament Board has gone out. 2.) Be careful touching components on the Filament Board . Some become very hot. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.12.4


3.12.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.12.6

Time 15 minutes.

Page 300


[email protected]


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 301


1:28 PM



3.12.7 3.12.7.1



2 holding the Auxiliary Unit 4

on the

support plate 5 . 3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 3 , without tearing, between the Auxiliary Unit 4

and the

Interface Unit 6 . 4.) Remove the Auxiliary Unit.


Page 301

[email protected]

2.) Remove four 5.5 mm hex head securing screws

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 302


1:28 PM



3.12.7.2

Remove the Filament Board

2.) Disconnect the ribbon cable . Disconnect

1 between the Filament Board

2 and the connector J2

4

and the LVPS Board

5

3 .

3.) Unscrew the six 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the Filament Board 1 INV 4 .

3.12.8

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedures to reinstall the Filament Board 1 INV.

Verify that cables CF4 (160 V) and CF3 (0 V) 2 are not reversed before power ON (refer to section 3.12.7.2 Remove the Filament Board). Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Remount the auxiliary unit on the generator support plate. Remount the generator inside the table.

3.12.9

Verify Verify that the system functions correctly. Run Heater Function Diagnostics.

3.13 3.13.1

Rotor Board High Speed Supplies None.

Page 302


[email protected]

1.) The Auxiliary Unit being free, unscrew ten 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove its cover.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 303


1:28 PM



3.13.1.1


3.13.2

Safety Precautions BEFORE ANY MANUAL INTERVENTION, ENSURE THE MAIN POWER IS OFF. APPLY LOCK OUT - TAG OUT PROCEDURE FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY WHEN MANIPULATING INSIDE THE EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. 1.) Insure that the Neon DS7 (orange) indicator light on the Rotor Board has gone out. 2.) Be careful touching components on the Rotor Board. Some become very hot. To protect the circuit boards, do not forget to wear the antistatic bracelet.

3.13.3



3.13.4


3.13.5

Time 15 minutes.

3.13.6 3.13.6.1


1.) Disconnect the connectors J2 and J3 and the ground cable on the top of the generator 1 . 2.) Remove four 5.5 mm hex head securing screws


on the

support plate 5 .


Page 303

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 304


1:28 PM



3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 3 , without tearing, between the Auxiliary Unit 4

and the


3.13.6.2

Remove the Rotor Board

2.) Disconnect the ribbon cable 1

between the Rotor Board High Speed 4 and the LVPS

Board 5 Disconnect cables CF1 and CF2 2 . 3.) Unscrew two 5.5 mm hex head screws that are in holes 3 below the surface of the board and that secure an IGBT. 4.) Unscrew the eight 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove the Rotor Board High Speed 4 .

Be careful to preserve the special grease that is spread between the IGBT and a heat sink under the Rotation Board. This grease, called "Conductive Surface Compound", provides both thermal and electrical conductivity that are important in reducing failure of the IGBT.

3.13.7

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedure to reinstall the Rotor Board High Speed. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

Ensure that cables are correctly connected. Ensure that marks on the cables match the marks on the board. Remount the cover. Tighten the 5.5 mm hex head screws to 1.5 to 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm). Remount the auxiliary unit on the generator support plate. Remount the generator inside the table.

Page 304


[email protected]

1.) The Auxiliary Unit being free, unscrew ten 5.5 mm hex head screws and remove its cover.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 305


1:28 PM



3.13.8

Verify Verify that the system functions correctly. Run Heater Function Diagnostics.

3.14

AEC Board

3.14.1

Supplies None.

3.14.2


3.14.3


3.14.4

Prerequisites


3.14.5

Personnel 1 person.

3.14.6

Time 10 minutes.


Page 305

[email protected]

Remove the generator from the table and put it on its bottom side on the floor or on a work bench.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 306


1:28 PM



3.14.7 3.14.7.1




on the

support plate 5 . 3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable 3 , without tearing, between the Auxiliary Unit 4

and the


3.14.7.2

Remove the AEC Board

1.) After removing the Auxiliary Unit, the Interface Unit appears. Release the flat ribbon cable

Page 306


[email protected]

2.) Remove four 5.5 mm hex head securing screws

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 307


1:28 PM



1 , making it sliding along the cover panel 2 of the Interface Unit. 2.) Unscrew twelve 5.5 mm screws that retain the cover panel and remove this one 2 .

3

7 4

8

6

5

[email protected]

3.) Disconnect the flat ribbon cable from J5 3 between the I/F Board RAD 7 and the AEC Board 8 . 4.) Disconnect the connectors J2 4 and J1 5 and Test Points TP1 and TP2 6 on the AEC Board. 5.) Remove the six 5.5 mm screws securing the AEC Board 8 .

3.14.8

Reassembly Reverse the disassembly procedure to reassemble the unit. Tighten screws to torque between 1.5 and 2 N.m (15 to 20 kg.cm).

3.14.9

Verify Reapply power. Proceed to ”AEC diagnostics” to ensure correct operation.


Page 307

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 308


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 308


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 309


1:28 PM



Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards Section 1.0 Software Download / Upgrade 1.1

Supplies None.

1.2

Tools • • •

1.3


Safety Precautions

1.4

Prerequisites Basic knowledge of PC based computer laptop, DOS and usage of Microsoft WINDOWS.

1.5

Personnel 1 person.

1.6

Time 15 minutes.

1.7 1.7.1

Procedure Load Software File on Service Laptop 1.) To load the software on to the hard drive(windows 2000 or under):It can operate under DOS or Windows; 2.) Power ON the computer, Under Windows, run the File Manager (Explorer); 3.) Create a new directory (e.g.: JEDITEST) under C:\; 4.) Insert the ”JEDI Software” floppy delivered with the equipment into the floppy drive; 5.) Copy all the files from the floppy to your hard drive.

1.7.2

Unzip software file The CD drive supplied with the equipment (or the upgrade kit) contains “Auto-zipped” files. Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards

Page 309

[email protected]

Not applicable.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 310


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE  DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL It is necessary to load those files on the hard disk drive and run them; they will unzip and create other files that you will use. • Double click on the JEDP424B.exe file, and verify that the new file is created.

1.7.3

Software download 1.) Connect console R232 cable Part No. 5194292 to console connecter J2; 2.) System power up; 3.) Press button

together more than 5 seconds to enter the HUB model;

4.) Restart the computer in DOS mode (for software download or database backup, it is required to run ASIAN.exe under DOS to avoid communication problem). With the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE. 5.) Run the program: Under DOS: *

Select Disk drive from where you want to run the program:

*

C: [enter]

*

key in: “ASIAN” [enter]

[email protected]

6.) From the laptop software main screen, type “F7: restore memory”. 7.) Type “appl.mx”, then enter (or C:\JEDI\appl.mx). Wait for the count to start. It may take 20 seconds before starting. The software code transfer will take about 20 minutes. Download is complete when all the LEDs on kV Control board are ON and laptop indicates download is complete. Normally, the kV Control board will reset at the end of transfer and all the LEDs will scroll. 8.) Verify the software version is P3.2, behind “RAM” text (or P3.X in case of new software);

Page 310

Section 1.0 Software Download / Upgrade

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 311


1:28 PM



9.) Select menu 2 with the arrows, select LIST, and clear generator error log. (^H, then W); 10.) To exit program, press Q, or R to return then ESC, or ESC twice.

Section 2.0 Tube Replacement Software Procedure [email protected]

2.1

Supplies None.

2.2

Tools • • •

2.3



2.4

Prerequisites Basic knowledge of PC based computer laptop, DOS and usage of Microsoft WINDOWS. Knowledge of Service Software (refer to Chapter 3 - - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.3 - Service Software User Guide).

2.5

Personnel 1 person.

Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards

Page 311

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 312


1:28 PM



2.6

Time 15 minutes.

2.7 2.7.1

Procedure Perform a Database backup Refer to Chapter 3 - - Configuraton & Calibration - 2.9 - Backup and Restore Database Parameters 1.) Connect console R232 cable Part No. 5194292 to console connecter J2; 2.) System power up; 3.) Press button

together more than 5 seconds to enter the HUB model;

4.) Restart the computer in DOS mode (for software download or database backup, it is required to run ASIAN.exe under DOS to avoid communication problem). With the mouse, click on START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART COMPUTER UNDER DOS MODE. 5.) Run the program: Under DOS: Select Disk drive from where you want to run the program:

*

C: [enter]

*

key in: “ASIAN” [enter]

6.) Save memory From the laptop software main screen, type “F6: save memory”.

2.7.2

Reset Tube Data tracking counter and error log. 1.) Type ALT-S to jump to Service Menu. 2.) Select menu 2 with the arrows. 3.) Type F5 to select “NEXP”.

Page 312

Section 2.0 Tube Replacement Software Procedure

[email protected]

*

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 313


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Note:

Before resetting all the memory, it is advised to record them on table 2.7.4 - Generator Counter Reading Record, found at the end of this Job Card. 4.) Enter ^H, press W to confirm. All the tube related Data will be erased; only Generator related Data will be kept. The filament ageing parameter will be reset to default value.

Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards

Page 313

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 314


1:28 PM



5.) Type Q to go back to main screen.

2.7.3

Verify new tube operation, clear error log 1.) Press F1 to jump to application screen. 2.) Run a dozen of exposures from low kv, mA, to high kV, mA in direct workstation. 4.) Go in menu 2, LIST (F3); Clear the Error log. 5.) Exit from laptop service software. 6.) Run exposures from the Operating console. 7.) Take necessary steps to ship the replaced tube. Include filled out table with tube

information.

2.7.4

Generator Counter Reading Record

GENERATOR COUNTER READING RECORD Date of reading:

Date of putting into service:

Address of installation:

Generator identification: Serial number: Software version: Options: (AEC)

X-Ray system description: Counter name NO WARMUP

Page 314

Tube data

Explanation Number of skipped Warm-up (N/A on Tiger)


[email protected]

3.) Verify correct operation of the system.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 315


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 RXGSF

H

Cumulated exposure time on small focus

RXGLF

H

Cumulated exposure time on large focus

RXSCOP

H

Cumulated exposure time in fluoro (N/A on RAD.)

ROTANOD

H

Cumulated Anode rotation time

NEXPSF

Cumulated Number of exposure on small focus

NEXPLF

Cumulated Number of exposure on large focus

N100%SF

Cumulated Number of exposure on small focus at 100 % Power (N/A on Tiger)

N100%LF

Cumulated Number of exposure on large focus (N/ A on Tiger)

NAMOR

Cumulated Number of spits

KJSF

E

Cumulated dissipated power on Small focus

KJLF

E

Cumulated dissipated power on Large focus

TIME_ON

H

Total generator Power On time (Not erasable)

N_EXP_G

H

Total generator number of exposure (Not erasable)

Tube Database Download The service tool software can operate under Windows (Windows 2000 or lower version) or DOS. 1.) Use the RS232 Service Cable (5194292) to connect the console connector J2 with computer. 2.) Power up the computer, insert the CD (5212186). Under Windows, run the File Manager (Explorer). 3.) Create a new directory (e.g.: JEDITEST) under C:\. 4.) Copy all the files from the CD to your new directory. 5.) Double click the file "ASIAN.EXE" to run service tool software. 6.) System power up. 7.) On the application screen, press button

together for more than 5 seconds to

enter the HUB mode. 8.) Press function key F7 to Load Software according to the tube installed. -

50 kW tube: type E7843X

File : E7843_R?.mx (? means the current revision)

9.) When the successful installation message display, press Esc button on the computer. 10.) Press the function key F1 into the Jedi application interface. 11.) Press Alt and S key together to enter service interface. 12.) Set Date&Time. -

Call Menu 2 using the arrows on the keyboard.

-

Call DATE by pressing F7.

-

Enter date (MM DD YYYY) via numeric keypad.

-

Hit W to confirm.

-

Hit F1. Chapter 9 - Service Tool Job Cards

Page 315

[email protected]

2.7.5


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 316


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE  DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL Enter time (HH MM) via numeric keypad. Hit W to confirm. 13.) Checksums Checksums must be validated at the end of the generator setup or whenever a parameter is changed. Call Menu 5 using the arrows on the keyboard. Press function key F1. Press function key [F1] and [V] simultaneously. A buzzer will sound, which indicating that the sums have been checked and OK on display screen. 14.) Press "R" key to return to the application mode. 15.) Press Esc key to exit the JEDI software.

[email protected]

Page 316


1:28 PM Thursday, October 30, 2014 Page 317 PioneerSM_ENG.book



Chapter 10 - Schematics Section 1.0 MIS Map

A

B

1

2

3 Phase

Stud

4

[email protected]

3

P1

PDU

System Cabinet P1

P2

5

P1 P2 P3

HV -

HV +

J2/J3

TM2

HV + HV -

5166493

5166654

6

Grounding Grounding

Tube

DAP Meter

Collimator

HV -

HV +

Ele-Magnetic Brakes

Terminal

Tube Console

Tube Stand

24 VDC

24 VDC

Table

EM Brakes

Switches

Ion-Chamber

7

FIRST MADE FOR:

Pioneer

GEHL MEDICAL SYSTEMS

7

8

8

51888818 BLK

Pioneer System Architecture

TITLE

Wallstand

Ion-Chamber

24 VDC

TM1

Handswtich

Rotor/Tube fan/Pressure SW

24 VDC

XR 6000 Fixed Grid Configuration Block

Power Supply

P2

GND Stud

P3 Grounding

P3

P1 P2 P3

Jedi

Generator

RS485/ RS232

J4

J1

6

3

REV

1/4

SHT/CONT ON

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Page 317

Chapter 10 - Schematics

Hospital Power Supply GND

TM3

J6

J3

System Console

5

AEC1

Xray-On Light

HV Line

Others

AEC2

J6

4

J9 RTL

Door Interlock

AC Power Line DC Power Line

Serial / RTL Grounding Line

3

RS232

C

2

J8 Serial RS485 / RTL

D

E

F

G

H

1

24VDC/PSW



A

B

C

1

2

3

J1

PDU 5183465/ 5220653

4

5

[email protected]

Console J3

5194507 J4

J1 J1 J1

TM3

TAV 5182285 GND TM1 Stud

GND Stud

J2

GND Stud

TM2

GND Stud

AEC1

5166654

2269002-5

2269002-5

5195936

5166493

5193607

5193105

5193110

5194292/ 5241079

5

6

Service Laptop Serial port

GND Stud

5183561

Table

5194508

AEC2

Wallstand

TM1

GND Stud

AEC1

5183392/ 5184093

Tube Stand

Rotation Anode HV + HV -

6

7

FIRST MADE FOR:

Pioneer 500


7

8

8

51888818 BLK

Pioneer 500 System Architecture

TITLE

XR 6000 Fixed Grid Configuration Interconnect Cable Diagram

5184620

Handswtich

5197678 TM1 GND Stud

Door

2212259-2/4 J2

HV +

J3

HV -

AEC2

Jedi R1T 50

5182354

4

TM1

Hospital Main Power 380 3 phase 5197679

3

5196643

5182354 laptop

LU LV LW GND Stud

DOOR Interlock Room Light

2

console

5183903 5196454 UVW

D

E

F

G

H

1

GND Stud

5193106 GND Stud

5193103 XP105

2

REV

2/4

SHT/CONT ON

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Section 1.0 MIS Map

Page 318





A

B

1

2

3

[email protected]

4

P2

P1

PDU

System Cabinet P1

P3

J1

5

P1 P2 P3

HV +

J2/J3

TM2

24 VDC

6

Grounding

Terminal

Tube Console

Tube

Ele-Magnetic Brakes

HV -

HV +

Collimator DAP Meter

EM Brakes

Switches

Ion-Chamber Bucky

Bucky

7

FIRST MADE FOR:

Pioneer


7

8

8

51888818 BLK

Pioneer System Architecture

TITLE

Wallstand

Ion-Chamber

Switches EM Brakes

Handswtich

TM1

TM1

24 VDC

Table

24 VDC

24 VDC

Tube Stand

Grounding

Wall-stand Bucky Control

5166654

Table Bucky Control

5166493

HV -

HV +

Rotor/Tube fan/Pressure SW

24 VDC

XR 6000 Oscillating Bucky Configuration Block

Power Supply

P2

Grounding

P3

J4

P1 P2 P3

HV -

J1

6

3

REV

3/4

SHT/CONT ON

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Page 319


Hospital Power Supply TM3

J4

Jedi

Table Bucky

Generator

5

AEC1

J6

J6

RS485/ RS232

J4

AEC2

GND Stud GND Stud

J3

110 VAC

System Console

WS Bucky

C 3 Phase

Others

4

J9 RTL

Xray-On Light Door Interlock

AC Power Line DC Power Line HV Line Serial / RTL Grounding Line

3

RS232

D

2

J8 Serial RS485 / RTL

E

F

G

H

1

24VDC/PSW



1

2

3

4

[email protected]

J1

J4

J1 J1

J1

J3

5194507

Console

TM3

GND Stud GND Stud

HV -

HV +

J3

J2

AEC1

Table Bucky

WS GND Stud Bucky

J4

TM2

GND TM1 Stud

TAV 5182285 J1

J4

J2

5

5315834

5166654

2269002-5

2269002-5

5195936

5313869

5

5166493

5315864

5193607

5193105

5193110

5194292/ 5241079

HV -

HV +

6

5316773

5316772

Table

6

AEC2

5183392

Tube Stand

Rotation Anode

AEC1

Bucky

TM1

GND Stud

Bucky

TM1

Wallstand

GND Stud

Serial port

Service Laptop

XR 6000 Oscillating Bucky Configuration Interconnect Cable Diagram Handswtich

5184620

PDU 5220653 TM1 GND Stud

Door

2212259-2

4

AEC2

Jedi R1T 50

console

A

B

Hospital Main Power 380 3 phase 5197678 5197679

3

5196643

LU LV LW GND Stud

DOOR Interlock Room Light

2

5183903 5196454 UVW

5313870

5182354 5182354 laptop

C

D

E

F

G

H

1

TM1

5193103 XP105

GND Stud

5193106 GND Stud

7

Pioneer 500

8

8

51888818 BLK

Pioneer 500 System Architecture

TITLE

FIRST MADE FOR:


7

3

REV

4/4

SHT/CONT ON

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Section 1.0 MIS Map

Page 320


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 321


1:28 PM



1.1

Jedi 50 R 1T Cabling

[email protected]


Page 321

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 322


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 322

Section 1.0 MIS Map

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 323


1:28 PM



Section 2.0 Central Listings 2.1

kV Measure Board This board forms part of the oil seal of the High Voltage Tank. It can only be removed at the factory. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is the complete HV Tank.

[email protected]


Page 323

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 324


1:28 PM



2.2

Filament Board 1 Inv. HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS3 GOES OUT. DC 160v

LF Common SF

DS3 - Green - +160v DC present DS4 - Yellow - Inverter Output Running

0

SF_LF - Yellow - Small Focus / Large Focus Relay Feedback RST - Red - Board being reset or powered up

DS2 - Yellow - Status LED

DS1 - Yellow - Status LED

Page 324

Section 2.0 Central Listings

ON - Yellow - Inverter Command ON

[email protected]

160v DC

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 325


1:28 PM



2.3

Rotation Board High Speed HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS6 AND DS7 (NEONORANGE) GO OUT. Auxiliary DC bus

Common Main

DS6

[email protected]

DC bus


Page 325

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 326


1:28 PM



2.3.1

Indicators

2.3.2 1

INDICATOR

COLOR

INDICATES:

RESET

RED

BOARD BEING RESET OR POWERED UP

INV_ON

YELLOW

THE INVERTER IS RUNNING

DS1

GREEN

PRESENCE OF +15 V SUPPLY

DS2

GREEN

PRESENCE OF -15 V SUPPLY

DS3

GREEN

PRESENCE OF +5 V SUPPLY

DS4-DS5

YELLOW

BOARD STATUS

DS6

NEON (ORANGE)

FAN VAC POWER SUPPLY PRESENT

DS7

NEON (ORANGE)

DC BUS PRESENT

J2 Wiring 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

115V

Fan*, 115V AC Line output

Fan, 115V AC Line input X-ray tube Thermal safety

* used in application with fan cooling

Page 326


[email protected]

sense

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 327


1:28 PM



2.4

LV Power Supply 3 PH Board HIGH VOLTAGE AND HOT SURFACE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL INDICATOR NE1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT. NE1 - Orange - indicates presence of DC Bus

+ 400

DC bus - 400

[email protected]

160V DC 0

DS2 - Green - 160 VDC

DS1 - Red - Mains Drop


Page 327

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 328


1:28 PM



2.5

Gate Command Board HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL DS300 ON THIS BOARD AND DS1 ON DUAL SNUB BOARD ARE OUT. Hot surface on transformer T300 and heat sink. DS300

DC bus

DS300 - Neon (Orange) Presence of voltage on DC bus for Flyback Converter to create power supplies for both Gate Commands

DS200 - Yellow - High IGBT* (Q200) Gate Command running

DS200

DS201 DS202

DS202 - Green - Pres ence of -10 V Supply on high IGBT* Gate Command

Inverter ILP current feedback ILR DS100 -Yellow-Low IGBT* (Q100) Gate Command run ning DS100

DS102

DS101 - Green - Presence of +20 V Supply on low IGBT* Gate Command

DS101

DS102 - Green - Presence of -10 V Supply on low IGBT* Gate Command

* Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor

Page 328


[email protected]

DS201 - Green - Presence of +20 V Supply on high IGBT* Gate Command

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 329


1:28 PM



2.6

Dual Snub Board HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT. DS1 - Neon (Orange) - Indicates presence of voltage on DC Bus

[email protected]


Page 329

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 330


1:28 PM



2.7

kV Control Board

[email protected]

Page 330


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 331


1:28 PM



2.7.1

2.7.2

SWITCH OR JUMPER

FUNCTION

RST

RESET PUSH BUTTON

Indicators INDICATOR

COLOR

INDICATES:

CONF

RED

FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAY CONFIGURATION NOT ACCOMPLISHED

OK

YELLOW

INVERTER GATE POWER SUPPLY OK

TX_TAV

YELLOW

TRANSMIT TO SERVICE LAPTOP

RX_TAV

YELLOW

RECEIVE FROM SERVICE LAPTOP

TX_CONS

YELLOW

TRANSMIT TO CONSOLE (IF EXISTING)

RX_CONS

YELLOW

RECEIVE FROM CONSOLE (IF EXISTING)

T_CAN_X

YELLOW

SYSTEM CAN BUS TRANSMIT

R_CAN_X

YELLOW

SYSTEM CAN BUS RECEIVE

HALT

RED

MICROPROCESSOR HALTED

RESET

RED

BOARD BEING RESET

S0 TO S7

YELLOW

STATUS LED IN APPLICATION MODE THESE SEQUENCE CONTINUOUSLY

DS1

GREEN

-15V SUPPLY

DS2

GREEN

+15V SUPPLY

LEDS

(FPGA)

FLASH

IN

Non Volatile RAM REFERENCE

DESIGNATION

U32

NON VOLATILE INCLUDED)


PARAMETERS

RAM

(BATTERY

Page 331

[email protected]

2.7.3

Switches and Jumpers

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 332


1:28 PM



2.8

AC/DC 3 Phase board HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL DS1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT. Some components on this board can become very hot.

[email protected]

Page 332


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 333


1:28 PM



2.9

I/F Board RAD V1

N1 - Orange (neon) Indicates presence of 100 VAC for the

ON & VAC

Pin 9 Table Bucky Pin 1 Pin 9 Wall Bucky Pin 1

Pin 9 Room Door & Light [email protected]

Pin 1

Service Laptop

TUBE

Presence of strap

Console

PUPT - Yellow Data being sent to the console

Serial Link Configuration (RS422)


Page 333

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 334


1:28 PM



2.10

I/F Board RAD V2 ON & VAC

N1 - Orange (neon) Indicates presence of 100 VAC for the Bucky

Pin 9 Table Bucky Pin 1 Pin 9 Wall Bucky

Pin 1

Room Door & Light I/F

To AEC board

Pin 9

Pin 1

CAN TRANSMIT (yellow)

DS5:

EXT.CAN TRANSMIT (yellow)

DS6: Receive Data from console (yellow) Console

OPTIONAL

DS7: DATA being sent to console (TRANSMIT) (yellow)

No strap (engineering use) Presence of strap TUBE 1 DS3:

Reset led (red)

DS1, DS2: Status micro processor (yellow)

Page 334


[email protected]

Service Laptop

DS4:

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 335


1:28 PM



2.11

AEC Board

[email protected]

2.11.1

Test Points Testpoint

Measurement SIGNAL

RANGE

TP1

230 VDC

230 VDC _5%

TP2

230 VDC

230 VDC _5%

TP3

230 VDC

230 VDC _5%

TP4

230 VDC

230 VDC _5%

R10V

10 VDC (reference)

10 VDC _1%


Page 335

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 336


1:28 PM



2.12

AEC Board V2

[email protected]

AEC4

2.13

AEC3

AEC2

N1 - Orange (neon) Presence of 230 VDC

Test Points TESTPOINT TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 TP11

Page 336

AEC1

MEASUREMENT SIGNAL 230 VDC 230 VDC 230 VDC 230 VDC AEC assignment reference 10 VDC (reference) AEC return voltage AEC1 return voltage AEC2 return voltage AEC3 return voltage AEC4 return voltage


RANGE 230 VDC _5% 230 VDC _5% 230 VDC _5% 230 VDC _5% 0 to 10 V 10 VDC _1%

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 337


1:28 PM



Section 3.0 Schematics 3.1

PDU Connection Diagram

[email protected]


Page 337



$

%

&

'

(

)

'&9

'&9

DC24V $&9

DC24V $&9

5 /'

0&

6 6

6

'

6

ोᅘഃ଼

ଫ඙۸຿

&ROOLPDWRU

'

ҕੋᆚ຿

'

6

0&

0&

[email protected]

0&

0&

۸Τ౨ຏ 6

'

0&

0&

௏‫ڕ‬༨ᅧ

Ѥӊ٤Еᄗವ 7ROHUDQFH

'

'

ҕੋ۸຿

6

0&

'

5HY

͑·ۜ

ٗ‫؟‬ઝఘ

'HVFULSWLRQ

0DGH E\

ٗ‫؟‬რ

'DWH

ఐ୙

S1 Foot pedal switch 6 VZLWFK S2 Cassette)RRG tray-column coupling switch S3 Cassette tray lock switch S4 Tube movement 66 7DEOHswitchWUD\ VZLWFK S5 Tube stand longitudinal movement switch S6 Tube arm vertical travel switch 6 7XEHswitchVWDQG VZLWFKDOO S7 Tube rotation MC1,MC2 EM lock - Table top lateral movement 6 7XEH VWDQG VZLWFKഃ ଼ MC3,MC4 EM lock - Table top longitudinal movement MC5 EM lock - Tube stand longitudinal travel movement 6 7XEH VWDQG VZLWFK౨ ຏ MC6 EM lock - Tube arm vetical travel MC7 EM lock - Tube rotation MC8 EM lock - Cassette tray 6 7XEH VWDQG VZLWFK༨ ᅧ ൎပࢗ‫࢈ڑ‬นШΞ҈Ԥ

6&+

ำߑफι 'RF7\SH

૥ଫҕԨ୷ၐस෍

7KHRU\'UDZLQJ

෍ۜ 3DUW 1R

5199500SCH 6&+

2 12

͑·ۜ 5HY

ྚۜ 3DJH

ζੋ҉स )LQLVK Αै6FDOH ϫॸ 0DWHULDO ϠѩΩۜ ಁ‫ޙ‬ఐ୙ ໎ճఐ୙ ಌଛఐ୙ ੠ы 7LWOH 'HVLJQ'DWH &KHFN'DWH $SSURYDO'DWH 3LRQHHU7DEOH(OHFWULFDO

ඹဈԨ୷‫ܟ‬৞ྤ९ಁ΁ပຫ٤ഓ *(+/ 0(',&$/ 6<67(06

$

%

&

'

(

)


Page 338

Table Electrical Schematics 3.2




:

‫܃‬ ۱

‫܃‬

&20

‫܃‬ ۱

:

3(

:

:

ोᅘ

6 ߶Ⴃࢗ‫ڑ‬

1&

ҕ඘70ᆦߑ

۱

3(

৓ इ

͂

۱ ‫܃‬

:

ܻ ᠭܻ

:

‫܃‬ ۱

‫܃‬

;3

;3

;6

;6

3(

:

1& 12

۱

&20 6 ‫܃‬ ۱

ଫۧԨҨත

3(

:

0&

‫܃‬

&20 6

1&

ଫ̟ۧ૆

ଫඞ

1& 12 & 1& 12 &

۱

6

6

3(

/'

‫܃‬

۱ ‫܃‬

۱

$':

ำߑफι 'RF7\SH

6

1& 12 &

1& 12 &

0&

0&

6

‫܃‬

۱

'HVFULSWLRQ

ٗ‫؟‬ઝఘ

5HY

͑·ۜ

๲ࡴ㒓㓚㸼

۱

۱ ‫܃‬

‫܃‬

3

:

෍ۜ 3DUW 1R 5197241ADW

0DGH E\

ٗ‫؟‬რ

'DWH

ఐ୙

ϕᖫ⇥

ࣅᄥۧ

0& ҕੋ۸຿ၮՎԨҨත

0& ҕੋᆚ຿ၮՎԨҨත

ҕ඘

ϠѩΩۜ

3

͑·ۜ 5HY

ྚۜ 3DJH

Pioneer Table Cables Assembly

૥ଫҕԨ୷ࠄຬ෍

ζੋ҉स )LQLVK Αै6FDOH ϫॸ 0DWHULDO ಁ‫ޙ‬ఐ୙ ໎ճఐ୙ ಌଛఐ୙ ੠ы 7LWOH 'HVLJQ'DWH &KHFN'DWH $SSURYDO'DWH

ඹဈԨ୷‫ܟ‬৞ྤ९ಁ΁ပຫ٤ഓ *(+/ 0(',&$/ 6<67(06

Ѥӊ٤Еᄗವ 7ROHUDQFH

3(

[email protected]

‫܃‬

:

:

:

ࠄ̟૆ࣅᄥۧᆦߑ

۱

‫ޏ‬೬ྑௐġ c̟෍ᄜྑௐၽອ࿫ԅॕࠄ୶౨Ⴔඬճ࿫ԅॕࠄ୶γஆd cၽॕࠄْࢗ‫ڑ‬ನē࿫ᅟ࿉ْࢗ‫ڑ‬ԅࠄԤူຬऍ౨ԅຬۜճ࿫‫ڑ‬ຂd

3(

&74 7DEOH 'LPHQVLRQ

‫܃‬ ۱

;3 ;6

&74

௏‫ڕ‬౨ຏၮՎԨҨත 0&

௏‫ڕ‬༨ᅧၮՎԨҨත 0&

;3 ;6

&74

:

ोᅘഃ଼ၮՎԨҨත 0&

;6 ;3

;3 ;6

$

%

& 3(

:

70

‫܃‬

‫܃‬

‫܃‬

ोᅘ70ᆦߑ

3(

:

‫܃‬ ͂

$

%

&

'

(

)

Page 339


͂ ‫܃‬ ۱ ۱

۱ ۱

3'870

۱

इ इ इ इ ᠭܻ ܻ ۱ ‫܃‬

: :

:

3(

3'870ᆦߑ

इ

'

(

)

۱ ͂

3(

‫܃‬ ۱

۱ ‫܃‬ ܻ ᠭܻ ৓ ۱ ‫܃‬ ܻ ৓ ᠭܻ ۱ ‫܃‬ ܻ ৓ᠭܻ ۱ ‫܃‬ ܻ ᠭܻ ৓ ‫܃‬ ৓

3( 3( 3( 3(


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 340


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 340



Fri

Feb

16

1

15:30:36

2007

2

ARM_CON<9..0>

ARM_RESET

FEED_DOG

ARM_CON<9..0>

ARM_RESET

CPLD_CLK

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

ARM_CON<9..0>

ARM_RESET

3

LCD

EPM570

HCLK

ARM_IO<30..0>

ADDR<23..0>

DATA<31..0>

I7

HCLK

LED<6..1>

CPLD_IO<33..0>

ARM_IO<30..0>

ISP_ENTER

ADDR<23..0>

DATA<31..0>

I3

FEED_DOG

ARM_IO<30..0>

ADDR<23..0>

CPLD_CLK

DATA<31..0>

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

I1

ARM_JTAG<5..0>

LPC2294

3

4

4

Path

totallogic

Block

5

5

ISP_ENTER

ARM_RESET

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

ARM_JTAG<5..0>

ARM_RESET

LED<6..1>

CPLD_IO<33..0>

JTAG

INTERFACE

ARM_IO<30..0>

ARM_IO<30..0>

MEMORY

6

6

I6

I4

I8

Block

2 of

Sheet

2

POWER

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

7

Rev

2

Company

8

2 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

I5

8

15


D

C

B

A

2


[email protected]

1

3.3

Page 341

B Size



A61001C Console Control Board Circuit Diagram

Page 341

Page 342


Mon Mar

12

C1 1U 16V 10%

OHM

1

13:17:28

600

FL3 BLM31A601S

C2 10N 50V 10%

2007

GND

2

CPLD_CLK

C3 50V 0.1U 10%

R1

R2

2

1K 0.125W 1%

33.2 0.125W 1%

B

A

13

1

4

Y1

10MHZ

ENABLE

VCC GND

VOUT

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

12

2

3

GND

A

B

8

3

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

9

U13 74LVC-LCX14

100P 50V 5%

C4

5C6>

4

4

ARM_RESET

PO19_MOSI1 19

Path

lpc2294

Block

5

PO20_SSEL1

PO18_MISO1 18

20

PO17_SCK1

R3

0.125W

0.125W

0.125W

0.125W

0

R6

0

R5

0

R4

0 0%

0%

0%

0%

CPLD_TMS

CPLD_TDI

CPLD_TDO

2

3

0

1

6

Block

P1_0_CS0 P1_1_OE

TD1

7

1 of

Sheet

3

7

5176556SCH

IO

AGND

A

ARM_IO<30..0>

0% GND

IO

OUT

ARM_JTAG<5..0>

8

Rev

2

Company

Sheet

8

3 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

0

R7

0 1 2 3 4 5

ARM_CON<9..0>

0.125W

ARM_RTCK ARM_TDO ARM_TDI ARM_TCK ARM_TMS ARM_TRST

138 139

CS0 OE

0 9

26

34 24 15 7 102 95 86 82 70 60 52 144 140 126 113 43

CAN1_TX

91 90

22

Dwg No

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

VSS(11..0) VSSA_PLL VSSA

P1_16_TRACEPKT0 P1_17_TRACEPKT1 P1_18_TRACEPKT2 P1_19_TRACEPKT3 P1_20_TRACESYNC P1_21_PIPESTAT0 P1_22_PIPESTAT1 P1_23_PIPESTAT2 P1_24_TRACECLK P1_25_EXTIN0 P1_26_RTCK P1_27_TDO P1_28_TDI P1_29_TCK P1_30_TMS P1_31_TRST

SYM 1 OF 2

P0_0_TXD0_PWM1 P0_1_RXD0_PWM3_EINT0 P0_2_SCL_CAP0_0 P0_3_SDA_MAT0_0_EINT1 P0_4_SCK0_CAP0_1 P0_5_MISO0_MAT0_1 P0_6_MOSI0_CAP0_2 P0_7_SSEL0_PWM2_EINT2 P0_8_TXD1_PWM4 P0_9_RXD1_PWM6_EINT3 P0_10_RTS1_CAP1_0 P0_11_CTS1_CAP1_1 P0_12_DSR1_MAT1_0 P0_13_DTR1_MAT1_1 P0_14_DCD1_EINT1 P0_15_RI1_EINT2 P0_16_EINT0_MAT0_2_CAP0_2 P0_17_CAP1_2_SCK1_MAT1_2 P0_18_CAP1_3_MISO1_MAT1_3 P0_19_MAT1_2_MOSI1_CAP1_2 P0_20_MAT1_3_SSEL1_EINT3 P0_21_PWM5_CAP1_3 P0_22_CAP0_0_MAT0_0 P0_23_RD2 P0_24_TD2 P0_25_RD1 P0_27_AIN0_CAP0_1_MAT0_1 P0_28_AIN1_CAP0_2_MAT0_2 P0_29_AIN2_CAP0_3_MAT0_3 P0_30_AIN3_EINT3_CAP0_0

CPLD_TCK

42 49 50 58 59 61 68 69 75 76 78 83 84 85 92 99 100 101 121 122 123 4 5 6 8 21 23 25 32 33

PO0_TXD0 PO1_RXD0 PO2_SCL PO3_SDA PO4_SCK0 PO5_MISO0 PO6_MOSI0 PO7_SSEL PO8_TXD1 PO9_RXD1 PO10_RTS1 PO11_CTS1 PO12_DSR1 PO13_DTR1 PO14_DCD1 PO15_EINT2 PO16_EINT0 PO17_SCK1 PO18_MISO1 PO19_MOSI1 PO20_SSEL1 PO21_PWM5 PO22 CAN2_RX CAN2_TX CAN1_RX AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3

17

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 29 30

XTAL1 XTAL2

RESET_N

V3(9..0) V3A

142 141

V18(1..0) V18A

14

CPU_CLK

6

U1 LPC2292FBD144

143

135

1V8

ARM_RESET

3V3

5

IO

15

4C7>

4D3>


D

C

1

3V3

OUT

U13 74LVC-LCX14

3


B

A

2

Page 342

[email protected]

1


 XR 6000 SERVICE MANUAL B Size


Thu

Mar

01

1

14:31:59

12V

1V8

3V3

VCC

2007

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R11

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R10

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R17

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R8

AGND

A

R12 2K 0.125W 1%

AGND

A

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R15

AGND

A

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R14

AGND

A

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R13

2

C8 0.1U 50V 10%

C7 0.1U 50V 10%

C6 0.1U 50V 10%

C5 0.1U 50V 10%

30

29

28

27

3V3

ARM_IO<30..0>

3

3A8<>

=

11

DATA<27> 27

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R19

DATA<31..0>

BOOT 1:0

BOOT1

VOLTAGE MONITOR

IO

3

DATA<26>

3V3

98 105 106 108 109 114 115 116 117 118 120 124 125 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 136 137 1 10 11 12 13 16 17 18 19 20

4

BOOTUP

BOOT0

10K 0.1W 0.1%

R16

DATA<0> DATA<1> DATA<2> DATA<3> DATA<4> DATA<5> DATA<6> DATA<7> DATA<8> DATA<9> DATA<10> DATA<11> DATA<12> DATA<13> DATA<14> DATA<15> DATA<16> DATA<17> DATA<18> DATA<19> DATA<20> DATA<21> DATA<22> DATA<23> DATA<24> DATA<25> DATA<26> DATA<27> DATA<28> DATA<29> DATA<30> DATA<31>

INTERNAL

26

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

4

Path

lpc2294

Block

1V8

3V3

5

C10 0.1U 50V 10%

C9 0.1U 50V 10%

P3_0_A0 P3_1_A1 P3_2_A2 P3_3_A3 P3_4_A4 P3_5_A5 P3_6_A6 P3_7_A7 P3_8_A8 P3_9_A9 P3_10_A10 P3_11_A11 P3_12_A12 P3_13_A13 P3_14_A14 P3_15_A15 P3_16_A16 P3_17_A17 P3_18_A18 P3_19_A19 P3_20_A20 P3_21_A21 P3_22_A22 P3_23_A23_XCLK P3_24_CS3 P3_25_CS2 P3_26_CS1 P3_27_WE P3_28_BLS3_AIN7 P3_29_BLS2_AIN6 P3_30_BLS1 P3_31_BLS0

SYM 2 OF 2

P2_0_D0 P2_1_D1 P2_2_D2 P2_3_D3 P2_4_D4 P2_5_D5 P2_6_D6 P2_7_D7 P2_8_D8 P2_9_D9 P2_10_D10 P2_11_D11 P2_12_D12 P2_13_D13 P2_14_D14 P2_15_D15 P2_16_D16 P2_17_D17 P2_18_D18 P2_19_D19 P2_20_D20 P2_21_D21 P2_22_D22 P2_23_D23 P2_24_D24 P2_25_D25 P2_26_D26_BOOT0 P2_27_D27_BOOT1 P2_28_D28 P2_29_D29 P2_30_D30_AIN4 P2_31_D31_AIN5

U1 LPC2292FBD144

5

89 88 87 81 80 74 73 72 71 66 65 64 63 62 56 55 53 48 47 46 45 44 41 40 36 35 30 29 28 27 97 96

C12 0.1U 50V 10%

C11 0.1U 50V 10%

6

C14 0.1U 50V 10%

C13 0.1U 50V 10%

ADDR<0> ADDR<1> ADDR<2> ADDR<3> ADDR<4> ADDR<5> ADDR<6> ADDR<7> ADDR<8> ADDR<9> ADDR<10> ADDR<11> ADDR<12> ADDR<13> ADDR<14> ADDR<15> ADDR<16> ADDR<17> ADDR<18> ADDR<19> ADDR<20> ADDR<21> ADDR<22> ADDR<23> CS3 CS2 CS1 WE BLS<3> BLS<2> BLS<1> BLS<0>

6

3 2 1 4 8 7 6 5

Block

C15 0.1U 50V 10%

2 of

Sheet

ARM_CON<9..0>

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3

C16 0.1U 50V 10%

ADDR<23..0>

C17 0.1U 50V 10%

OUT

OUT

3B8>

C18 0.1U 50V 10%

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

7

Rev

2

Company

8

4 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

GND

C19 0.1U 50V 10%

8

15


D

C

B

A

2


Page 343

[email protected]

1

Page 343

B Size




Thu

Mar

01

1

14:32:02

2007

IN

2

GND

FEED_DOG

1 2

1 2

S1 KT11B1JM

4

3

10K 0.125W 1%

VCC

1

4

3

J3

1K 0.125W 1%

R18

JUMPER

3

2

C20 2.2U 10V 10%

2.49K 0.125W 1% C21 47N 50V 10%

4

GND

C22 4.7N 50V 10%

10K 0.125W 1%

R21

4

VCC

5V

Path

lpc2294

Block

SRT SWT GND

RESET_IN WDI WDS RESET_N

3 4

VCC

1 6 5

8

U24 MAX6301

2

7

5

5

GND

C23 0.1U 50V 10%

3V3

20K 0.125W 1%

OUT

6

TWD=2.67*CSW*500=6.3S

Block

3A4<

TRP=2.67*CRST=125.5MS

EXTENDED MODE

ARM_RESET

6

3 of

Sheet

3

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

7

Rev

2

Company

8

5 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

8

15


D

C

B

3

ARM RESET & WATCH DOG

2

R9

A

1

R20


[email protected]

Page 344

Page 344

R22



Page 345

D

C

B

Fri

Feb

16

1

2007

0.1U 50V 10%

0.1U 50V 10%

C24

C25

15:28:51

0.1U 50V 10%

C26

C27

0.1U 50V 10%

3V3

0.1U 50V 10%

0.1U 50V 10%

C28

C29

A

1

0.1U 50V 10%

IO

IO

IN

IN IN

IN

IO

IN

GND

0.1U 50V 10%

2

2

ADDR<23..0>

ARM_IO<30..0>

ARM_CON<9..0>

SWITCH<7..0>

DATA<31..0>

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

ARM_RESET

CPLD_CLK HCLK

3

3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

3V3

GND

3 2 1 0 DATA<0> DATA<1> DATA<2> DATA<3> DATA<4> DATA<5> DATA<6> DATA<7> DATA<8> DATA<9> DATA<10> DATA<11> DATA<12> DATA<13> DATA<14> DATA<15> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

R23 10K 0.125W 1%

CPLD_TDI CPLD_TMS CPLD_TCK CPLD_TDO

3V3

IO_1 IO_2 IO_3 IO_4 IO_5 IO_6 IO_7 IO_8 IO_11 IO_12 IO_13 IO_14 IO_15 IO_16 IO_21 IO_22 IO_23 IO_24 IO_27 IO_28 IO_29 IO_30 IO_31 IO_32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31 32

4

TDI TMS TCK TDO

IO_18_GCLK0 IO_20_GCLK1 IO_89_GCLK2 IO_91_GCLK3 IO_60_DEV_OE IO_61_DEV_NCLR

34 33 35 36

18 20 89 91 60 61

VCCINT<3..0> VCCIO1<3..0> VCCIO2<3..0>

4

0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9

C30

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 22 21

C31

1 2 3 4 5 6

5

NLED<6..1>

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 84 85 86 87 88 93 94 95 96 97 98 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 U6 EPM570T144C5

GNDI0<7..0> GNDINT<3..0>

IO_109 IO_110 IO_111 IO_112 IO_113 IO_114 IO_117 IO_118 IO_119 IO_120 IO_121 IO_122 IO_123 IO_124 IO_125 IO_127 IO_129 IO_130 IO_131 IO_132 IO_133 IO_134 IO_137 IO_138 IO_139 IO_140 IO_141 IO_142 IO_143 IO_144

IO_73 IO_74 IO_75 IO_76 IO_77 IO_78 IO_79 IO_80 IO_81 IO_84 IO_85 IO_86 IO_87 IO_88 IO_93 IO_94 IO_95 IO_96 IO_97 IO_98 IO_101 IO_102 IO_103 IO_104 IO_105 IO_106 IO_107 IO_108 IO_37 IO_38 IO_39 IO_40 IO_41 IO_42 IO_43 IO_44 IO_45 IO_48 IO_49 IO_50 IO_51 IO_52 IO_53 IO_55 IO_57 IO_58 IO_59 IO_62 IO_63 IO_66 IO_67 IO_68 IO_69 IO_70 IO_71 IO_72 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 48 49 50 51 52 53 55 57 58 59 62 63 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Path

epm570

Block

[email protected]

Chapter 10 - Schematics 5

4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 23 24

109 110 111 112 113 114 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144

GND

6

Block

2 1

6 5 4 3

IO

IN

OUT

A1 A2 A3 A4

A1 A2 A3 A4

11 13 15 17

Sheet

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

1

3V3

0

1

2

9 7 5 3

7

GND

0.1U 50V 10%

C32

R30

O4

O3

O2

O1

O4

O3

O2

O1

LED<6..1>

OUT

RED

2

2

Company

8

6 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare Rev

1

DS2 HSMS-C650

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

GND

15

332 0.125W 1%

3V3

VCC

S2 CHS_04TB

10K 0.125W 1%

R31

10K 0.125W 1%

8

HEART BEAT

5176556SCH

Dwg No

2 1

18 6 16 5 14 4 12 3

I4

4

VCC

I3

3

I1 I2

2

1

I4

4 4

0

1

10K 0.125W 1%

S3 CHS_04TB

I3

3 5

3

I1 I2

1 2

7

10K 0.125W 1%

R27

10K 0.125W 1%

R26

10K 0.125W 1%

R29

R28

R25 2

3 10K 0.125W 1%

R24 10K 0.125W 1%

6

4

5

6

7

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

OE_N

U16 74ABT244 19

GND

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

7

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

OE_N

1 2 4 6 8

U16 74ABT244

SWITCH<7..0>

1 of

CPLD_IO<33..0>

PO21_PWM5

NLED<6..1>

PO22 FEED_DOG ISP_ENTER

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

6


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


R32

Page 345

B Size



D

C

B

A

Mon Mar

7A8>

12

1

50

EXP

2007

OHM

BLM31P500S

FL4

PREP

TERLOCK 1

13:53:07

7C7>

7C7>

DOORIN

PDUGND

SMBJ5.0 6.7V

CR2

PDUGND

SMBJ5.0 6.7V

CR1

ON/OFF_KEY<3..0>

0

1

2

12V

12V

2

4.99K 0.125W 1%

R38

1%

0.125W

15K

R37

4.99K 0.125W 1%

R36

1%

0.125W

15K

R42

1%

0.125W

15K

R43

1%

0.125W

15K

12V

11D3<>

R39

B

B Q1 MMBT3904

2

1%

GND

GND

0.125W

15K

R44

0.1U 50V 10%

C34

0.1U 50V 10%

C33

4

10

13

0.1U 50V 10%

C35

MMBT3904

Q2

PDUGND

E

C

PDUGND

E

C

2

U14

IN

3

GND

19

OPEN2 CLOSED2

4 5

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

3 6

8 1

9 7 5 3

3V3

OPEN1 CLOSED1

COILP COILN

11

O

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

RESP_CTRL

6 O

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

RESP_CTRL

8 O

A1 A2 A3 A4

10B1<>

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

11C8<>

11 13 15 17

OE_N

74LVC_LCX244

4

9B3<>

IO

CPLD_IO<33..0>

4 5

CPLD_EXP

CPLD_PREP

Path

7A8<

9B3<

X_RAY_LIGHT

R45 10K 0.125W 1%

5

5

CPLD_INTERLOCK

VCC

PSW

interface

Block

3

1 2

CPLD_IO<2>

CPLD_IO<3>

0

CPLD_IO<0> CPLD_IO<1>

GND

OPEN2 CLOSED2

K3 G6B_2114P_US24VDC

0.1U 50V 10%

OPEN1 CLOSED1

3 6

8

6

5

3

24V_IN

C37

COILP COILN

U8

CLOSED<1> OPEN<1> CLOSED<0> OPEN<0>

K2 G6B_2114P_US24VDC

COM<0>

COM<1>

8 1

7

4

COIL1 COIL2

0.1U 50V 10%

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

MC1489A

U14

IN

1 2

K1 AZ742-2C-24D

4

C36

RESP_CTRL

MC1489A

U14

IN

MC1489A

GND

VCC

LSM340J 40V

D2

LSM340J 40V

D1

PDU24V

3

3

O

10D4<

IN

1

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

RESP_CTRL

OVER_CURRENT

U14 MC1489A

GND

6

6

0.1U 50V 10%

C38

R46

GND

R47 50

3 4

PIN

50

1 2

OHM

BLM31P500S

FL7

MH1

2

WIRE_TO_BOARD

RIGHT_ANGLE

J4

1

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH2

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH3

SHIELD

EXP

4

3

2

1

2A

1

J7

3

2

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH7

MH8

1 of

5

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

PIN

C39

GND

22N 250V 20%

PDU24V

Rev

2

Company

8

7B5> 7C1<

15

R48 1MEG 0.125W 1%

7 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

CONNECTOR

WIRE_TO_BOARD

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH6

1 2 3 4

200V

8

SHIELD

TERLOCK

MURS320T3

D3

DOORIN

PSW

RIGHT_ANGLE

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH5

HANDLE

PREP

7D1<

F1

7D1<

2

PIN

1 2 3

RIGHT_ANGLE

4 5 6

WIRE_TO_BOARD

J6

MHP4_50TB10_00

2

1

GND

6

5

4

POWER CONNECTOR

MHP4_50TB10_00

MH4

7

XRAY_ON_LIGHT

MHP4_50TB10_00

4

3

Sheet

OHM

BLM31P500S

FL5

Block

1

PDUGND

1%

0.125W

15K

12V

10C6>

20K 0.125W 1%

R33

20K 0.125W 1%

2

3

R40

R41

1

20K 0.125W 1%

20K 0.125W 1%

12

9 5

1 1 1

1 1

Section 2.0 Central Listings 1


1


[email protected]

Page 346

Page 346

1




D

C

B

Fri

Dec

15

1

15:41:33

9C8<

IN

2006

GND

1 2

28 26 27

GND

3V3

5V

C41 0.1U 50V 10%

20K 0.125W 1%

R49

SYNCIN 0VIN1 0VIN2

VS1 VS2

3V3

ARM_RESET

C40 0.47U 16V 10%

U2 DCR010505U

2

VOUT ERROR_N VREC ENABLE 0VOUT

GND

17 12 16 13

14

R51 10K 0.125W 1%

R50 10K 0.125W 1%

1U 16V 10%

C42

CAN_GND

TIN

VCC

TP1

A

2

R52 0 0.125W 0%

9 10 11

6 7

3

CAN1_TX CAN1_RX

Q Q_N

26 25

YELLOW

1

DS1 HSMY-C650

12

5

CAN_VCC

C45 0.47U 16V 10%

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

A_N B RD

CEXT REXT_CEXT

C44 47U 10V 10%

R54 1K 0.125W 1%

TIN

U12 74VHC123A

C43 1U 16V 10%

R53 10K 0.125W 1%

TP2

3

2

3V3

4

R55 332 0.125W 1%

4

25

26

C47 0.1U 50V 10%

Path

GND

VCC

GND

C46 0.1U 50V 10%

interface

Block

CAN1_RX

CAN1_TX

VCC

5

6

8

4

2

1

5

5

VDD2

GND2

VO

GND2

GND1

VI

VDD1

U4

VO

VDD2

HCPL0720-060

GND1

VI

VDD1

U3 HCPL0720-060

ARM_IO<30..0>

4

2

1

5

6

8

C48 0.1U 50V 10%

6

R56 332 0.125W 1%

CAN_GND

C49 0.1U 50V 10%

CAN_VCC

9B1<>

CAN_GND

IO

6

Block

RXD

TXD

VREF S

CANL

CANH

6

7

2 of

Sheet

5

CAN_L

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

GND

VCC

CAN_H

VCC=CAN_VCC;GND=CAN_GND

4

1

5 8

U5 TJA1050

7

C50 0.1U 50V 10%

10C8<>

10C6<>

Rev

2

Company

8

8 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

8

15


Page 347

[email protected]

1

R57


121 0.125W 1%

Page 347

B Size



D

C

8B6<>

B

A

Mon Mar

12

1

13:22:15

ARM_IO<30..0>

2007

GND

C51 0.1U 50V 10%

DATA_OUT 9 PO9_RXD1

24

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

A1 A2 A3 A4

OE_N

U8 74LVC_LCX244

C54 0.1U 50V 10%

2

0

PO8_TXD1 DATA_IN

T1IN T2IN R1IN R2IN

C1P C1M C2P C2M

1 3 4 5 11 10 13 8

VCC VP VN

16 2 6

U17 MAX3232C

8

3

GND

15

GND

R58 4.99K 0.125W 1%

PO1_RXD0

C56 1U 16V 10%

RS485_RX-

RS485_RX+

DATA_OUT

VCC

11C8<>

10C8>

14 7 12 9

10B1<>

7A5>

10C6>

T1OUT T2OUT R1OUT R2OUT

7D4<>

OVER_CURRENT

GND

PO0_TXD0

2 4 6 8

1

1 ISP_RXD

C55 0.1U 50V 10%

3V3

CPLD_IO<33..0>

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

18 16 14 12

C53 0.1U 50V 10%

C52 0.1U 50V 10%

GND

3V3

1

4

14

ISP_TXD

R59 110 0.1W 0.1%

VCC

4

7

8

3

1

0

B

A

DI

VCC

U18 MAX488E

4

2

6

5

interface

Block

Path

GND

C57 0.1U 50V 10%

PO14_DCD1

GND

RO

Z

Y

GND

VCC

GND

5

RTS

D4 PMBD914 85V

0 0.125W +0.05

R63

DATA_IN

RS485_TX-

R60 110 0.1W 0.1%

RS485_TX+

5

B

10C6<

10C8<

3V3

Q3 MMBT3904

15K 0.125W 1% GND

E

C

R62 20K 0.125W 1%

3

R64 20K 0.125W 1%

6

ISP_ENTER

3V3

6

3

2

DTR

OUT

GND

R67 10K 0.125W 1%

R65 10K 0.125W 1%

1U 16V 10%

C58

Block

Sheet

3 of

GND

GND

E

C Q4 MMBT3904

5

7

4

C60 0.1U 50V 10%

R71

1

2

3V3

R72 332 0.125W 1%

8

Rev

2

Company

8

9 of

Sheet

Restricted

GE Healthcare

ARM_RESET

YELLOW

0 0.125W +0.05

11D6<>

C59 0.1U 50V 10%

GND

3V3

DS5 13 HSMY-C650

D6 PMBD914 85V

5176556SCH

Dwg No

RS232<3..0>

D5 PMBD914 85V

B

3V3

PO9_RXD1

Q Q_N

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

A_N B RD

CEXT REXT_CEXT

PO8_TXD1

R69 0 0.125W 0%

1 2 3

14 15

U12 74VHC123A

7

15

8C1<


2

R68

1

R66

Section 2.0 Central Listings R61

20K 0.125W 1%


[email protected]

Page 348

Page 348

20K 0.125W 1%



D

C

B

Mon Mar

11

1

2007

CPLD_IO<11>

BUZ_CMD

10A6>

CPLD_IO<33..0>

13:26:28

10C8<

12

11C8<> 7D4<> 9B3<>

GND

EXPOSURE_ENABLE

0.1U 50V 10%

C61

12V

9

8

7

6

5

4

DI

A

B

8

7

GND

RO

Z

Y

R75

C62

2

0.1U 50V 10%

A1 A2 A3 A4

OE_N

0.1U 50V 10%

C64

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

GND

VCC

7C5>

CPLD_IO<10>

X_RAY_LIGHT

R79 10K 0.125W 1%

10

R82 10K 0.125W 1%

GND

R81 110 0.1W 0.1%

R80 4.99K 0.125W 1%

VCC

7

8

3

1

BUZ

B

A

DI

R77 10K 0.125W 1%

3

4

18PIN

5

4

3

2

1

1

Path

2

interface

Block

8

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8

ULN2803

Q6

RO

Z

Y

GND

2111738

24V

VCC

MAX488E

U21

7

12

14

16

18

R78 10K 0.125W 1%

XRAY_ON/OFF-

XRAY_ON/OFF+

RESET

GND

0.1U 50V 10%

C65

6 VCC=3V3;GND=GND

8

6

4

2

1

RESET XRAY_CMD

3V3

10C6>

EXPOSURE_ENABLE

0.1U 50V 10%

C63

74LVC_LCX244

U7

GND

3V3

10C6< 10C8>

10C8<

VCC

4

3

GND

3

5

7

9

3

R83

O

10

RESP_CTRL

MC1489A

IN VCC=VCC;GND=GND

1

U20

1%

GND

B

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

A

0.125W

15K

2

74LVC-LCX14

B

74LVC-LCX14

A

U13

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

1

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

A1 A2 A3 A4

OE_N

74LVC_LCX244

U7

EXPOSURE_ENABLE-

R76 110 0.1W 0.1%

EXPOSURE_ENABLE+

U13

CPLD_IO<9>

CPLD_IO<8>

11

17

PREPARE

15

CPLD_IO<7>

13

CPLD_IO<5>

11

19

GND

CPLD_IO<6>

GND

4

2

6

5

XRAY_ON/OFF

EXPOSURE

VCC

MAX488E

U19

3

1

CPLD_IO<4>

R74 110 0.1W 0.1%

R73 4.99K 0.125W 1%

VCC

2

VCC

20K 0.125W 1%

2

R84

A

1

O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8

GND

5

R85 110 0.1W 0.1%

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

RESET-

RESET+

GND

24V

BUZ

XRAY_ON_LIGHT

PREPARE_SW

EXPOSURE_SW

XRAY_ON/OFF

COMMON GND

BUZZER

I150

P1

4

2

6

5

5

10A8> 10A6> 9B3<

10C8< 10C6< 7A7<

10B3< 10A3> 9A5>

8B8<> 10C6>

10B2<

10C8<

10C6<

6

6

XRAY_CMD

GND

VCC

C66

7 9

15

PREPARE_SW

Block

4 of

Sheet

5

CAN_GND

7

8

3

1

PIN

J11

RO

Z

Y

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

GND

RIGHT_ANGLE

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25

B

A

DI

VCC

MAX488E

U22

26

24

22

20

18

16

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

4

2

6

5

1

7

OHM

CAN_L

12V

8

2

Company

8

10

of

15

10A8> 10A6> 9B3< 8C8<>

10C6>

Restricted Sheet

10C8<

10C6<

10C1< 10A3< 10A3> 9A5>

GE Healthcare Rev

RS485_RX-

RESET-

XRAY_CMD-

EXPOSURE_SW

RS485_TX+

2

XRAY_CMD-

R89 110 0.1W 0.1%

XRAY_CMD+

EXPOSURE_ENABLE+

XRAY_ON/OFF+

BUZ_CMD

50

BLM31P500S

FL6

GND

5176556SCH

Dwg No

GENERATOR CONNECTOR

RIBBON_CABLE_STANDARD

25

23

21

EXPOSURE_ENABLERS485_TX-

19 XRAY_ON/OFF-

17

13

CAN_H

11

5 RS485_RX+

3

1

RESET+

GND

R87 110 0.1W 0.1%

R86 4.99K 0.125W 1%

VCC

XRAY_CMD+

0.1U 50V 10%

7


Page 349

[email protected]


R70

332 0.125W 1%


332 0.125W 1%

Page 349

B Size



D

C

B

Wed Feb

28

IN

16:00:42

1

332 0.125W 1%

R35

332 0.125W 1%

R34

2007

LED<6..1>

VCC

2

2

YELLOW

1

DS4 HSMY-C650

GREEN

1

DS3 HSMG-C650

GND

CPLD_IO<12> CPLD_IO<13> CPLD_IO<14> CPLD_IO<15>

2

16 CPLD_IO<16> 17 CPLD_IO<17>

12 13 14 15

0.1U 50V 10%

9 7 5 3

18 16 14 12

C67

A1 A2 A3 A4

7B2<>

3

GND

R97

READY

150 0.125W 1% R93

R99

10K 0.125W 1%

DTR

1 3 5 7 9

3 1 3 5 7 9

J8

KEYBOARD CONNECTOR J12

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

GND

4

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

2 4 6 8 10

Path

interface

Block

RTS

ISP_RXD

PDUGND

PIN RIGHT_ANGLE DUAL_ROW_HEADER

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

PIN RIGHT_ANGLE RIBBON_CABLE_LOW_PROFILE

OFF

ON

ISP_TXD

0

1

2

3

332 0.125W 1%

332 0.125W 1% R96

1.21K 0.125W 1% WARM R95

INHIBIT

TUBE

R98

10K 0.125W 1%

150 PDU24V 0.125W 1% POWER ON R100

VCC

XRAY ON

10K 0.125W 1%

R94

10K 0.125W 1%

R92

10K 0.125W 1%

10K 0.125W 1%

GND

R102

R91

5

RS232<3..0>

10K 0.125W 1%

R106

10K 0.125W 1%

R105

10K 0.125W 1%

R104

R103 10K 0.125W 1%

R101

5

10K 0.125W 1%

ON/OFF_KEY<3..0>

GND

11 13 15 17

A1 A2 A3 A4

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

19

OE_N

VCC=3V3;GND=GND U26 74LVC_LCX244

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

1 2 4 6 8

OE_N

U26 74LVC_LCX244

6

3V3

5

R90

2

10K 0.125W 1%

4

9D7<>

6

6

100V

100V D12 MMSD4148

100V D11 MMSD4148

100V D10 MMSD4148

100V D9 MMSD4148

100V D8 MMSD4148

D7 MMSD4148

Block

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

A1 A2 A3 A4

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4

A1 A2 A3 A4

OE_N

5 of

Sheet

5

GND

11 13 15 17

19

2 4 6 8

1

GND

VCC

0.1U 50V 10%

C68

CPLD_IO<19> CPLD_IO<18>

CPLD_IO<23> CPLD_IO<22> CPLD_IO<21> CPLD_IO<20>

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

9 7 5 3

VCC=VCC;GND=GND U23 74ABT244

18 16 14 12

OE_N

U23 74ABT244

7

19 18

23 22 21 20

Rev

2

Company

8

11

Sheet

of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

CPLD_IO<33..0>

8

15

9B3<> 7D4<> 10B1<>


3

A

3

4

2

0

Section 2.0 Central Listings 1

1

1


[email protected]

Page 350

Page 350

2




D

C

B

A

Fri

Dec

15

1

15:41:36

PDUGND

24V_IN

1

CR3 SM6T27A 27V 2

PDUGND

24V_IN

2

1

TIN

OHM

2006

OHM

GND

12V

200

FL2 ZJYS51R5-2P

200

FL1 ZJYS51R5-2P

TIN

TP4

3

4

TP3

3

4

2

1

200

OHM

2

GND

C72 0.1U 50V 10%

GND

C71 0.1U 50V 10%

3

4

TIN

TP6

C73 4.7U 50V 10% C74 0.1U 50V 10%

2

1

1 3 4 8

10N 50V 10%

C75

3

4

OUTPUT

5

4

5

3

3

10N 50V 10%

HV

L1

J1 1 2

G1 G2

33U 20% D14 5A LSM340J 40V

G1 G2

PIN RIGHT_ANGLE WIRE_TO_BOARD

1 2

C85

L2

33U 20% D13 5A LSM340J 40V

C86

4

TWO PARTS AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE

CXA-L10L

2

1

U25

C76

1 3 4 8

TO 12V

INPUT SWIT_OUT FEEDBACK BOOST ON_OFF GND TAB_GND

U10 LM2676

24V

TIN

TP5


U9 LM2676

TO 5V

TO LCD

2 6 7 R112 1K 0.125W 1%

R111 9.09K 0.1W 0.1%

R109 3.16K 0.1W 0.1% 2 6 7 R110 1K 0.125W 1%

12V

FL8 ZJYS51R5-2P

C70 100U 50V 20%

5.11K 0.125W 1%

R108

C69 100U 50V 20%

5.11K 0.125W 1%

R107

24V

22U 35V 10%

5

Path

R114 1K 0.125W 1%

5

DS7 HSMG-C650 GREEN

R113 499 0.125W 1%

DS6 HSMG-C650 GREEN

power

Block

CR5 P6SMB18A 18V

CR4 SMBJ5.0 6.7V

12V

VCC

SHIELD

22U 35V 10%

2 1

POWER SUPPLY

4

2 1

3

5 4

C77

0.1U 50V 10%

1K 0.125W 1%

R115

PDUGND

24V_IN

GND

VCC

3.3V

2

1

6

200

OHM

FL9 ZJYS51R5-2P

10U 16V +80%-20%

Block

3

4

1.21V

Sheet

1 of

3 6

1 2

1

4 5

GND

24V

1.4K 0.1W 1%

7

5176556SCH

C82 100U 50V 20%

2.87K 0.1W 1%

1K 0.125W 1%

R120 1K 0.125W 1%

R118

TP9

R117

TIN

GND

Dwg No

C81 0.1U 50V 10%

GND<1-0>

VOUT SENSE_ADJ

75V

D16 BAS116

GND1 GND2

VOUT SENSE

TO 20V

VIN SHDN_N

VR1 LT1963EQ 2 1

75V

VIN SHDN_N

VR2 LT1529-3.3

D15 BAS116

5V TO 3.3V

5V TO 1.8V

GND

C80 0.1U 50V 10%

1K 0.125W 1%

R116

7

TIN

6

TP7

C78 10U 16V +80%-20%

VCC

TIN

C79

TP8

2

GND

3V3

TIN

TP10

10U 16V +80%-20%

Rev

2

Company

8

12

Sheet

of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

1V8

C83 100U 16V 10%

8

15


Page 351

[email protected]

1

R119


C84

Page 351

B Size




Fri

Dec

15

1

15:41:38

2006

2

2

IO

3

3

ARM_JTAG<5..0>

IN

4

ARM_RESET

4

5 2 4 3 0 1

IO

0.1U 50V 10%

GND

GND

2 4 6 8 10

R123 10K 0.125W 1%

R122 10K 0.125W 1%

jtag

Block

Path

CPLD_JTAG<3..0>

3V3

R121 10K 0.125W 1%

5

2 4 6 8 10

1 3 5 7 9

J2 1 3 5 7 9

R126 10K 0.125W 1%

3V3

R127 10K 0.125W 1%

3

6

1 0 2 CPLD_TDI

R129 10K 0.125W 1%

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

J5 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

R130 10K 0.125W 1%

Block

1 of

Sheet

R131 10K 0.125W 1%

PIN STRAIGHT DUAL_ROW_HEADER_BREAK

6

CPLD_TCK CPLD_TDO CPLD_TMS

3V3

ARM_TRST ARM_TDI ARM_TMS ARM_TCK ARM_RTCK ARM_TDO

R128 10K 0.125W 1%

PIN STRAIGHT DUAL_ROW_HEADER_BREAK

GND

R124 10K 0.125W 1%

5

1

GND

C88

0.1U 50V 10%

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

7

Rev

2

Company

8

13

Sheet

of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

8

15


D

C

B

A

1


[email protected]

Page 352

Page 352

C87



D

C

B

A

Mon Mar

12

1

13:27:29

2007

3V3

600

OHM

FL10 BLM31A601S

C89 1U 16V 10%

1

2

2

C90 10N 50V 10%

GND

OUT

C91 0.1U 50V 10%

HCLK

R134

R132 1K 0.125W 1%

1

4

Y2

33.2 0.125W 1%

B

A

5

40MHZ

ENABLE

VCC

3

GND

VOUT

GND

2

3

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

6

U13 74LVC-LCX14

3

A

B

4

IN

IN

3V3

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

3

U13 74LVC-LCX14

TIN

ARM_CON<9..0>

R135

TIN

4

10K 500MW 10%

R133 CW

TP_LCDV

GND

ADDR<0> ADDR<1> ADDR<2> ADDR<3> ADDR<4> ADDR<5> ADDR<6> ADDR<7> ADDR<8> ADDR<9> ADDR<10> ADDR<11> ADDR<12> ADDR<13> ADDR<14> ADDR<15>

lcd

14B7> 14B7> 14B7> 14B7>

Path

FPD<3> FPD<2> FPD<1> FPD<0>

GND

FRM LOAD CP DISP

Block

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

3 9 4

CS3 OE WE

14B7> 14B7> 14B7> 14B7>

ARM_RESET

ADDR<23..0>

4

33.2 0.125W 1%

IN

TP_LCDGND

R125

2

10K 0.125W 1%


Page 353

[email protected]

1

5

3V3

3V3

5

CNF0 CNF1 CNF2 CNF3 CNF4

SCANEN TSTEN

37 38

G1 G2

G1 G2

VSS<4..0>

GND

SHIELD

6

Block

Sheet

1 of

1

C93 0.1U 50V 10%

14C4<

C92 0.1U 50V 10%

14C4< 14C4< DISP

C94 0.1U 50V 10%

C95 0.1U 50V 10%

INPUT

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

GND

3V3

14C4< LOAD FRM

CP

23 24 29 26 30 27 31

TIME

FPSHIFT XECL YSCL FPLINE FPFRAME MOD_OUT YDIS

CYCLE

14D4< 14D4< FPSHIFT:CLOCK 14D4< 14D4<

IO

IO

FPD<0> FPD<1> FPD<2> FPD<3>

DATA<31..0>

21 20 19 18

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

FPDAT0 FPDAT1 FPDAT2 FPDAT3

DATA<0> DATA<1> DATA<2> DATA<3> DATA<4> DATA<5> DATA<6> DATA<7>

ARM_IO<30..0>

52 51 50 49 47 46 45 44

54 PO16_EINT0

7

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

WAIT_N

SOCKET RIGHT_ANGLE FLEX_CABLE_ZIF_BOTTOM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J14

XCG1 XCD1

35 34

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

RESET_N

36 56 57 58 59 60 CLKI

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

16 15 14 13 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 2 64 63 62

39

CS_N RD_N WR_N AS_N

43 41 42 61

COREVDD<2..0> HIOVDD<2..0> NIOVDD<1..0>

U15 S1D13700F02

6

1

C96 0.1U 50V 10%

:

Rev

2

Company

8

14

Sheet

of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

= 16

8

15


R136


15K 0.125W 1%

16

Page 353

B Size



Page 354


Fri

Dec

15

1

15:41:41

2006

2

IO

ARM_IO<30..0>

3

3

2

PO3_SDA

PO2_SCL

R137 10K 0.125W 1%

3V3

4

GND

4

7

1 2 3

6 SDA

5

Path

memory

Block

VCC=3V3;GND=GND

A0 A1 A2

SCL

WP

U11 24C256

5

R138 10K 0.125W 1%

5

GND

3V3

0.1U 50V 10%

C97

6

6

Block

1 of

Sheet

1

7

5176556SCH

Dwg No

7

Rev

2

Company

8

15

Sheet

of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

8

15


D

C

3


B

A

2

Page 354

[email protected]

1




D

C

B

A

Fri

Dec

29

1

16:04:03

2006

GND

VCC

C1 10U 35V 10%

P 12V_GND

12V_IN

1A 63V

2

C2 0.47U 16V 10%

F1 FAST_ACTION

200

OHM

3

4

12V

1 2 28 26 27

5V

SYNCIN 0VIN1 0VIN2

VS1 VS2

U1 DCR010505U

ISOLATED

2

1

FL1 ZJYS51R5-2P

POWER SUPPLY

2

17 12 16 13

3

14

VOUT

C4 0.1U 50V 10%

ERROR_N VREC ENABLE 0VOUT

5V

C3 100U 35V 20%

3

TP1

2 6 7

12V

C5 1U 25V 10%

4

GND

TIN

TP2

4 8

1 3

5

jedi_tav

Path

10N 50V 10%

C7

D1 LSM340J 40V

33U 20% 5A

L1

5

RS232_GND

C8 0.47U 16V 10%

RS232_VCC

TO 5V

Block

C6 47U 35V 10%

TIN

TP3


VARIOUS U2 LM2676

CHANGE TO 16V

R3 10K 0.125W 1%

R2 1K 0.125W 1%

R1 3.16K 0.125W 1%

TIN

4

TIN

TP4

C9 10U 35V 10%

6

6.8V

D2 MMSZ5235B

6

VCC

Block

1 of

Sheet

4

7

5182285SCH

Dwg No

OFF WANG ZY

WANG ZY

SIGN

8

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

1 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

29-DEC-06

DATE 03-JULY-06 1

ECR/ECO A

REVISION

POWER GOOD

DS1 HLMP-1790 GREEN

R4 511 0.125W 1%

7

4

D

C

B

A


[email protected]

1

2 1


REV 2 01July04

3.4

Page 355

B Size



Jedi Generator TAV Interface Board

Page 355


D

C

B

A

Wed Sep

13

1

14:29:56

2

2006

C11 0.1U 50V 10%

-

VCC

2

R8 0 0.125W +0.05

2

20K 0.125W 1%

R7

RS232_GND

R6 20K 0.125W 1%

C13 0.1U 50V 10%

RS232_VCC

1U 16V 10%

C14

3

C1P C1N C2P C2N

2 4 5 6

1 12

3

Q_N

Q

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A_N B RD

CEXT REXT_CEXT

U4 74HC123

1 2 3

14 15

RS232_GND

14

GND

13 4

13 RS232_TX 9 RXD 10 16

T1OUT R1OUT

EN_N INVALID_N FORCEON FORCEOFF_N

T1IN R1IN

VCC VP VN

15 3 7

U3 MAX3221E

CONVERTOR

TXD 11 RS232_RX 8

RS232

C12 0.1U 50V 10%

R5 1K 0.125W 1%

RS232_VCC

RS232_RX

C10 0.1U 50V 10%

RS232<1..2>

RS485

1

1

2

4

GND1

VCC

GND1

VI

VDD1

5

4

R16 110 0.1W 0.1%

Block

1

5

VCC

R13 1K 0.125W 1%

GND

C31 0.1U 50V 10%

GND

R14

6

1U 16V 10%

C15

CONSOLE_TX-

20K 0.125W 1%

4

Sheet

9 10 11

6 7

Z

Y

RO GND

4

GND

Q_N

Q

4

12

5

CONSOLE_RX+

7

2

3

1

VCC

R18 511 0.125W 1%

8

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

2 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

RX LED

YELLOW

1

DS3 HLMP-1719

RS485<1..4>

CONSOLE_RX-

R17 110 0.1W 0.1%

5182285SCH

Dwg No

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A_N B RD

7

2 RS485_RX

6

5

CEXT REXT_CEXT

U4 74HC123

B

A

DI

VCC

U7 MAX488E

2 of

7

3 CONSOLE_TX+

8

2

C32 0.1U 50V 10%

VCC

5

VCC

6

6 RS485_TX

8

2 RS485_RX

1

VCC

GND2

VO

VDD2

Path

jedi_tav

Block

R11 511 0.125W 1%

GND2

VO

TX LED

YELLOW

1

5

6

VDD2

RS232_GND

TXD

4

VDD1 VI

U6 HCPL0720-060

RS232_VCC

8

1 2

RS232_GND

RXD

U5 HCPL0720-060

RS232_VCC

C30 0.1U 50V 10%

DS2 HLMP-1719

C29 0.1U 50V 10%

4

4

D

C

B

A

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 REV 2 01July04


[email protected]

Page 356

Page 356

B Size



D

C

B

A

Wed Sep

13

1

14:29:56

2006

GND

R19 20K 0.125W 1%

B

2

Y

3

2

GND

VCC

C16 0.1U 50V 10%

3

GND

VCC

C17 0.1U 50V 10%

RS485<1..4>

GND

VCC

C18 0.1U 50V 10%

CONSOLE_JEDI<1..7>

1 2

1 2

GND

VCC

4 7 5

1

AND CONNECTORS

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A

1

U8 74ACT00

INTERFACE

3

EXT_CAN_H

C19 0.1U 50V 10%

4

GND

VCC

C20 0.1U 50V 10%

GND

G1 G2

G1 G2

C23 0.1U 50V 10%

Path

GND

VCC

5

GND

VCC

C24 0.1U 50V 10%

RS232_GND

SHIELD

14EXPOSURE_SW 15PREPARE_SW 16ON_SW 17CONSOLE_RX18CONSOLE_TX19EXT_CAN_L 20JEDI_TX21JEDI_RX22JEDI_EXP_SW 23 24 EXT_CAN_H 25 RS232_TX

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

5

SOCKET RIGHT_ANGLE STD_DENSITY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

J1

jedi_tav

Block

C21 0.1U 50V 10%

RS232_GND

VCC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

12V_GND

12V_IN

CONSOLE_RX+ CONSOLE_TX+

JEDI_TX+ JEDI_RX+ JEDI_ON_SW JEDI_PREP_SW EXT_CAN_L RS232_RX 2

4

1

6

5

2 3 4

3 4

3 4

Block

Sheet

6

3 of

4

GND

7

5182285SCH

Dwg No

MH4 MHP4_50TB10_00

MH3 MHP4_50TB10_00

7

MH2 MHP4_50TB10_00

MH1 MHP4_50TB10_00

RS232<1..2>

6

1 1

2

1

1

1

C22 22N 250V 20%

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

3 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

SHIELD

8

4

D

C

B

A


Page 357

[email protected]


1


REV 2 01July04

Page 357

B Size



D

C

B

VCC

Wed Sep

2

13

GND

1

14:29:56

1U 16V 10%

C25

2006

EXPOSURE_SW

VCC

R22

GND

C26 0.1U 50V 10%

D3 BAS116 75V

2

RS232_GND

Q

IN

13 4

1U 16V 10%

C27

GND

3

COM

2

3

COIL1 COIL2

1 5

9 10 11

6 7

B

13

Q_N

Q

11

12

5

6

4

3

5

4 Y

6

15K 0.125W 1%

R24

R25 20K 0.125W 1%

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

B

A

U8 74ACT00

PREPARE_SW

12V

5

GND

IN

B

10

Y

4

Path

jedi_tav

Block

5

6 O

2

1 5

8

RED

4 3

511 0.125W 1%

R26

JEDI_PREP_SW

7

7

6

Block

4 of

Sheet

4

7

5182285SCH

Dwg No

8

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

4 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

VCC

CONSOLE_JEDI<1..7>

AND INDICATOR

1

2

CLOSED OPN

DS4 HLMP-1700

COM

COIL1 COIL2

K2 G6RN_1_12VDC

RESP_CTRL VCC=VCC;GND=GND

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A

U8 74ACT00

4

6

RS232_GND

U10 MC1489A

9

C28 0.1U 50V 10%

D4 BAS116 75V

PREPARE,EXPORSURE

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A_N B RD

Y

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A

U8 74ACT00

JEDI_EXP_SW

12

4 3

CEXT REXT_CEXT

U9 74HC123

CLOSED OPN

K1 G6RN_1_12VDC

RESP_CTRL VCC=VCC;GND=GND

3 O

U10 MC1489A

Q_N

1

VCC=VCC;GND=GND

A_N B RD

CEXT REXT_CEXT

U9 74HC123

1 2 3

14 15

R23

200K 0.125W 1%

R21 20K 0.125W 1%

15K 0.125W 1%

12V

2

2

A

R20


392K 0.125W 1%

5

1

4

D

C

B

A



[email protected]

Page 358

Page 358

B Size



PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 359


1:28 PM



3.5

I/F Board RAD Electrical

[email protected]


Page 359

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 360


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 360


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 361


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 361

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 362


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 362


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 363


1:28 PM



3.6

I/F Board RAD V2 Electrical

[email protected]


Page 363

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 364


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 364


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 365


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 365

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 366


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 366


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 367


1:28 PM



3.7

Rotor board

[email protected]


Page 367

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 368


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 368


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 369


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 369

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 370


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 370


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 371


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 371

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 372


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 372


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 373


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 373

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 374


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 374


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 375


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 375

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 376


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 376


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 377


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 377

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 378


1:28 PM



3.8

Heater board

[email protected]

Page 378


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 379


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 379

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 380


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 380


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 381


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 381

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 382


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 382


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 383


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 383

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 384


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 384


D

C

B

State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process. See the GEMS ePDM System to determine the status of this document.

1

Tue

26

A1

L2 FILTER

2

1

14:10:18

DCBUSN_IN 0.25AMP

2005

3 4 ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE

1

ISLOCALPART=TRUE

0.25AMP 2.5A DCBUSP_IN 2X3.3MH

A1

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

2

150K 0.1W 1%

C20 0.1U 50V 10%

C28 2.2N 50V 10%

R29 10K 0.1W 1%

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

R26

C24 100P 50V 5%

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

R30 20K 0.1W 1%

R32 4.99K 0.1W 1%

-400V_LINE

R28 20K 0.1W 1%

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

C5 2.2U 450V 5%

1%

R31 1MEG 0.1W

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

C29 2.2N 50V 10%

7 4 2 3

DCBUS_N

5

8 6 1

2

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

GND

VREF VOUT COMP

0.25AMP STARTUP_CHAIN

100 0.1W 1%

R27

VIN RT_CT VFB I_SENSE

3

0.25AMP

R20

STARTUP_CHAIN

R13

0.25AMP STARTUP_CHAIN

STARTUP_CHAIN

U5 UC3844A

0.25AMP

C25 0.1U 50V 10%

Approved Document - 2212166-5SCH_r1.pdf Page 2 of 3

Apr

PIN STRAIGHT TAB

CF1

1

CF2 PIN STRAIGHT TAB

DCBUS_P

0.25AMP

+400_LINE

VOLTAGE

R21

2 R10 1 2 1 2

FROM LINE

47K 1W 5% 47K 1W 5% 47K 1W 5% 2

NEON

NE1 N76530

100K 0.5W 5% R23 1 C23

1

HIGH

C27 2.2N 50V 10%

3

R25 22 0.5W 5%

4

1K 0.1W 1%

R35

DCBUS_N 0.5AMP

CR17 70V BAV99

0.1U 50V 10%

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

ISLOCALPART=TRUE C7

1

4

CR9 SMCJ43A 50.3V

C19 0.47U 50V 10%

Block

R24 20K 0.1W 1%

E

C

75V

Path

A

CR15 SMCJ43A 50.3V

CR14 SMCJ43A 50.3V

CR16 SMCJ43A 50.3V

CR21 SMCJ43A 50.3V

CR20 SSTA206S 600V

CR19 SSTA206S 600V

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP

CR11 SSTA206S 600V

CR5 SSTA206S 600V

5

T1

V160AC 0.75AMP

19 19

5

5

9 1010

SNUB_CHAIN 0.25AMP

11

7

1

9

6

20

6

12

12

13 13

14 14

15 15

R34

100V

CR2 DSS10-01A

1 of

Sheet

1AMP

0.5AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

2

-5V

VIN

GND

7

2

1

R3 1 OHM 0.5MW 5% LOW_VOLTAGE 1.5AMP

2

1

TAB STRAIGHT PIN TURN CF3

1

2

2

1

1

M15V

ISLOCALPART=TRUE

0.5AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

R12 1 OHM POWER_M15V 0.5MW 5%

0.75AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

1 of

Restricted

GE Healthcare

0.75AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

2212166-5SCH

Dwg No

3 1

VOUT

1AMP

A1

1

TAB STRAIGHT PIN CF4

0.75AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

L4 1U 2.5

A1

160V

2

ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE ISLOCALPART=TRUE X2 X1 X3 X4 X5 X6 HOLE HOLE HOLE HOLEHOLEHOLE

1U 2.5 TURN

8

P15V ISLOCALPART=TRUE

2PIN ISLOCALPART=TRUE

CR18 SMCJ43A 100V

R33 CR22 SMCJ43A 47K 100V LOW_VOLTAGE 1W 0.75AMP 5%

V160DC 0.75AMP

POWER_P15V ISLOCALPART=TRUE LOW_VOLTAGE L1 LOW_VOLTAGE 10A

U1 LM7915 ISLOCALPART=TRUE 2

100V

CR1 MBR3100

C13 0.47U 50V 10%

C8

3.3U 250V 20%

0.75AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

3.3U 250V 20%

C6

1U 2.5 TURN

ISLOCALPART=TRUE

LOW_VOLTAGE

Block

7

ISLOCALPART=TRUE L3

V160DC 0.75AMP

C16 0.47U 50V LOW_VOLTAGE10% 1AMP

1KV 1N 20%

C30

11A

1200V

CR3 DSEI12-12A

330 1W 5% ISLOCALPART=TRUE

V160DC 0.75AMP

220P 2KV 10%

C26

ISLOCALPART=TRUE

6

18 18 3 3 LOW_VOLTAGE 17 17 0.25AMP 16 44 16

22

DCBUS_N 0.25AMP 88

0.25AMP SNUB_CHAIN

SNUB_CHAIN 0.25AMP

0.25AMP SW_SNUB

C31 220P 2KV 10%

ISLOCALPART=TRUE HS1 HEATSINK

Q1 IRG4PH10U 2198557

3

CR13 BAW56

0.25AMP ZENERS_CHAIN




0.25AMP MID_ZD

DCBUS_SW 0.25AMP

5

LVPS_TRI_V5

0.25AMP DCBUS_N

G

2 K2

1 K1

CR10 SMCJ43A 50.3V

ZENERS_CHAIN 0.25AMP

ZENERS_CHAIN 0.25AMP CR8 SMCJ43A 50.3V

CR4 SMCJ43A 50.3V

ZENERS_CHAIN 0.25AMP

0.5AMP DCBUS_N

100U 25V 20%

3

R14

A

F1

F2

C4 C3

100K 0.5W 5% K2 1 A

1500U 25V 20% C1

2

R38 R37 R36

1 7 11

330 1W 5% 330 1W 5% 330 1W 5%

1500U 25V 20% CR12 SMCJ16A 330U 25V 20% CR7 SMCJ16A 1

0.1 DCBUS_N 0.1 1W 1W 1% 0.25AMP 1%

0.1 1W 1%

[email protected]

1

1

330U 25V 20% C2

2 1 18V 1

R7 R5 R4

D

C

B

A


330 1W 5%

1

6 20

C12 C18 1

ISLOCALPART=TRUE

1

AK

Chapter 10 - Schematics FORWARD_MEASURE

0.47U 50V 10%

GREEN 18V

DS2 HLMP-1790

0.47U 50V 10%


REV 2 01July04

3.9

Page 385

B Size



LVPS board

Page 385

State: RELEASE - Document is released and under formal Change Control. Changes are subject to the ECR/ECO Process. See the GEMS ePDM System to determine the status of this document.


D

C

B

1

12:17:55

2005

75V

2

K2 2

LOW_VOLTAGE 0.25AMP

C10 0.47U 50V 10%

0.25AMP

LOW_VOLTAGE 0.25AMP

R19 1K 0.1W 1%

R17 1K 0.1W 1%

3

R1

C15 0.1U 50V 10%

P15V

100K 0.1W 1%

LOW_VOLTAGE 0.25AMP

R8

4

4

C22 0.47U 50V 10%

M15V

LOW_VOLTAGE

2 LOW_VOLTAGE 3 0.25AMP

R15 20K 0.1W 1%

FOR 100MA

10 1W 5%

0.25AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

10K LOW_VOLTAGE 0.1W 1% VCC 0.25AMP

LOW_VOLTAGE

1AMP

C17 0.1U 50V 10%

OPTIMIZE

P15V

LOW_VOLTAGE R16 2K 0.1W 1%

R18 2K 0.1W 1%

M15V

C14 0.1U 50V 10%

C11 0.1U 50V 10% LOW_VOLTAGE

P15V

LOW_VOLTAGE R11 0.25AMP

3

8

K1 1

Approved Document - 2212166-5SCH_r1.pdf Page 3 of 3

Mon May 16

CR6 BAW56 0.5AMP LOW_VOLTAGE FORWARD_MEASURE 3 A

2

VP 4 VN 1 GND BAL_STR 6 5 BAL 1

R6 10K 0.1W 1%

5V

VIN

Path

VCC

C21 0.1U 50V 10%

LVPS_TRI_V5

Block

4 GND

0.75AMP

_MAINS_DROP

RED

LOW_VOLTAGE 0.25AMP

3

5

5

0.25AMP 4 3 6 7 2 DI DE A B RE_N

RO

U2 MAX485 1

0.25AMP LOW_VOLTAGE

C9 0.1U 50V 10%

LOW_VOLTAGE VCC 0.25AMP

6

6

VCC=VCC;GND=GND_CHASSIS

VCC LOW_VOLTAGE

DS1 HLMP 1709 ISLOCALPART=TRUE

LOW_VOLTAGE 0.25AMP

R9 2K 0.1W 1%

VCC 0.25AMP

VOUT

U4 MC78M05CDT

7 VOUT

U3 LM311

VCC

LOW_VOLTAGE

0.25AMP

2 1

A

1

Block

Sheet

2 of

R2 1K 0.1W 1%

2

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

7

2212166-5SCH

Dwg No

POWER_M15V

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

8

Rev

1

Company

Sheet

8

2 of 2

Restricted

GE Healthcare

LOW_VOLTAGE

POWER_P15V

PIN STRAIGHT RIBBON_CABLE_STANDARD

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25

J1

0.25AMP

LOW_VOLTAGE

7

D

C

B

A



[email protected]

Page 386

Page 386

B Size



PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 387


1:28 PM



3.10

Inverter

[email protected]


Page 387

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 388


1:28 PM



3.11

Gate cmd

[email protected]

Page 388


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 389


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 389

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 390


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 390


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 391


1:28 PM



3.12

Dual snub

[email protected]


Page 391

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 392


1:28 PM



3.13

AC/DC board

[email protected]

Page 392


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 393


1:28 PM



3.14

AEC board

[email protected]


Page 393

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 394


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 394


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 395


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 395

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 396


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 396


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 397


1:28 PM



3.15

Rad IF

[email protected]


Page 397

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 398


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 398


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 399


1:28 PM



[email protected]


Page 399

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 400


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 400


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 401


1:28 PM



Chapter 11 - MIS Chart Section 1.0 Scope This section provides detailed information about each MIS run in the form of individual MIS cable charts. Each of the following charts defines a single interconnection in the system. The charts are arranged in the order, according to MIS numbers. In some cases, a particular MIS number is repeated, except for a letter added at the end. Such a set of charts use the same cable, and carry essentially the same signals, however the applications for each chart is different - the point of connection is different (at one or both ends) for each chart in the set.

Section 2.0 How to Use

Figure 11-1 MIS Chart Example

Chapter 11 - MIS Chart

Page 401

[email protected]

Each MIS cable shown on the MIS map has its own MIS chart. Each chart identifies all signals present on the cable, and the specific pins associated with each signal. See Figure 11-1 for an example.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 402


1:28 PM



Section 3.0 MIS Charts 3.1 3.1.1

System Console J1 Handswitch Interface, 5184620

Handswitch

System Console

Handswitch

J1 COM

1

PREP

2

COM

3

EXP

4

2 3 4

J2 FW Download Serial Port, 5194292

System Console

Service Laptop

J2

Serial Port

1 2 3

Receive Data Transmit Data

to console from console

4 5

Page 402

Signal Ground

Section 3.0 MIS Charts

GND

[email protected]

3.1.2

1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 403


1:28 PM



System Console

Download Tool

J2

Serial Port

1 2 3

Receive Data Transmit Data

to console from console

Data Terminal Ready 4

from console Signal Ground

5

GND

6 7

from console [email protected]

3.1.3

Request to Send

J3 Power and RTL Interface, 5183903

PDU

System Console

TM3

J3

1

DC24V

2

GND

2 Console Power Input

3

GND


4

E

5

Power Issue A

6 7

Power Issue B PSW



4 5 6 7 RTL (0-DC24V; Active: 0V)

Page 403

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 404


1:28 PM



3.1.4

J4 Generator Interface, 5182354

System Console

TAV

J4

1

12V_GND

9

RS485_RX+

2

10

RS485_TX+

3

11

12V_GND

12

12V_IN

13 14

17

22

23

24

CAN_H Exposure_SW Prepare_SW

ON_SW

RS485_RX-

RS485_TX-

CAN_L


1

4 5 6 14 15

16

17

18

19

[email protected]

15

Page 404

J1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 405


1:28 PM



JEDI

TAV

J9

J1

11

RS232-GND

10

RS485_TX+

8

9

RS485_RX+

9

17

ON_SW

15

Prepare_SW

24 23

14

13

RS485_TXRS485_RX-

Exposure_SW

CAN_H

JEDI

11 12 20 21

22

24

TAV

J8

J1

3

TX

2

RX

5

10

[email protected]

22

CAN_L

7

RS232-GND


25 13 23

Page 405

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 406


1:28 PM



3.2 3.2.1

Generator Generator Power Cable, 5196454 PDU

TM1 Un TM1 Vn TM1 Wn

3.2.2

Generator

380 VAC 380 VAC 380 VAC

Page 406

P3

Generator

E

G

Table TM1-XS105 Cable, 5193103 Table

Tube Stand

TM1

XP105

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

XP106 1

5

XP106 2

6


[email protected]

Grouding Bar

3.3.1

P2

Generator Grounding Cable, 5196643 PDU

3.3

P1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 407


1:28 PM



3.3.2

Table Grounding Cable 1, 5193105 PDU

Grouding Bar

3.3.3

Table

E

Table Grounding Cable 2, 5193106 Table

PE1

Tube Stand

E

Table Grounding Cable 3, 5193107 Tube Stand

PE2

3.3.5

PE2

[email protected]

3.3.4

PE1

Tube Control Box

E

PE3

Table Grounding Cable 5, 5193109 Table Base

PE5

Table Cassette Tray

E


PE6

Page 407

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 408


1:28 PM



3.3.6

Table Power Cable, 5193607 PDU TM2

5 6 7 8 9

3.3.6.1

24 V 0V foot-1 24 V 0V

3 4 8 2 1

Table MC7 Cable, 5197242

Tube Stand

XP102

MC7 Cable

2

24V 0V


1 2

[email protected]

Control Box

1

Page 408

Table TM1

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 409


1:28 PM



3.3.7

Table Cable No1, 5197244 Control Box / Collimator

Tube Stand

Control Box XS103 1

XP101 1

Control Box XS103 2

XP101 2

Control Box XS103 3 Control Box XS103 4

XP105 1

Control Box XS103 5

XP105 2 XP105 3 XP105 4

Collimator Connector 2

XP105 5


XP105 6

[email protected]




Page 409

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 410


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 410


PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 411


1:28 PM



Appendix A - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Section 1.0 Compliance Statement This equipment complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 EMC standard for medical devices. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment may cause radio frequency interference to other medical and non-medical devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable protection against such interference, this product complies the radiated emission as per CISPR11 Group1 Class A standard limits. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following measure(s): Reorient or relocate the affected device(s)

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected device (see recommended separation distances)

•

Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device

•

Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions

Use of accessories, transducers, cables and other parts other than those specified by the manufacturer of this equipment may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users' authority to operate the equipment. All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded, except when technologically prohibited. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference. The XR 6000 is predominantly intended for use in non-domestic environments, and not directly connected to the Public Mains Network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. The compatible accessories must be used within the recommended operating conditions outlined in the operation manuals. In addition to calibration and warm-up, other devices must be reset before and after use to ensure accurate dose measurements. Sustained exposure to electromagnetic fields (exceeding the test conditions) may cause false measurements. Failure to follow the recommended use may cause false measurements. The magnetic field environment from a MRI device located nearby is a risk of interference. All of the above are required to achieve the Electromagnetic Compatibility for a typical installation of the XR 6000. Further detailed data & requirements are described in the Use Recommendations and Installation Recommendations sections.

Appendix A - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Page 411

[email protected]

•

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 412


1:28 PM



Section 2.0 Compatibility Tables This equipment complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 EMC standard for medical devices. The XR 6000 is suitable to be used in an electromagnetic environment, as per the limits & recommendations described in the tables hereafter: •

Emission Compliance level & limits (Table 1).

•

Immunity Compliance level & recommendations to maintain equipment clinical utility (see Table 2 and Table 3).

Note: This system complies with above mentioned EMC standard when used with supplied cables. If different cable lengths are required, contact a qualified service representative for advice.

2.1

Electromagnetic Emission Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions The XR 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the XR 6000 should assure that it is used in such an environment. Compliance

Electromagnetic Environment Guidance

RF emission, CISPR 11

Group 1

The XR 6000 uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.

RF emissions, Class A CISPR 11

The XR 6000 is suitable for use in non-domestic environments, and not directly connected to the Public Mains Network. The XR 6000 is predominantly intended for use (e.g. in hospitals) with an appropriate power supply (see operation manual) and the recommended shielding for portable use.

Harmonic emissions, Not applicable IEC 61000-3-2 Voltage fluctuations/ Not applicable flicker emissions, IEC 61000-3-3

Table 1 XR 6000 Electromagnetic Emission

Page 412

Section 2.0 Compatibility Tables

[email protected]

Emissions Test

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 413


1:28 PM



2.2

Electromagnetic Immunity

Guidance and Manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity. The XR 6000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the XR 6000 should assure that it is used in such an environment. Immunity Test

IEC 60601-1-2 Test Level Compliance Level

Electrostatic  6 kV contact. discharge (ESD),  8 kV air. IEC 61000-4-2

Electrical transient/burst, EC 61000-4-4

 6 kV contact.  8 kV air.

Electromagnetic Guidance

Environment

Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.

fast  2 kV for power supply  2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be lines. lines. that of a typical commercial or  1 kV for input/output  1 kV for input/output hospital environment lines.

Surge, IEC 61000-4-5

 1 kV differential mode.  1 kV differential mode. Mains power quality should be  2 kV common mode.  2 kV common mode. that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. < 5% UT, (> 95% dip in UT) 0% UT for 5 sec. for 0.5 cycle. 40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles. 70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles. < 5% UT, (> 95% dip in UT) for 5 sec.

Power frequency (50/ 3 A/m 60 Hz) magnetic field, IEC 61000-4-8

3 A/m

Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the XR 6000 requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the XR 6000 be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a battery. Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.

Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.

Table 2 XR 6000 Electromagnetic Immunity


Page 413

[email protected]

Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines, IEC 61000-411

lines.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 414


1:28 PM



Guidance and Manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity. The XR 6000 is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The customer or the user of the XR 6000 should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below. Immunity Test

IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Test Level Level

Conducted IEC 61000-4-6

RF, 3 Vrms, 150 kHz to V1 = 3Vrms 80 MHz

Radiated IEC 61000-4-3

RF 3 V/m, 80 MHz to E1 = 3V/m 2.5 GHz

Electromagnetic Environment Guidance Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the XR 6000, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.

Recommended Separation Distance

d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3

80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site surveya, should be less than the compliance level in each frequency rangeb. Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:

a

Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the XR 6000 is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the XR 6000 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the XR 6000. b

Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than [V1] V/m.

These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

Table 3 XR 6000 Electromagnetic Immunity (Continued)

Page 414

Section 2.0 Compatibility Tables

[email protected]

where, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m).

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 415


1:28 PM



Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the XR 6000 The XR 6000 is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the XR 6000 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the XR 6000 as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment. Rated Maximum Output Power (P) of Transmitter Watts (W)

Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz

80 MHz to 800 MHz

800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

d = 1.2

d = 1.2

d = 2.3

Separation meters

Distance

Separation meters

Distance

Separation meters

0.01 (10 mW)

0.12

0.12

0.23

0.1 (100 mW)

0.38

0.38

0.74

1

1.2

1.2

2.3

10

3.8

3.8

7.3

100

12

12

23

Distance

NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies. NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

Table 4 Recommended Separation Distances

Level System

Name XR-6000 system

Fix exposure Subsystem AEC

Subsystem

Positioner movement

Subsystem System console

Subsystem

Power Distribution Unit

Component Bucky

Essential Performance Exposur; Exposure parameter display and set; Positioner movement.

Prob./Appl . Severity of Failure of Failure See below

See below

Test Req’d

Test Methord

Pass/Fail Criteria

Yes

See subsystems below See subsystems below

No unintended exposure; No Incorrect exposure （the exposure results is not meet product registration standard）

Acquire expectant dose

MEDIUM

MEDIUM

Yes

Monitor exposure parameter that displaied on system console.

Table electromagnetic lock (EMlock) function.

MEDIUM

LOW

Yes

Check EM-lock after immunity test.

The EM-lock function work as intended after immunity test.

Exposure parameter display Exposure parameter set .

MEDIUM

LOW

Yes

Observance Exposure parameter; Set exposure parameter after Immunity Test.

No exposure parameter change during immunity test; Exposure parameter set as intended after immunity test.

LOW

LOW

Yes

Turn on and boot up.

System able to turn on and boot up successfully after immunity test.

MEDIUM

LOW

Yes

Monitor grid Oscillating No grid Oscillating aborted during immunity test. during immunity test.

Provide power to sub-systems.

Oscillating Grid


Page 415

[email protected]

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the separation distance can be estimated using the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer. V1 and V2 are the COMPLIANCE LEVELS for the IEC 610004-6 test and E1 is the COMPLIANCE LEVEL for the IEC 61000-4-3 test. V1 and V2 are in V and E1 is in V/m.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 416


1:28 PM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 5275601-100, REVISION 12 Table 5 Product Essential Performance


Section 3.0 Use Recommendations This product complies with IEC 60601-1-2:2001+A1:2004 EMC standard for medical devices and with radio frequency emission requirements per CISPR11 Group1 Class A standard limits. The XR 6000 is predominantly intended for use in hospitals. Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF Signals (Cellular Phones, Transceivers, or Radio Controlled Products) in the vicinity of this equipment as it may cause performance outside the published specifications. Keep the power to these types of devices turned off when near this equipment. Adhering to the distance separation recommended in Table 4, between 150 kHz & 2.5 GHz, will reduce disturbances recorded at the image level but may not eliminate all disturbances. However, when installed and operated as specified herein, the system will maintain its essential performance by continuing to safely acquire controlled radiological X-ray exposures in a mobile radiography environment. For example, a 1W mobile phone (800 MHz to 2.5 GHz carrier frequency) shall be put 2.3 meters apart from the XR 6000 (in order to avoid image interference risks). The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified may result in degraded ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY of the XR 6000.

Section 4.0 Installation Recommendations This system complies with above mentioned EMC standard when used with supplied cables. In order to minimize interference risks, the following requirements shall apply.

4.1

Cable Shielding & Grounding All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference.

4.2

Subsystem & Accessories Power Supply Distribution All components, accessories subsystems, systems which are electrically connected to the XR 6000, must have all AC power supplied by the same power distribution panel & line.

4.3

Stacked Components & Equipment The XR 6000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment; if adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the XR 6000 should be tested and verified in order to ensure normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used. Consult qualified personnel regarding device/system configurations.

Page 416

Section 3.0 Use Recommendations

[email protected]

The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients, and other people who may be around this equipment to comply fully with the above equipment requirements.

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 417


1:28 PM


4.4


Low Frequency Magnetic Field Not applicable.

4.5

Electrostatic Discharge Environment & Recommendations In order to reduce electrostatic discharge interference, install a charge dissipative floor material to avoid electrostatic charge buildup. The relative humidity shall be at least 30 percent. The dissipative material shall be connected to the system ground reference, if applicable.

[email protected]


Page 417

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 418


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 418

Section 4.0 Installation Recommendations

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 419


1:28 PM



Appendix B - Revision History Revision

Date

Reason for change

1

June 20, 2007 First Release

2

Nov. 08, 2007 Add cabinet tray pull/push location, silicone compound to HV cables, PDU troubleshootings, part replacement, Jedi schematics, and PM form Update table unpacking process, accuracy of x-ray field and light field alignment, table top part number

3

Feb. 15, 2008 Remove "LING LONG" Add door light and gate command pin direction Add Collimator PM

4

April 25, 2008 Add technique factors measurement criteria. Add CR AEC calibration process. Add tube stand bearing replacement instruction Add note to grid installation instruction. Add instruction to table leveling adjustment. Add system configuration instruction.

5

Aug 28,2008

6

Mar 09, 2011 Update tube voltage accuracy in chapter 4. Update FRU list

7

Aug 18, 2011 Revise EMC standard version

8

Jun 15,2012

Add Bucky Handle Assembly to FRU list.

9

Jun 29, 2012

Add requirement to meet the 3rd edition IEC60601 standards.

10

Jun 25, 2014

Remove CE Mark.

11

Aug 25, 2014 Add CE Mark. update Figure 2-55

12

Oct 30, 2014

Add installation instruction for oscillate grid for the system configured with advanced tube stand and advanced wall stand. Add HHS test instruction.

Appendix B - Revision History

Page 419

[email protected]

Add LOCTITE 242(or 243) requirements during the tube installation; Add FRU parts Item 63, item 64

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 420


1:28 PM



[email protected]

Page 420

Appendix B - Revision History

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 421


1:28 PM

[email protected] Xr

ay

PioneerSM_ENG.book

Page 422


1:28 PM

[email protected]

GE HEALTHCARE

422

NO.1, YONGCHANG NORTH ROAD ECONOMIC & TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT ZONE FAX: 86-10-67881850 TELE: 86-10-58068888 BEIJING, P. R. CHINA 100176

GE XR6000 X-Ray - Service Manual

Recommend Documents